General (Extension)

  Overview

Use the General property page to specify the following Extension options:

  Display Name

  Version

  Extension Name

  Administrative Note


Display Name

Sets the display name for the Extension. You can type up to a 256 character name.


Version

Displays the version number of the extension (MS Mail, Internet, or Schedule+ Free Busy) .DLL.


Extension Name

Displays the .DLL file name for the Extension.


Permissions (Extension)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this extension object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this mailbox. For extension objects, Microsoft Exchange provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for extension object permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete this object.
Modify Permissions	Modify permissions on this object.
  Windows NT Accounts with Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


General (Extension for Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector)

Use the General property page to specify the following Extension options:

  Display Name

  Version

  Extension Name

  Administrative Note


Permissions (Extension for Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this extension object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this mailbox. For extension objects, Microsoft Exchange provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for extension object permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete this object.
Modify Permissions	Modify permissions on this object.
  Windows NT Accounts with Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


General (E-Mail Address Generators Container)

The Address Types container holds various e-mail address generators. These generators control the automatic generation of various e-mail addresses. By default, Microsoft Exchange provides the following e-mail address generators:

Internet e-mail address generator: generates Internet e-mail addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server recipients.

MS Mail e-mail address generator: generates MS Mail e-mail addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server recipients.

X.400 e-mail address generator: generates X.400 e-mail addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server recipients.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Administrative Note


Display Name

Sets the name as it will appear on the directory and property pages. You can type up to a 256 character name.


Directory Name

The directory name is created when you install Microsoft Exchange Server and cannot be changed.


General (E-Mail Address Generator)

  Overview

Use the General property page to provide the path to the dynamic-link library (DLL) file that generates e-mail addresses.

  Display Name

  Version

  Address Generator Name

  Administrative Note


Version

Displays the version number of the e-mail address generator .DLL.


Address Generator Name

Displays the filename of the e-mail address generator .DLL.


Permissions (E-Mail Address Generator)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on an e-mail address generator. You delegate permissionsto a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an e-mail address generator. For the e-mail address generator, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for e-mail address generator permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this e-mail address generator.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this e-mail address generator.
Delete	Delete this e-mail address generator.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this e-mail address generator.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


General (Details Templates Container)

The Details Templates container holds various foreign language template containers, which in turn contain details templates in the corresponding languages. Details templates let you customize a variety of Microsoft Exchange Server dialog boxes.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

Displays the directory name created when you install Microsoft Exchange Server.


General (Details Templates Container - All Languages)

The Details Templates Language containers contain details templates in various foreign languages (US/English, German, and so forth). Details templates let you customize a variety of Microsoft Exchange Server dialog boxes.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

Displays the directory names created when you install Microsoft Exchange Server. Directory names cannot be changed.


General (All Templates)

Use the General property page to view or modify the name of a template, to view the directory name, and to provide an administrative note.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Client Local Help File Name

  Import 16 Bit Help File

  Import 32 Bit Help File

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

Displays the directory name created when you installed Microsoft Exchange Server. Directory names cannot be changed.


Client Local Help File Name

Name of the template Help file that will be created on client computers, regardless of the name of the Help file you choose to import and associate with this template.

Importing a new template Help file permanently overwrites the template Help file shipped with Microsoft Exchange Server. As a precaution, you should access all details and One-Off Address Templates from a client computer, thereby creating copies of the associated Help files in the TEMP directory of that computer. You can then save the Help files and import them as needed.


Import 16 Bit Help File

Opens the Microsoft Exchange Administrator dialog box and allows you to select the Help file that will be displayed on computers using Windows 16-bit operating systems.


Import 32 Bit Help File

Opens the Microsoft Exchange Administrator dialog box and allows you to select the Help file that will be displayed on computers using Windows 32-bit operating systems.


Permissions (All Templates)

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on a template. You delegate permissionsto a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on a template. For templates, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for template permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this template.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this template.
Delete	Delete this template.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this template.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Templates (All Templates)

Use details templates to customize Microsoft Exchange Server dialog boxes. You can use the Templates property page to view all the fields and controls that make up an existing Microsoft Exchange Server dialog box. You can modify existing controls, add new controls, or remove controls. You can also test the appearance of the dialog box before accepting your changes.

Click an area in the following graphic for more information.


X Column

Displays the X coordinate (in dialog units) for the new control. This is the distance from the left side of the dialog box to the upper left corner of the control.


Y Column

Displays the Y coordinate (in dialog units) for the new control. This is the distance from the top of the dialog box to the upper left corner of the control.


W Column

Displays the width (in dialog units) of the new control.


H Column

Displays the height (in dialog units) of the new control.


Control Column

Displays the name of the different controls (such as group boxes and edit boxes) that make up the template you are customizing. You can create new controls, modify existing controls, or remove a control.


Value Column

Displays the value of the control listed in the Control column. For example, a Label control might have the value &First Name. In the resulting dialog box, this control appears as First Name.


New Button

Creates a new control on the template. You are prompted to choose the type of control. You are then provided with a set of options that let you define the appearance and function of the control.


Edit Button

Modifies the existing control you have selected. A dialog box appears containing a set of options that let you define the appearance and function of the control.


Remove Button

Removes the selected existing control from the template.


Move Up Button

Moves the selected existing control up in the list.


Move Down Button

Moves the selected existing control down in the list.


Test Button

Tests the appearance of the dialog box. Once you are satisfied with its appearance, choose OK to accept your changes.


Original Button

Returns all controls on the template to their original values.


MS-DOS Templates (All Templates)

Use details templates to customize Microsoft Exchange Server dialog boxes. You can use the MS-DOS Templates property page to view all the fields and controls that make up an existing Microsoft Exchange Server dialog box. You can modify existing controls, add new controls, or remove controls. You can also test the appearance of the dialog box before accepting your changes.

Click an area in the following graphic for more information.


General (One-Off Address Templates Container)

One-off address templates are templates that you use to address messages to mailboxes that are not in your global address list or in your personal address book. They are called one-off because they are often used to send one piece of mail off to an address and are not used again. (However, you can use this template to send mail and then add the addressee to your personal address book.)

The template appears in the Microsoft Exchange Client any time you are prompted to provide an e-mail address for a recipient.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

Displays the directory name created when you install Microsoft Exchange Server. This name cannot be changed.


Command Line Switches

You can start the Administrator program from the command line using a variety of switches. For example, you can start the Administrator program in raw mode by typing the following at the command line:

admin /r

The following table lists the switches you can use when starting the Administrator program from the command line.

Switch	Description
/r	Starts the Administrator program in raw mode. Raw mode provides access to all directory attributes contained in the schema. You can also run the Administrator program in raw mode by creating a RawMode registry entry.
/h	Starts the Administrator program and displays this Help topic.
/s <server name>	Starts the Administrator program and connects to the server you specify for server name.
/m [Site\]MonitorName\Server	Starts the Administrator program and starts the monitor you specify for monitor name. Sever Site is optional. MonitorName is the directory name of the monitor within the site, and Server is the server to which the monitor should connect.
/t	Temporarily suspends monitoring on a server that you are taking down for maintenance or backup. Used in conjunction with various monitor suspension options.
/i	Runs the command line directory import utility.
/e	Runs the command line directory export utility.


Monitor Suspension Options

You can use the /t command line switch in conjunction with the following options:

Option	Description
/t r	Suspends repairs during the maintenance mode, but sends a notification if a problem is found.
/t n	Suspends notification during the maintenance mode, but initiates any repairs specified by the monitor.
/t nr	Suspends both notification and repairs during the maintenance mode.
/t	Resets the monitor to normal mode.
Note  When performing maintenance on a server, you must set the admin /t command to start before the server goes offline. Consider the polling intervals of the monitors and be sure that each monitor receives a maintenance mode notification before the server goes down.


Command Line Directory Import Utility

Use the command line directory import utility to import directory information from a text file.

Use the following syntax:

admin /i <import file> /d <directory server name> /n /o <options file>

Where	Is
<import file>	The name of the file that contains the directory information to be imported.
<directory server name>	The name of the server whose Directory is to be updated.
/n	"No progress." This indicates that you do not want to see the progress bar that is displayed by default during directory import.
<options file>	The name of a file containing options that control how directory information is imported. See Directory Import Options File for more information.
Note	The /i switch is required. All other switches are optional.


Directory Import Options File

When running the directory import utility from the command line, you have the option of using the /o switch followed by the name of a file that contains a variety of options to control how directory information is imported. The directory import options file must be in the following format.

[Import]

DirectoryService=<DS server name>     (default=NULL)

Basepoint=<DN of basepoint object>     (default=NULL, which indicates the local site)

Container=<RDN of container object>     (default=Recipients)

InformationLevel=[None, Minimal, Full]     (default=Minimal)

RecipientTemplate=<DN of default mailbox>     (default=none)

NTDomain=<NT domain where accounts will be created>     (default=none)

OverwriteProperties=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

CreateNTAccounts=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

DeleteNTAccounts=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

ApplyNTSecurity=[Yes, No]     (default=Yes)

GeneratePassword=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

RawMode=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

CodePage=[-1,0,code-page-ID] (Default=0)

Note  If you set Raw Mode to Yes, the Directory Import process interprets attribute values literally, without constructing attributes from other attributes.  For example, if Raw Mode is set to No, the Home-Server pseudo-attribute is used to create the Home-MTA and Home-MDB recipient attributes.  If Raw Mode is set to Yes, you can provide explicit values for Home-MTA and Home-MDB, and they will be imported as specified (even if the specified attributes are erroneous or damaging).


Command Line Directory Export Utility

Use the command line directory export utility to export directory information to a text file.

Use the following syntax:

admin /e <export file> /d <directory server name> /n /o <options file>

Where	Is
<export file>	The name of the file where you want exported directory information to be written.
<directory server name>	The name of the server from which Directory will be exported.
/n	"No progress." This indicates that you do not want to see the progress bar that is displayed by default during directory export.
<options file>	The name of a file containing options that control how directory information is exported. See Directory Export Options File for more information.
Note	The /e switch is required. All other switches are optional.


Directory Export Options File

When running the directory export utility from the command line, you have the option of using the /o switch followed by the name of a file that contains a variety of options to control how directory information is exported. The directory export options file must be in the following format.

[Export]

DirectoryService=<DS server name>     (default=NULL)

HomeServer=<server name>     (default=NULL)

Basepoint=<DN of basepoint object>     (default=NULL, which indicates the local site)

Container=<RDN of container object>     (default=Recipients)

ExportObject=[Mailbox, Remote (custom recipients), DL, Recipients (all recipients), All (all object types)]     (default=Mailbox)

InformationLevel=[None, Minimal, Full]     (default=Minimal)

BasepointOnly=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

RawMode=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

Hiddenobjects=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

Subcontainers=[Yes, No] (default=No)

CodePage=[-1,0,code-page-ID] (Default=0)

Note  If you exclude both the Basepoint and Container entries, the organization recipients container (Global Address List) will be exported.


Creating a Raw Mode Registry Entry

When you run the Administrator program in raw mode, you have access to all directory attributes contained in the schema. There are two ways to run the Administrator program in raw mode. You can start the Administrator program from the command line using the /r command line switch, or you can create a RawMode entry in the Windows NT Registry. Creating a registry entry causes the Administrator program to run in raw mode at all times, whether you start it from the command line or from the Windows NT Program Manager.

To create a RawMode registry entry, use the Windows NT Registry Editor to add the following entry:

MSExchangeAdmin

Desktop

RawMode=[0,1]

Where 0 means that the Administrator program will never run in raw mode, and 1 means that it will always run in raw mode.


X Coordinate

Displays the X coordinate (in dialog units) of the control listed in the Control column. This is the distance from the left side of the dialog box to the upper left corner of the control.


Y Coordinate

Displays the Y coordinate (in dialog units) of the control listed in the Control column. This is the distance from the top of the dialog box to the upper left corner of the control.


Width

Displays the width (in dialog units) of the control.


Field

Displays the value for the field.


Text

Displays the text to appear in the label.


Height

Displays the height (in dialog units) of the control.


Length

Displays the maximum number of characters allowed.


Multiline

When selected, allows multiple lines in the field.


Help Context

Displays the context number for the control's Help topic.


Display Horizontal Scroll Bar

When selected, displays a horizontal scroll bar in the list box.


Display Vertical Scroll Bar

When selected, displays a vertical scroll bar in the list box.


Windows NT Accounts with Inherited Permissions

Read-only list box that displays all Windows NT accounts with inherited rights to this object.


Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

Shows all Windows NT accounts and groups that have permissions on this object. Select one of these accounts or groups, and then choose a role from the Roles box.


Roles

Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. Each role is defined by a set of rights that appear as checkboxes next to the Roles box. You can define custom roles or use one of the default roles that Microsoft Exchange Server provides.


Rights

Rights define the specific actions that a particular Windows NT account or group can perform on an object. For example, the Delete right gives a user the ability to delete an object.


Add Button

Opens a dialog box where you can select one or more Windows NT accounts and groups to add to the list of accounts and groups with permissions on this object.


Remove Button

Removes the currently selected Windows NT account or group from the list of accounts and groups with permissions on this object.


Show Names From The

Displays the name of the Address Book currently selected. Click the down arrow in the field to display a list of Address Books you can select.


Type Name or Select From List

Type the name of the mailbox, custom recipient, distribution list, or mailbox agent. You can also select the desired name from the list.


Add Button

Adds the selected name(s) to the box on the right of the Add button. When you click OK, the name(s) in this box are copied to the appropriate fields on the property page.


Properties Button

Displays the Properties dialog box, which you use to view the various properties of the selected mailbox, distribution list, custom recipient, or mailbox agent.


Find Button

Displays the Find dialog box, which you use to locate a mailbox, distribution list, custom recipient, or mailbox agent in the selected Address Book.


Never

Select Never if you never want the associated event to occur.


Always

Select Always if you want the event to occur every 15 minutes.


Selected Times

Select Selected Times to designate specific times or blocks of time in the schedule grid.


Detail View

Select 1 Hour to view the schedule grid in one-hour increments, or select 15 Minute to view the schedule grid in 15-minute increments.


Accept Messages From

A list of all senders from which this recipient will accept messages. Select All if you want this recipient to accept messages from all senders. Select List, and then choose Modify to specify a list of senders from which this recipient will accept messages.


Reject Messages From

A list of all senders from which this recipient will not accept messages. Select None if you want this recipient to accept messages from all senders. Select List, and then choose Modify to specify a list of senders from which this recipient will reject messages.


Modify Button

Choose Modify to open the Address Book. You can then choose one or more recipients from the organization to add to either the Accept Messages From box or the Reject Messages From box.


E-Mail Addresses

Use the E-Mail Addresses property page to create or modify alternate e-mail addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server objects. E-mail addresses are used to identify Microsoft Exchange Server objects to the gateways and connectors that connect Microsoft Exchange Server to other messaging systems. Use the E-Mail Addresses property page to create, modify, or remove one or more of the following types of addresses:

Custom address

MS Mail (PC) address

X.400 address

Internet address

By default, Microsoft Exchange Server automatically generates MS Mail, X.400, and Internet addresses for every recipient object using information that you provide. If you change recipient information that is used to create e-mail addresses (such as a mailbox First Name, Last Name, or Alias Name), the e-mail addresses are not automatically updated. You must manually edit e-mail addresses once they have been generated.

Caution  Many other Microsoft Exchange Server services use these default addresses. Changing or removing the default addresses can cause messaging and message-based services (such as directory replication) to fail.

  E-Mail Addresses

  New Button

  Edit Button

  View Button

  Remove Button

  Set As Reply Address


E-Mail Addresses

Lists all existing e-mail addresses for this recipient object.


New Button

Choose New to open the New Entry dialog box so that you can create one of a number of different types of e-mail addresses.


Edit Button

Select an e-mail address in the E-Mail Addresses box, and then choose Edit to open a dialog box where you can edit address information.

Edit is available only if you have modify permissions for the recipient.


View Button

Displays the Address Properties dialog box for the selected e-mail address, which you use to view the components that make up the address.

View appears when you do not have modify permissions for the recipient.


Remove Button

Removes the selected address from the system.


Set As Reply Address

Sets the selected address as the default reply address. When a user receives mail from this recipient and clicks Reply in Microsoft Exchange Client, this address is used.


Diagnostics Logging

Use this property page to browse or edit logging levels for various Microsoft Exchange Server events.

Diagnostics logging levels determine which Microsoft Exchange Server events are written to the Windows NT Event Log. They represent a progression of detail from recording only significant events, like an application failure, through moderately important events, like receipt of messages across a gateway, to events relevant only to debugging. Normally, you want to log only critical events. However, when problems occur, diagnostics logging lets you change the logging levels to capture more detailed events.

  Services

  Category

  Logging Level

  Logging Level Options


Services

Name of the Microsoft Exchange Server service. Services are custom components or connectors and can include gateways, mailbox agents, or add-ins.


Category

A group of related application functions. Logging levels are set by category.

Appendix B in the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator's Guide has a complete list of diagnostics logging categories.


Logging Level

Displays the logging level for the service.

The logging level determines which events are written to the Windows NT application event log. When Microsoft Exchange Server generates an event less than or equal to the logging level, the event is logged.


Logging Level Options

None: Only critical events, error events, and events with a logging level of zero are logged. This is the default.

Minimum: Events with a logging level of 1 or lower are logged.

Medium: Events with a logging level of 3 or lower are logged.

Maximum: Events with a logging level of 5 or lower are logged.


General (Containers)

A container is an object in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory that contains other objects or containers. For example, the Configuration container holds objects such as the DS Site Configuration object, as well as containers such as the Connections container.

Use the General property page to enter a display name for the container. This is the name that appears in the Administrator window. The Directory Name is created during Microsoft Exchange Server setup and cannot be changed.

You can also enter an optional note of up to 256 characters in the Administrative Note box.


Permissions (Containers)

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this container. When you give a user permissions on this container, they inherit the same level of permissions on all objects below that container in the directory hierarchy.

You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on a particular object. For this container object, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for container permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects below the selected object in the directory hierarchy.
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the members of a distribution list.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the job title and display name fields in a mailbox.
Delete	Delete an object.
Modify Permissions	Modify permissions on existing objects. For example, without this permission, a user could grant permissions to new mailboxes but could not modify permissions on existing ones.
Send As (Servers Container only)	Send messages as a mailbox.
Mailbox Owner (Servers Container only)	Log on to a mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.
Replication (Servers Container only)	Replicate directory information with other servers.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Backup Read Pointer definition
Backup Read Pointer

A logical pointer into the database file that indicates what part of the database file has been processed.


Circular Logging definition
Circular Logging

Automatically overwrites the oldest transaction log files after the information they contain has been committed to the database, reducing disk storage space requirements. This feature is turned off by default when Microsoft Exchange Server is installed.


Log File Checkpoint definition
Log File Checkpoint

Indicates the earliest point where a database operation is logged (whether committed or not), but its corresponding changes on database pages are not yet committed to disk. Microsoft Exchange Server will replay the transaction log file to restore the database during recovery.


Database Page definition
Database Page

The Microsoft Exchange database server is a sequence of pages, each of which is a 4K block of data.


Transaction Log File definition
Transaction Log File

Files used for backup and recovery that store all write transactions performed on the directory and information store databases. Transaction log files are stored in the MDBDATA and DSDATA subdirectories, and their names have the form EDBXXXXX.LOG, where X is a hexadecimal number from 0 to F. The default size of each complete log file is 5 MB.


Inbound Site definition
Inbound Site

Sites from which local sites receive directory information through a directory replication connector.


Outbound Site definition
Outbound Site

Sites to which the local bridgehead server sends out updated directory information.


Global Group definition
Global Group

Group of recipients which may include mailbox users, custom recipients, distribution lists, and mailbox agents.


Link Monitor definition
Link Monitor

Monitors the round-trip time between a Microsoft Exchange Server computer and another server or foreign system. Notification occurs if a test message takes longer than expected to make the round trip.


Server Monitor definition
Server Monitor

Monitors the condition of servers, and their associated services and clocks, in a site. Notification occurs if a service fails to start or shuts down, clients cannot connect to the server, or the server is not on the network. The server monitor can also restart computers or services and synchronize the system times.


MTA Transport Stack definition
MTA Transport Stack

Defines the transport that is used with an X.400 Connector or Dynamic RAS Connector to connect a Microsoft Exchange Server computer to another system. The server on which the stack is installed processes all messages from all connectors within the site that reference the stack.


Role definition
Role

Sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object.


Status Bar definition
Status Bar

Displays information about a selected command and indicates progress during an action. The box on the right displays the total number of objects in the selected container.


Service definition
Service

Extends the functionality of Microsoft Exchange Server. Services include Microsoft Exchange components, server gateways, mailbox agents, and add-ins. Each service is represented in the directory by an object which enables the user to administrate the service using the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program.


Domain Controller definition
Domain Controller

Refers to the Windows NT Server computer that maintains the security database of all user accounts in a domain. Windows NT Server domains can have one primary domain controller (PDC) and one or more backup domain controllers (BDC).


Mailbox definition
Mailbox

The delivery location for all incoming mail messages for a designated owner. Information in a user's mailbox is stored in the private information store on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer. A mailbox can contain messages, attachments, documents, and more. Mailboxes are associated with Windows NT user accounts.


Profile definition
Profile

A group of settings that provide Microsoft Exchange Server with essential information about a client's configuration. It contains the delivery location for incoming messages, files, and other items, the location of the user's personal address book, and a list of all the information services that are available. A user may have multiple profiles on a single client for different configurations; however, only one profile can be used at any one time.


Administrator Window definition
Administrator Window

The main user interface display of the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program. The Administrator window provides the tools needed to manage and configure all objects, including organizations, sites, and servers.


Properties definition
Properties

The attributes of a Microsoft Exchange Server directory object, selected by using property sheets for the specified object. For example, to modify the permissions on a mailbox, make changes to the mailbox's Permissions property page.


Multi-Valued Property definition
Multi-Valued Property

A property which has multiple values. For example, an address with multiple values including MS Mail (PC), X.400, and SMTP addresses.


Local Area Network definition
Local Area Network

A group of computers and other devices dispersed over a relatively limited area and connected by a communications link that enables any device to interact with any other in the network.


Distribution List definition
Distribution List

A collection of recipients that are grouped together and addressed as a single recipient. A message addressed to a distribution list will be delivered to every user in the list. Administrators can create distribution lists that are available in the Address Book. Users can also create personal distribution lists and add them to their Personal Address Book (PAB).


Information Store definition
Information Store

A Microsoft Exchange Server core component. The information store is server-based storage that contains users' mailboxes and public and private folders. It enforces security on this information and maintains information in two databases, the public information store and private information store. See also public information store, private information store.


Schema Attributes definition
Schema Attributes

Schema attributes are properties that describe Microsoft Exchange directory objects.


Permissions definition
Permissions

Controls how a particular object may be accessed and provides specific authorization to perform an action.


Custom Recipient definition
Custom Recipient

A recipient in a foreign system whose address is in the Address Book.


Address Book definition
Address Book

Makes recipients (mailboxes, custom recipients, distribution lists, and public folders) in the directory available to users so they can access information like a telephone directory. They can also use the Address Book to address messages. The Address Book can contain one or more address lists.


Container definition
Container

In the Administrator program, an object which contains other objects. For example, the Recipients container is composed of recipient objects.


Directory definition
Directory

The directory stores all the information available about an organization's resources and users including mailboxes, public folders, distribution lists, servers, and more. Other components use the directory to map addresses and route messages. The directory is automatically replicated to all servers in a site, and it can be configured to be replicated automatically to servers in other sites. All recipient objects in the directory are contained in the Address Book which users can use like a telephone directory. The directory is based on the International Organization for Standards (ISO) X.500 specification.


Recipient definition
Recipient

An object in the directory which can receive messages and information. Recipients are mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and public folders.


Raw Object definition
Raw Object

A unique object that you can create when running the Administrator program in raw mode. A raw object is made up of various schema attributes that you specify.


Public Folder definition
Public Folder

A folder located on Microsoft Exchange Server computers that facilitate the exchange of all types of information between groups of people in an organization. A public folder can include information such as e-mail messages, spreadsheets, graphics, and voice mail and can be configured for different types of applications, for example, bulletin boards, discussion forums, customer tracking systems, and so on. Public folders are stored on Microsoft Exchange Server computers.


Parent definition
Parent

An object in the Administrator program directory hierarchy that is superior to another object, the child object. For example, the server container is the parent object of the server object because the server object is in the server container. Any permissions on the parent object are inherited by the child object.


Raw Directory definition
Raw Directory

A view of the directory that exposes all of the schema attributes that make up individual objects.


Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI) definition
Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI)

A common interface that Microsoft Exchange Client components use to access data from the server components. Messaging applications and information services that comply with MAPI can be used with Microsoft Exchange Server and Microsoft Exchange Client to provide additional functionality.


Directory Schema definition
Directory Schema

(The schema). Defines the structure for information in the directory. The schema defines the rules for structuring information, such as which attributes are associated with which objects, and which types of values can be associated with which attributes. The schema also defines the relationship between objects. The directory enforces these rules.


Single-Instance Message definition
Single-Instance Message

A message that is sent to more than one mailbox on the same server. Microsoft Exchange Server stores one instance of the message in the server's private information store, which reduces disk storage requirements.


Delegate definition
Delegate

In Microsoft Exchange Client, a representative with special permissions to manage mail for another user, send mail for another user, or both. These permissions are granted by the other user or by the system administrator.

Public Delegate

A public delegate is a recipient that has authority to receive and send messages on behalf of another mailbox. For example, a sales manager can make her administrative assistant a public delegate so that he can send out a standard message in response to product questions. Since the administrative assistant is a public delegate, it would appear as though the manager had sent the message.


Auto Reply Message definition
Auto Reply Message

A message generated by a rule set in an AutoAssistant. The message is automatically sent to another user in the organization. For example, you can create an auto-reply message if you plan to be out of the office for an extended period and want to notify those sending mail of your absence.


Raw Mode definition
Raw Mode

A mode of running the Administrator program that exposes all of the directory schema attributes that make up individual objects.


Event definition
Event

Any significant occurrence in a system or application. Each event generated by Microsoft Exchange Server is assigned a number from 0 to 5 to describe its significance, with 0 being the most significant and 5 being the least significant.


Add User Or Group

Use the Add Users And Groups dialog box to add Windows NT accounts and groups to the list of users with permissions on a particular object.

  List Names From

  Names

  Add Button

  Members Button

  Search Button

  Add Name


List Names From

Displays the domain name. Click the down arrow to display a list of available domains.


Names

Lists the names in the domain selected in List Names From.


Add Button

Copies the name selected in Names to the Add Name box.


Members Button

Displays the Local Group Membership dialog. Local Group Membership lists the members of the group selected in Names.


Search Button

Displays the Find Account dialog. Use Find Account to locate the user or group name for which you want to give permissions.


Add Name

Lists the user and group names for which you want to give permissions. You can add a name to this list by selecting the name from Names and clicking Add.

Click OK to copy the user and group names to Windows NT accounts with permissions (Permissions property page).


Local Group Membership

Displays the members of the local group.

  Members of "_____" Local Group

  Add Button

  Member Button


Members of "______" Local Group

Lists the members of the group you selected in Names on the Add Users and Groups dialog.


Add Button

Copies the user names you select to Add Names on the Add Users and Groups dialog.


Member Button

Displays the Global Group Membership dialog. Global Group Membership lists the members of the group selected in Members of "______" Local Group.


Find Account

Helps you locate a Windows NT account. You can search all domains or specific domains.

  Find User Or Group

  Search Button

  Search All

  Search Only In

  Search Results

  Add Button


Find User Or Group

Type the user or group name you want to locate and click Search. Search Results displays the user or group name(s) matching your entry.


Search Button

Starts the search process. Find Account searches for the entry you type in Find User or Group and displays the name(s) matching your entry in Search Results.


Search All

Click this option to search all organization domains for the user or group name you specified in Find User or Group.


Search Only In

Click this option to search for the user or group name you typed in Find User or Group only in the domains you select.  To select more than one domain, press and hold [Ctrl] while clicking the desired domains.


Search Results

Displays the user or group name(s) matching your entry in Find User or Group.


Add Button

Adds the user or group name selected in Search Results to Add Names on the Add Users and Groups dialog.


Escalation Editor

Use the Escalation Editor dialog box to configure an escalation event to be added to the list of notifications on the Link Monitor Notification, or Server Monitor Notification property page. You can also test the escalation event to ensure that it is working properly.

  Time Delay

  Alert Only

  Communication

  Pick Recipient Button

  Test Button


Time Delay

Specify the amount of time after the server or link goes into warning or alert state that the notification event should occur. Type a number in the Time Delay box, and select a unit of time from the list.


Alert Only

Select to send notification when a monitored link or server is in alert state only. Notification does not occur if a monitored link or server is in warning state.


Communication

Select a notification type.

If you select	Do this
Mail Message	Choose the Pick Recipient button, and select a mailbox to notify in the dialog box that appears.
Windows NT Alert	In the Computer To Alert box, type the name of the computer to receive the alert.
Launch A Process	In the Path Name box, type the full path of the process to be launched.


Pick Recipient Button

If you selected Mail Message in the Communication box, choose Pick Recipient, and select a mailbox to notify in the dialog box that appears.


Test Button

After you specify a notification event in the Communication box, choose Test to ensure that it is working properly.


Details

Displays detailed information about the selected message in a queue.

Option	Description
Originator	The full distinguished name of the message sender.
MTSID	The unique message ID.
Submit Time	The time that the message was submitted to this MTA.
Priority	The priority (Low, Normal, or High) of the message.
Size	The size (K) of the message.


Change Priority

Lets you change the priority of the selected message. You can choose Low, Normal, or High. Messages with High priority are transferred first.


New X.400 Connector

  See Also

Select the type of X.400 connector you want to create. The Connector Type box displays the types of connectors you can create based on the installed MTA transport stacks. Microsoft Exchange Server supports the following X.400 connector types:

Eicon X.25

TCP/IP

TP4


See Also


New MTA Transport Stack

Lets you create a new MTA transport stack. You must create an MTA transport stack before attempting to create an X.400 or Dynamic RAS connector.

  Type

  Server


Type

Select the type of transport stack you want to install. Before creating a connector, you must install the corresponding transport stack. For example, if you want to create an X.400 TP/4 connector, you must first install and configure a TP/4 stack.


Server

Select the server where you want to install the MTA transport stack. This server processes all messages from all connectors within the site that reference that stack.


Directory Import Container

Shows a graphical representation of all recipients containers in your site. Select the recipients container where you want to import directory information and create recipients.


Directory Export Container

Shows a graphical representation of all recipients containers in your site. Select the recipients container from which you want to export directory information.


Clean Mailbox

Specify which messages should be deleted from the selected mailbox.

  All Messages Older Than

  All Messages Greater Than

  Sensitivity

  Read Items

  Delete Folder Associated Information

  Action


All Messages Older Than

Type a value representing days. All messages older than the specified number of days will be deleted.


All Messages Greater Than

Type a value representing kilobytes. All messages larger than the specified number of kilobytes will be deleted.


Sensitivity

Messages are marked with one of four sensitivity levels. Select one or more of the Sensitivity options.

Option	Description
Normal	Leaves the item header blank and sends messages with no sensitivity.
Personal	Typically, a personal message contains non-business related information.
Private	A private message prohibits any recipient from modifying your original message when it is replied to or forwarded.
Confidential	A confidential message should be treated according to policies on confidentiality of your organization.


Read Items

Delete messages based on whether or not they have been read.

Select	To
Read Items	Delete all messages that have been read.
Unread Items	Deletes all messages that have not been read.
Read and Unread Mail	Deletes messages that have been read and messages that have not been read.


Delete Folder Associated Information

If cleared, no folder associated information will be deleted.

If enabled, all information and messages associated with the selected folder will be deleted.


Action

Indicate what action should be taken on deleted messages.

Delete Items Immediately completely deletes all messages that meet the specified criteria. Once messages are deleted they cannot be retrieved.

Move Items to Deleted Items Folder moves deleted messages into the selected user's Deleted Items folder. Messages in the Deleted Items folder can be retrieved, viewed, and moved to other folders.


Server Browser

The Server Browser shows a graphical representation of the sites in your organization and the servers in each site. This dialog box appears any time you need to indicate a specific Microsoft Exchange Server computer that will be used with a particular task. If you do not see the server you want, double-click a site to expand the list of all servers in that site. Select a server and choose the Select button to use the specified server for the task you are trying to complete.


Containers

The Containers dialog box shows a graphical representation of all recipients containers in the site you are currently administering.


Windows NT User Extraction

Exports multiple objects to an import file by reading a list of users from a Windows NT domain.

  Windows NT Domain

  Windows NT Domain Controller

  Output Filename


Windows NT Domain

Select the Windows NT Domain for which you want to extract user data.


Windows NT Domain Controller

Select the name of the primary or backup domain controller for the Windows NT domain you selected (in the Windows NT Domain field).


Output Filename

Displays the name of the file containing the extracted data. To specify another output filename, click Browse to display the Microsoft Exchange Administrator dialog. Use the dialog to select the appropriate output filename.


NetWare User Extraction

Exports multiple objects to an import file by reading a list of users from a NetWare server. The resulting import file can then be used by batch import.

  NetWare Server Name

  NetWare User

  NetWare User Password

  Output Filename


NetWare Server Name

Type the name of the NetWare server containing the user data you want to extract.


NetWare User

Type your NetWare user name.


NetWare User Password

Type your NetWare user password.


Output Filename

Displays the name of the file containing the extracted data. To specify another output filename, click Browse to display the Microsoft Exchange Administrator dialog. Use the dialog to select the appropriate output filename.


Modify Age Limits

Use the options in the Modify Age Limits dialog box to set an age limit for the replica of a public folder that exists on this public information store or for all replicas of a public folder that exist throughout your organization.

Click on an area in the following graphic for more information.


Folder Display Name

The display name of the selected folder. This is the name that appears in the Administrator window.


Items Removed

Displays a value (in days) indicating that items in the selected public folder replica older than the displayed value have expired and been deleted.


This Replica

Type a value (in days) to set an age limit for the replica of the selected public folder that exists on this public information store only. The age limit you specify here does not affect other replicas of the public folder that may exist on other servers in your organization.


All Replicas

Type a value (in days) to set an age limit for all replicas of the selected public folder that exist throughout your organization.


Effective Age Limit

Age limit for messages in this public folder replica. Because age limits can be set on all folders, on all replicas, and on specific replicas, the Effective Age Limit provides an easy way for you to see the age limit that is currently in effect for this public folder replica.


Primary Windows NT Account

Select the Windows NT account representing the user that will be the primary user of this mailbox on a day to day basis. When you make a Windows NT account the Primary Windows NT Account, it is automatically given mailbox owner permissions, which provides rights to log onto a mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.

  Select an Existing Windows NT Account

  Create a New Windows NT Account


Select an Existing Windows NT Account

Opens the Add User or Group dialog box where you can select or type the domain and name of an existing Windows NT account.


Create a New Windows NT Account

Opens the Create Windows NT Account dialog box where you can choose an existing Windows NT domain and type the name of the Windows NT account you wish to create. In order to create a new Windows NT account, you must be a domain administrator in the selected domain.


Create Windows NT Account

Creates a new Windows NT account that will be the Primary Windows NT account for the mailbox you are currently configuring.

In the NT Domain box, choose an existing Windows NT domain.

In the Account Name box, type the name of the Windows NT account you wish to create. In order to create a new Windows NT account, you must be a domain administrator in the selected domain.


About Microsoft Exchange Administrator

Displays version and copyright information for your Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator software.

Click System Info to display the Windows NT Diagnostics dialog.


New Site Connector

Enter the name of a server in the target site. You must be able to establish a connection to the specified server. Microsoft Exchange Server uses information obtained from the remote server to properly configure the site connector.

You must have administrative rights in the site to which you are attempting to connect. In addition, if the remote site is on a different Windows NT domain, you must have Windows NT administrative rights in that domain.


Separators

Specify the separators that are used in the file you are importing or exporting. Separators are used to distinguish different types of information in the file. There are three types of separators:

  Column

  Quote

  Property


Column

The first line of every import or export file contains column headings describing the columns of information contained in the file. These headings are separated by the column separator. All subsequent lines of the file use the column separator to separate the supplied data fields. You can choose a comma, tab, or space.


Quote

Use the quote separator for fields that contain the column separator character. For example, if a recipient's display name is Williams, Adele, you would enclose the field in quotes to indicate that the comma is not intended to be treated as a column separator. For example, "Williams, Adele". You can choose a single quote (') or a double quote(").


Property

Use the property separator for fields with multivalued properties. For example, the Members field of a distribution list might contain the names of multiple recipients. In an import file, the Members field might appear as follows: adelew%alig%annd%aprilc%billl%chiaras. You can choose any of the following characters for the property separator: !, #, $, %, &, *, @.


Custom Recipient E-Mail Address

Lets you modify the existing e-mail address for this custom recipient, or create an e-mail address of a different type.

  Modify Existing E-Mail Address

  Create New E-Mail Address


Modify Existing E-Mail Address

Choose this option if you want to modify this custom recipient's existing e-mail address.


Create New E-Mail Address

Choose this option if you want to create another type of e-mail address for this custom recipient.


Check Box Control

Creates a check-box control in a template.

  X Coordinate

  Y Coordinate

  Width

  Height

  Field

  Text


Edit Control

Creates an Edit Control in a template.

  X Coordinate

  Y Coordinate

  Width

  Height

  Field

  Length

  Multiline


Group Box Control

Creates a group box in a template. Use a group box to group related controls and fields on a template.

  X Coordinate

  Y Coordinate

  Width

  Height

  Text


Label Control

Creates a label in a template. Labels are text fields that typically identify another control or field.

  X Coordinate

  Y Coordinate

  Width

  Height

  Text


List Box Control

Creates a list box in a template.

  X Coordinate

  Y Coordinate

  Width

  Height

  Field

  Display Horizontal Scroll Bar

  Display Vertical Scroll Bar


Multi-Valued List Box Control/Multi-Valued Drop Down Control

Creates a multi-valued list box or a multi-valued drop down control in a template.

  X Coordinate

  Y Coordinate

  Width

  Height

  Field


Page Break Control

Creates a page break in a template. Use a page break if you want the resulting template dialog box to have multiple tabbed pages.

  Text

  Help Context


Attribute Editor Selection

Lets you choose the editor you want to use to view or modify a particular raw attribute. Certain attributes can be modified based on their text value, or using a more graphical editor. For example, attributes that represent scheduled events can generally be viewed or modified either in text format, or using a graphical schedule page.


Incoming Template Mapping

Maps a string from an incoming MS Mail 3.x directory template to a corresponding Microsoft Exchange Server attribute. For example, you can map the MS Mail phone template field to the recipient Office Telephone attribute.

  Map the String

  To the Attribute


Map the String

Select the incoming MS Mail string you want to map.


To the Attribute

Select the Microsoft Exchange attribute to which you want to map the incoming MS Mail string.


Outgoing Template Mapping

Microsoft Exchange Server attribute to a corresponding MS Mail 3.x string. For example, you can map the MS Mail phone template field to the recipient Office Telephone attribute.

Maps a Microsoft Exchange Server directory recipient attribute to outgoing MS Mail-compatible template information. For example, you can map the Microsoft Exchange Office Telephone recipient attribute to the MS Mail phone template field.

  Map the Attribute

  To the String


Map the Attribute

Select the outgoing Microsoft Exchange attribute you want to map.


To the String

Select the MS Mail string to which you want to map the outgoing Microsoft Exchange attribute.


Link Monitor Window

Displays the condition of monitored links.  Each line in the display represents one connection. You can sort the display using the column heading buttons.  You can also change the width of the columns to make the display easier to read.

Column	Description
Icon	Represents the link status.   Up   Down   Warning state   Not yet monitored
Server	Server to which the ping message was sent and from which it is expected to be returned.
Last Measurement	Time the last ping message was sent from the sending server.  Displayed in local time.
Last Change	Time that the status of the link changed.  Displayed in local time.
Last Time	Time that the status of the link changed. Displayed in local time.
Comment	Condition of the link between the sending and destination server as measured by the round-trip time of a ping message sent between them.


Server Monitors Window

Displays one line for each server being monitored.  The status of the server, as represented by the icon, reflects the status of all server components.  If any component is down, the server is considered to be down.

Column	Description
Icon	Condition of all components of the server.   Up   Down   Warning state   Not yet monitored
Server	The server being monitored.
Last measure	Time the last RPC was sent, displayed in local time.
Last change	Time the condition of any component of the server changed.


Comments

Comments describe the status of the link based on bounce thresholds set in the configuration.

Comment	Description
The link is operational.	The ping message was returned in less than or equal to the time specified in the bounce threshold.
Bounced mail took (time).	The last ping message was returned, but the bounce time exceeded the warning threshold on the link property page.  The value shows the actual elapsed time.
A message was due on (time)	The last ping message sent has not yet returned, and the elapsed time has already exceeded the warning threshold.
Not monitored yet.	No ping messages have been returned and any sent are not yet late.


Help Finder Dialog Box


Confirm Stop Command

Verify that you want to stop the selected service.


Columns

For property pages that display information in columns, the Columns dialog box lets you select the columns you want to view, and customize the width and order of the selected columns.

  Available Columns

  Show the Following Columns

  Add

  Remove

  Reset

  Move Up

  Move Down

  Width


Available Columns

Lists all available columns that can be viewed on the property page you are customizing.


Show the Following Columns

Lists all columns that are currently selected to be displayed on the property page you are customizing.


Add

Choose a column in the Available Columns list and select Add to add it to the list of columns that will be displayed on the property page you are customizing.


Remove

Choose a column in the Show the Following Columns list and select Remove to remove it from the list of columns that will be displayed on the property page you are customizing.


Reset

Reset the columns display to the system defaults.


Move Up

Choose a column in the Show the Following Columns list and select Move Up to elevate it above the previous item in the list. Columns in the actual property page are displayed from left to right with the left-most column corresponding to the first (highest) item in the Show the Following Columns list.


Move Down

Choose a column in the Show the Following Columns list and select Move Up to move it below the next item in the list. Columns in the actual property page are displayed from left to right with the left-most column corresponding to the first (highest) item in the Show the Following Columns list.


Width

Choose a column in the Show the Following Columns list and type a value (in pixels) in the Width box to set the column width.


Custom Attributes

When searching for a recipient, you can use any previously defined custom attributes as your search criteria. Any recipients with a matching value in the specified custom attribute field will be found.


Find Recipients

Lets you search for recipients anywhere in your organization based on a variety of criteria. You can double-click on any recipients found by the search to view the complete set of properties for that recipient.

  Look In

  Find Recipients Containing

  Find Now Button

  Custom Button

  New Search Button


Look In

Displays the container in which the current search will be conducted. Choose Container to open the Find Container dialog box where you can choose a specific recipients container in which to conduct your search.


Find Recipients Containing

Enter information in any of the fields provided. Only those recipients with matching information in the corresponding fields will be returned by the search.


Find Now Button

Executes a search based on the current search criteria.


Custom Button

Lets you search for recipients based on any previously defined custom attributes.


New Search Button

Clears all previously set search criteria so you can conduct a new search.


Find Container

Displays a graphical representation of all recipients containers in your organization. Select the recipients container in which you want to conduct your search.


New Information Store

Lets you create either a new public or private information store on servers where the selected information store type does not currently exist.

  Information Store Type

  Server


Information Store Type

Choose Public to create a new public information store or Private to create a new private information store.


Server

Choose the server on which you want to create the new public or private information store.


New Notification

Provides a list from which you choose a notification type.

Launch a Process

Mail Message

Windows NT Alert


Escalation Editor

Allows you to specify the time delay of the notification process and the notification state (warning or alert). You must indicate the notification destination.

Launch Process

Mail Message

Windows NT Alert


Escalation Editor (Launch Process)

Use this notification type to alert people not logged on to the network.

  Time Delay

  Alert Only

  Test Button

  File Button

  Launch Process

  Command Line Parameters

  Append Notification Text to Parameter List


Time Delay

Type a number in the first box, and choose Seconds, Minutes, or Hours from the drop-down list.


Alert Only

Check this box to send a notification only when a monitored server enters an alert state. Clear this box to send a notification when a monitored server enters either an alert state or a warning state.


Test Button

Runs the notification so you can see that it is properly configured.


Launch Process

Displays the name of the file selected to launch the notification process.


Command Line Parameters

Type any command line parameters that will be used when the process is launched.


File Button

Allows you to select a filename (such as a .bat or .exe file) that launches the notification process. This is the file that appears in the Launch Process box.


Append Notification Text to Parameter List

Select to attach text to the parameters list specified in the Command Line Parameters box. Clear to avoid attaching any text to the parameter list.


Escalation Editor (Mail Message)

Use this notification type to send mail messages to users connected to the network when the problem occurs. Also useful for historical tracking.

  Time Delay

  Alert Only

  Test Button

  Mailbox To Notify

  Recipient Button


Mailbox To Notify

Displays the recipient chosen in the Recipients dialog box.


Recipient Button

Displays the Recipients dialog box, where you choose a recipient for the notification. The recipient name appears in the Mailbox To Notify box.


Escalation Editor (Windows NT Alert)

Use this notification type to send mail messages instantaneously. The mail message will not be delivered if a computer is not turned on or the user is not logged on to the network.

  Time Delay

  Alert Only

  Test Button

  Computer To Alert


Computer To Alert

Type the computer name that is to receive the notification.


Don't Tell Me Again

Controls whether or not this message box will appear again.


New Directory Replication Connector

Creates a new Directory Replication Connector, which describes a relationship between two Microsoft Exchange sites that share directory information. Before creating a directory replication connector, be sure that messages can be sent between the two sites (via either a Site Connector, Dynamic RAS Connector, or X.400 Connector).

  Remote Site Name

  Server in Remote Site

  Is the Remote Site Available on This Network?


Remote Site Name

Type the name of the Microsoft Exchange site with which you intend to replicate directory information.


Server in Remote Site

Type the name of a server in the remote site.


Is the Remote Site Available on This Network?

Indicate whether the remote site is located on the same physical network as your site.

No

The remote site is not on the same network. You must manually create and configure a directory replication connector in the remote site.

Yes

The remote site is on the same network. You have the option of creating and configuring directory replication connectors in both the local and remote sites concurrently.

Configure Both Sites

If you chose Yes, check this box if you want to create and configure a directory replication connector in the remote site now.


Key Management Server Password

  See Also

Any time you attempt to access or modify advanced security information, you must enter your Key Management administrative password. Your default password is always PASSWORD the first time you attempt to access advanced security features after installing the KM Server, or the first time you attempt to access advanced security features after being granted security administration privileges by an existing Key Management Server administrator.

You can change your password from the Security property page of the Encryption object, which is located in the Configuration container

Choose Remember Password For Up To 5 Minutes if you want to avoid entering the password again each time you attempt to modify advanced security information for up to 5 minutes.


See Also


Change Key Management Password

You can change your Key Management security password. This is the password you must provide any time you attempt to modify advanced security information.

Old Password

Type your existing security password.

New Password

Type a new security password.

Verify Password

Re-type your new security password.


SMTP Properties

Use the SMTP Properties Address tab to create or edit a partial e-mail addresses for this site. Partial e-mail addresses contain site-specific addressing information and are used by various proxy generators when e-mail addresses are created for Microsoft Exchange recipients.

  Type

  Address


X400 Properties

Use the X.400 Properties Address tab to create or edit a partial e-mail addresses for this site. Partial e-mail addresses contain site-specific addressing information and are used by various proxy generators when e-mail addresses are created for Microsoft Exchange recipients.

  Organization units (ou)

  Private management domain name (p)

  Administrative management Domain name (a)

  Country (c)


New E-Mail Address

Use New E-Mail Address to create an e-mail address for a Microsoft Exchange Server custom recipient, mailbox, or distribution list. . The list varies depending on the connectors and gateways that have been installed. Select the type of entry you want to create, and then choose OK.


General (Microsoft Mail Address Properties)

Creates a Microsoft Mail e-mail address when you want to add an address that identifies a recipient to Microsoft Mail for PC Networks.

  Network Name

  Postoffice Name

  Mailbox Name


Network Name

Type the network name for this postoffice.


Postoffice Name

Type the name of the postoffice where the recipient resides.


Mailbox Name

Type the address that will be used to identify this recipient to a Microsoft Mail (PC) network.


General (Internet Address Properties)

Type the new Internet mail address for the custom recipient and click OK.


General (X.400 Address Properties)

Use the General tab to specify the X.400 address properties for the new custom recipient.

  Given name (g)

  Surname (s)

  Initials (i)

  Generation qual (q)

  Common name (cn)

  Organization (o)

  Organization units (ou)

  PRMD (p)

  ADMD (a)

  Country (c)


Country (c)

Select (or type) the country name for the X.400 address.


ADMD (a)

Type the administrative management domain name.


PRMD (p)

Type the private management domain name.


Organizational units (ou)

In the Organizational Units boxes (OU1 to OU4), type the X.400 address attributes (up to 32 alphanumeric characters), if any, required to identify the custom recipient.


Organization (o)

Type the organization name (up to 64 alphanumeric characters) in which the X.400 recipient is to be located.


Common name (cn)

Type the common or "nick" name for the X.400 recipient, if applicable.


Generation qual (q)

Type the generation qualifier for the X.400 recipient.


Initials (i)

Type the initials for the X.400 recipient.


Surname (s)

Type the last name of the X.400 recipient.


Given name (g)

Type the first name of the X.400 recipient.


Address (Other Address Properties)

Use this dialog to specify the E-mail address and type for the new custom recipient.

  E-mail address

  E-mail type


E-mail type

Specify which type of e-mail address you entered in E-mail address.


E-mail address

Type the e-mail address for the new custom recipient.


Auto Naming (Options)

Use Auto Naming Options to control the way display and alias names for mailboxes and custom recipients are automatically generated. When you create a new mailbox or custom recipient and type in their First Name, Initials, and Last Name, the display and alias names are automatically created based on the Auto Naming options you select here.

Use any of the following variables or characters when setting up display and alias name generation:

Use this	To put this in the Display or Alias Name field
%First	All text from the First Name field
%Last	All text from the Last Name field
%Initials	All text from the Last Name field
,	A comma
.	A period
You can also use a numerical value to indicate how many characters from the First Name, Last Name, or Initials fields should be used. For example, %1Initial takes only the first character from the Initials field. Similarly, %2First takes the first 2 characters from the First Name field.

  Display Name Generation

  Alias Name Generation


Display Name Generation

Choose the method for automatic display name generation.

Option	Description	Example
None	Disables automatic display name generation	--
First last	Creates a display name based on the First Name and Last Name fields	Ali Gobi
Last, first	Creates a display name based on the Last Name and First Name fields, and separates the names with a comma	Gobi, Ali
First initials last	Creates a display name based on the First Name, Initials (first character only, followed by a period), and Last Name fields	Ali H. Gobi
Custom	Lets you enter any combination of the available variables and characters to create a custom display name.	--


Alias Name Generation

Choose the method for automatic alias name generation.

Option	Description	Example
None	Disables automatic alias name generation	--
First name and last initial	Creates an alias name based on the First Name and first character of the Last Name	AliG
First initial and last name	Creates an alias name based on the first character of the First Name and the entire Last Name	AGobi
First initials last	Creates an alias name based on the first character of First Name, Initials, and Last Name	AHG
Custom	Lets you enter any combination of the available variables and characters to create a custom alias name.	--


Permissions (Options)

You can customize the way Permissions property pages are displayed throughout the Administrator program.

  Default Windows NT Domain

  Show Permissions Page for All Objects

  Display Rights for Roles on Permissions Page

  Delete Primary Windows NT Account When Deleting Mailbox

  Try to Find Matching Windows NT Account When Creating Mailbox


Default Windows NT Domain

Choose a default domain from the drop-down list. This domain will be selected by default any time you want to add a user to the list of users with permissions on a particular object.

The domain you enter here is used to validate accounts.

Warning  Be sure that the domain you enter here can be authenticated by the domain in which your service account is located.


Show Permissions Page for All Objects

By default, Permissions pages are hidden. Choose this option to display Permissions pages for all objects that have one.


Display Rights for Roles on Permissions Page

When checked, displays the list of rights on the Permissions page. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has.


Delete Primary Windows NT Account When Deleting Mailbox

When checked, deletes the associated Windows NT account when a mailbox is deleted.


Try to Find Matching Windows NT Account When Creating Mailbox

When checked, matches the associated Windows NT account, if any, with a new mailbox.


Modify Mailbox Manager

Use Modify Mailbox Manager to specify or change the manager for the selected mailbox. The manager can be a mailbox or a custom recipient.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Modify Mailbox Direct Reports

Use Modify Mailbox Direct Reports to add or remove names from the list of people who report to the selected recipient's manager. Direct reports can be mailboxes or custom recipients.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Direct Reports

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Direct Reports

Lists the mailbox and custom recipient names for the employees who report to the selected recipient's manager.


Modify Authorized Originators

Use this dialog to select, from a particular address book, the mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents from which you will accept messages.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Accept Messages From

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Accept Messages From

Lists the mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents in the address book (selected in Show Names from the) from which you will accept messages. Please note that only those names appearing on this list can send the recipient messages. If you want every entity in the address book to be able to send the current recipient messages, leave this list blank.


Modify Unauthorized Originators

Use this dialog to select, from a particular address book, the mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents from which you will not accept messages.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

Reject Messages From

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Reject Messages From

Lists the mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents in the address book (selected in Show Names from the) from which you will not accept messages.


Modify Send-on-Behalf-of Permission

Use this dialog to specify or change the mailbox users who can send messages on behalf of the selected mailbox user.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Give Send On Behalf Permissions to

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Give Send On Behalf Permissions to

Lists the mailbox users in the address book (selected in Show Names from the) who can send messages on behalf of the selected user. Please note that only those mailbox names appearing on this list can send messages on behalf of the selected mailbox. If you want every mailbox in the address book to be able to send messages on behalf of the current mailbox, leave this list blank.


Modify Alternate Recipient (Mailbox/Delivery Options/Alt Recip/Modify...Help)
Modify Alternate Recipient

Use this dialog to select an alternate recipient for the selected mailbox user. An alternate recipient can be a mailbox, distribution list, custom recipient, or mailbox agent.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Modify Distribution List Owner

Use this dialog to change or specify the owner (administrator) of the selected distribution list. A distribution list owner can add name to, or delete names from the list.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Modify Distribution List Members

Use this dialog to add or remove members from the selected distribution list.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Distribution List Members

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Distribution List Members

Lists the members selected for the distribution list. Distribution list members can be mailboxes, mailbox agents, custom recipients, and other distribution lists.


Modify Distribution List Membership

Use this dialog to select the distribution list(s) to which you want to add the current mailbox user as a member.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Modify Monitored Recipients - Subject or Body Returned

Use this dialog to select the recipients in other organizations or foreign systems that will receive ping messages sent by this link monitor that you know should be returned as non-deliverable.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Message subject or body returned

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Message subject or body returned

Lists the recipients selected from the address book (selected in Show Names from the) that will receive ping messages sent by the link monitor. Recipients in other organizations or foreign systems are represented as custom recipients in Microsoft Exchange Server.


Modify Monitored Recipients - Subject Returned

Use this dialog to select the recipients in other organizations or foreign systems that will receive ping messages sent by this link monitor that you know are deliverable.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Message subject returned from

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Message subject returned from

Lists the recipients selected from the address book (selected in Show Names from the) that will receive ping messages sent by the link monitor. Recipients in other organizations or foreign systems are represented as custom recipients in Microsoft Exchange Server.


Choose Notification Recipient

Use this dialog to choose the mailbox recipient to notify when the server is in warning or alert state. The name you select appears in Mailbox to notify on the Notification property page.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Choose Dead Letter Recipient (Site MTA Config/Modify...Help)

Use this dialog to select the recipient in your organization who will receive all non-deliverable mail in this site. The name you select appears in Dead letter recipient on the General property page (MTA Site Configuration).

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Choose Directory Synchronization Requestor Address

Use this dialog to select the address for the Dirsync server. The Dirsync address must be a custom recipient.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Choose Local Dirsync Administrator

Use this dialog to select the mailbox user, public folder, or distribution list that will receive directory exchange status and error messages.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Choose Remote Dirsync Requestor Address

Use this dialog to select the appropriate custom recipient for the remote dirsync requestor.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Choose Mailbox for Recipient Template

Use this dialog to select the mailbox, custom recipient, or distribution list to use as the template when importing new recipients of the same type.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Administrator's Mailbox

Select the recipient in your organization that will receive Microsoft Mail Connector administrative messages. You can select a mailbox, public folder, distribution list, or custom recipient.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Modify - Not allowed to create

Use this dialog to specify which mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents in each address book will not be allowed to create top-level public folders on the information store site.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Not allowed to create top level folders

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Not allowed to create top level folders

Lists the mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents not allowed to create top-level public folders on the information store site.


Modify - Allowed to create

Use this dialog to specify which mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents in each address book will be allowed to create top-level public folders on the information store site.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Allowed to create top level folders

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Allowed to create top level folders

Lists the mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents allowed to create top-level public folders on the information store site. Please note that only those names appearing on this list will be allowed to create top level folders. If you want all users to be able to create top level folders, leave this list blank.


Offline Address Book Container

Holds the offline address books set up for your Microsoft Exchange Server.

When setting up a new address book from the Offline Address Book property page (DS Site Configuration), use the Offline Address Book Container dialog to select the recipients container you want to use to generate the offline address book.


Public Folder Container

Displays the location of the public folder in the site hierarchy. The Public Folder container is the receptacle for all public folders. You can specify where (under which directory object) you want to store public folders.


Routing Details

Use the Routing Details dialog to view site addresses and their corresponding connectors. You can also see the address type and the cost of connecting to that address.

  Type

  Cost

  Address

  Remote connectors (hops)


Remote Connectors (hops)

Shows the connectors used to route the message.


Address

Shows the address where the message will be sent.


Cost

Shows the cost of sending a message to this site.


Type

Indicates the type of address space.


Key Management Server Administrators

Use the Key Management Server Administrators dialog to assign or remove permissions for key management server administrators. You can also change the password which enables access to the Key Management Server Administrators dialog.

  Windows NT accounts with permissions to administer the Key Management server

  Change Password Button

  Add Administrators Button

  Remove Administrators Button


Windows NT accounts with permissions to administer the Key Management server

Lists the Windows NT account names with access rights to the Key Management Server.


Change Password Button

Displays the Change the Password For The Key Management Server dialog. Use the dialog to change the password that enables access to the Key Management Server Administrators dialog.


Add Administrators Button

Displays the Add Users dialog. Use the dialog to select the administrators to which you want to give permissions.


Remove Administrators Button

Removes the selected administrator from the list of Windows NT accounts with permissions to administer the Key Management server.


Add Users

Use the Add Users dialog to select the users to which you want to assign administrator permissions.

  List Names From

  Names

  Add Names

  Add Button

  Members Button

  Search Button


List Names From

Select the domain containing the user(s) to which you want to assign administrator permissions.


Names

Lists the user names from the domain selected in the List Names From field.


Add Names

Lists the user names you selected from the Names display. When you click OK, Add Users copies the selected user names to Windows NT accounts with permissions to administer the Key Management server on the Key Management Server Administrators dialog.


Add Button

Moves the selected user name from Names to Add Names.


Members Button

Displays Global Group Membership dialog. Use the dialog to view the members (by user name) in a group.


Search Button

Displays the Find Account dialog. Use the dialog to locate a specific user or group name in a domain.


Global Group Membership

List the members of the global group you selected.

  Members of "group name"


Members of "group name"

List the user names of the members in the group you selected.


Change Priority

Use Change Priority to change the priority of a message in the message transfer agent queue.

  High

  Normal

  Low


High

Clicking this option gives the message priority in the MTA queue over "Normal" and "Low" priority messages.


Normal

Clicking this option gives the message priority in the MTA queue over "Low" priority messages; however, "High" priority messages will be handled first.


Low

Clicking this option means the message will be handled (in the MTA queue) after "Normal" and "High" priority messages.


Client Permissions

Defines and modifies the default permissions for all users of the selected folder, and specific access permissions for individuals. Access permissions define the extent to which users can work with items in the folder.

To change the access permissions in a public folder, or to view the names of other folder users, you must have owner permissions in that folder.

  Name/Role

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Properties Button

  Roles

  Create Items

  Read Items

  Create subfolders

  Folder owner

  Folder contact

  Edit Items

  Delete Items


Name/Role

Displays user names and their respective permissions in the folder. The default permission is the permission granted to undefined users.

Folder users can view only their own access permissions. If you are associated as an individual user, your name is displayed; if you are associated as a member of a distribution list, the distribution list name is displayed; if you are associated as an undefined user, the default permission is displayed.


Add Button

Opens the Add Users dialog box, where you can select user, distribution list, or public folder names to add to the Name/Role list.


Remove Button

Removes the selected name from the Name/Role list.


Properties Button

Displays the Properties dialog for the selected user. Use the dialog to view details about the selected user.


Roles

Choose a role for the name selected in the Name/Role list.

Role	Description
Owner	Grants all permissions in the folder.
Publishing Editor	Grants permission to create items, read items, edit and delete any item, and create sub folders.
Editor	Grants permission to create items, read items, and edit and delete any item.
Publishing Author	Grants permission to create items, read items, edit and delete their own items, and create sub folders.
Author	Grants permission to create items, read items, and edit and delete their own items.
Reviewer	Grants permission to read items.
Contributor	Grants permission to create items.
None	Grants no permissions in the folder. Use this as the default permission when you want to limit the folder's audience to the users you specifically add to the Name/Role list.


Create Items

Grants permission to post items in the folder.


Read Items

Grants permission to open any item in the folder.


Create subfolders

Grants permission to create sub folders in the folder.


Folder owner

Grants all permissions in the folder.


Folder contact

Grants the user with Folder Contact status. Folder Contacts receive automated notifications from the folder such as replication conflict messages, and requests from users for additional permissions or other changes to the folder.


Edit Items

Select one of the following options.

Option	Description
None	Prevents users from editing any item.
Own	Grants users permission to edit their own items.
All	Grants users permissions to edit any item.


Delete Items

Select one of the following options.

Option	Description
None	Prevents users from deleting any item.
Own	Grants users permission to delete their own items.
All	Grants users permissions to delete any item.


Custom Recipient E-Mail Address

Use the Custom Recipient E-Mail Address dialog to specify whether you want to modify the existing e-mail address or create a new one.

  Modify existing e-mail address

  Create new e-mail address


Modify existing e-mail address

Click this option to display the Internet Address Properties dialog. Use Internet Address Properties to make changes to the existing e-mail address.


Create new e-mail address

Click this option to display the New E-mail Address dialog. Use New E-Mail Address to specify a new e-mail address.


NT Security Descriptor

Use the NT-Security-Descriptor dialog to specify the rights that users or groups have on the mailbox you selected.

You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. For a mailbox, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, Send As, Service Account Admin, User, and View Only Admin default roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete an object.
Send As	Send messages as a mailbox. This is different from send on behalf of permissions because the person receiving the message can't tell that the message has been sent by someone else.
Mailbox Owner	Log on to a mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.
Logon Rights	Log on to any server in the site using the Administrator program.
Replication	Replicate directory information with other servers.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object.
  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Mailbox Container
Containers

Shows a graphical representation of all recipients containers in your site. Select the recipients container where the mailbox will be located.


Custom Recipient Container
Containers

Shows a graphical representation of all recipients containers in your site. Select the recipients container where the custom recipient will be located.


Do you want to delete?

Click the appropriate button to delete the selection(s). You can cancel the delete process by clicking No.

  Yes Button

  Yes To All Button

  No Button


Yes Button

Deletes the current selection.


Yes To All Button

Deletes all selected objects.


No Button

Cancels the delete process and closes the "Do you want to delete?" dialog.


Select Control Type

Select the type of control you want to create in the current template. You can choose any of the following controls:

Control	Function
Label	Text label. Typically used to describe an adjacent control.
Edit	Editable field. Typically used for text entry.
Page Break	Creates a new property tab in a tabbed dialog box.
Group Box	Defines a set of controls that are bounded by a box.
Check Box	Creates a check-box control. Use a check box to let the user turn options on or off.
List Box	In a dialog box, a type of box that lists available choices--for example, a list of all files in a directory. If all the choices do not fit in the list box, there is a scroll bar.


Global Group Membership

Use Global Group Membership to view the members of the global group you selected. You can also select the group members to which you want to give permissions.

  Group members

  Add Button


Group members

Lists the members of the global group.


Add Button

Adds the names you select to the Add Names list on the Add Users and Groups dialog.


Replica Link (Reps - To/From)

Displays replica link information.

Warning  Contact Product Support Services before modifying information in raw mode.


General (Connected Site)

Use the General tab to specify the organization and site name for the connector.

  Organization

  Site


Organization

Displays your organization name. If necessary, you can change the name.


Site

Type a name for the new connected site.


Routing Address (Connected Site)

Use the routing address tab to specify the address type, address, and connection cost for the new internet mail or x.400 connector.

Internet Mail Connector Routing Address

  Type

  Cost

  Address

X.400 Connector Routing Address

  Organization (o)

  Organizational units (ou)

  Org. unit 1 (ou1) - 4 (ou4)

  Private management domain name (p)

  Administrative management domain name (a)

  Country (c)

  Cost


Type

Specify the address type.

For information on address types, see Appendix A in the "Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator's Guide" and the "Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning Guide."


Cost

Type a routing cost (0 to 100) for messages transferred using this address.

Routing costs typically range from 1 to 99. The default is 1. If the cost of a route is set to 0, other routes are used only if it fails. If the cost of a route is set to 100, it is used only when all other routes fail.


Address

Type the e-mail address for the site.

You can obtain e-mail address information about the other site using its Site Addressing property sheet. For information and guidelines on e-mail address formats, see the "Microsoft Exchange Concepts Server and Planning Guide."


Address (General Address Space)

Use the Address tab to specify the address, address type, and routing cost of message transfer to another Microsoft Exchange Server site, or foreign mail system.

  Type

  Cost

  Address


Type

Specify the address type.

For information on address types, see Appendix A in the "Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator's Guide" and the "Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning Guide."


Cost

Type a routing cost (0 to 100) for messages transferred using this address.

Routing costs typically range from 1 to 99. The default is 1. If the cost of a route is set to 0, other routes are used only if it fails. If the cost of a route is set to 100, it is used only when all other routes fail.


Address

Type the e-mail address for the site.

You can obtain e-mail address information about the other site using its Site Addressing property sheet. For information and guidelines on e-mail address formats, see the "Microsoft Exchange Concepts Server and Planning Guide."


Routing Address (Address Space)

Use the Routing Address tab to specify the new general address and address type for the remote system.

  Type

  Address


Type

Enter the address type.

For information on address types, see Appendix A in the "Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator's Guide" and the "Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning Guide."


Address

Type the general routing address for the remote system. Be sure to indicate the type of address in Type.


General (X400 Address Space)

Use the General tab to specify the necessary X.400 address information for the remote system.

  Organization (o)

  Organizational Units (ou)

  Private Management Domain Name (p)

  Administrative Management Domain Name (a)

  Country (c)

  Cost


Organization (o)

Type the site name (up to 64 alphanumeric characters) of the remote Microsoft Exchange site.

Note  You can use a wildcard (the * or ? character) to specify a group of addresses. For example, type P* to specify all entries that begin with the character P, or SITE?? to specify all entries that contain SITE followed by two alphanumeric characters such as SITE01 and SITE9m.


Organizational Units (ou)

In the Organizational Units boxes (OU1 to OU4), type the X.400 address attributes (up to 32 alphanumeric characters), if any, required to identify the remote site.


Private Management Domain Name (p)

Type the organization name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters) of the remote Microsoft Exchange server site.

The PRMD is usually the name of your organization or company and is specified by your X.400 service carrier.


Administrative Management Domain Name (a)

Type the ADMD name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters) for the remote site.

The ADMD is usually the name of (and is specified by) your X.400 service carrier. If multiple carriers are used, type a single space in the box.


Country (c)

Select the country where the other site is located.


Cost

Type a routing cost (0 to 100) for messages transferred using this address.

Routing costs typically range from 1 to 99. The default is 1. If the cost of a route is set to 0, other routes are used only if it fails. If the cost of a route is set to 100, it is used only when all other routes fail.


General (MS Mail Address Space)

Use the General tab to specify general address information for the remote MS Mail system.

  Network Name

  Postoffice Name

  Mailbox Name

  Cost


Network Name

Type the network name of the remote MS Mail system.


Postoffice Name

Type the postoffice name on the remote MS Mail system.


Mailbox Name

Type the name of the mailbox in the postoffice on the remote MS Mail system to which you want to connect.


Cost

Type a routing cost (0 to 100) for messages transferred using this address.

Routing costs typically range from 1 to 99. The default is 1. If the cost of a route is set to 0, other routes are used only if it fails. If the cost of a route is set to 100, it is used only when all other routes fail.


General (Internet Address Space)

Use the General tab to specify the e-mail domain and routing cost for the remote system.

  E-mail Domain

  Cost


E-mail Domain

Type the name of the e-mail domain which contains the remote system address (specified on the Routing address tab).


Cost

Type a routing cost (0 to 100) for messages transferred using this address.

Routing costs typically range from 1 to 99. The default is 1. If the cost of a route is set to 0, other routes are used only if it fails. If the cost of a route is set to 100, it is used only when all other routes fail.


Directory Update Type

Use the Directory Update Type dialog to specify the type of directory update you want to perform.

  Update only new and modified items

  Refresh all items in the directory


Update only new and modified items

Performs a directory replication update for only those items changed or modified since the last request was made.


Refresh all items in the directory

Causes a new copy of every item for all selected inbound sites to be replicated to the local bridgehead server. This operation may take several hours to complete.


Organization Forms Library Administrator

Creates, replicates, and modifies global forms.

  Folder Name

  Language

  New Button

  Modify Button

  Remove Button

  Permissions Button


Folder Name

Displays the folder name as it appears in the Administrator window and the Microsoft Exchange client folder hierarchy.


Language

Displays the language of the client.


New Button

Displays the Create New Forms Library dialog box, where you define the folder name and language of a new form.


Modify Button

Displays the Modify Forms Library dialog box, where you change the folder name of an existing form.


Remove Button

Deletes the selected form.


Permissions Button

Displays the Forms Library Permissions dialog box, where you modify permissions for specific users.


Create New Forms Library

Allows you to define a new form. In the Library Folder Name box, type the name of the new form. From the Language drop-down list, choose the new form's language.

When you create an organization forms library, you assign a language to it. By default, foreign language clients logged on to Microsoft Exchange Server will attempt to locate forms in the library that match their language. For that reason, forms that you want to be available to all foreign language clients should be individually localized and saved into all existing foreign language libraries. If there is no language-specific organization forms library, the user defaults to the organization forms library on the server.


Modify Forms Library

Allows you to rename an existing forms library. In the Library Folder Name box, type the new name of the form.


Forms Library Permissions

Allows you to individually grant permissions to specific users.

  Name and Role

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Properties Button

  Permissions

  Edit Items

  Delete Items


Name and Role

Displays the user's name, and their role as selected from the Roles drop-down list.


Add Button

Displays the Add Users dialog box, where you type user names or select from a list.


Remove Button

Deletes the selected user from the list.


Properties Button

Displays the user Properties pages, where you define various user information.


Permissions

Lets you control which users can create items and subfolders in the organization forms library. You can grant a permission level of Owner or None.

A user must have owner permissions in the selected forms library in order to update a form.


Edit Items

Choose None, Own, or All. A default setting is provided based on the user's role and rights. Enable or disable editing rights by selecting or clearing the appropriate button. If you do this, the Roles display changes to Custom.


Delete Items

Choose None, Own, or All. A default setting is provided based on the user's role and rights. Enable or disable deletion rights by selecting or clearing the appropriate button. If you do this, the Roles display changes to Custom.


Distribution List Membership

Displays a list of members in a distribution list and allows you to add or remove members in the list. You cannot modify a distribution list unless you have owner permissions for it.

  Distribution List

  Members

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Properties Button


Distribution List

Displays the name of the distribution list.


Members

Displays the current list of names that are included in the distribution list.


Add Button

Displays the Add Users dialog box, where you can add additional users to the Members list.


Remove Button

Removes the selected user in the Members list.


Properties Button

Opens the Properties dialog box, where additional information about the selected user in the Members list is displayed.


Schedule+ Distribution List

Use this dialog to select a Schedule+ Distribution List for the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector. The Schedule+ Distribution List dialog lists all the MS Mail (PC) and PROFS postoffices that are exchanging free and busy information with the current site.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Administrator Mailbox

Use the Administrator Mailbox dialog to select the mailbox or distribution list to be used for the administrator's mailbox. Any mail addressed to this Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector that the connector can't process, such as status reports or non-delivery reports (NDRs), is forwarded to this mailbox.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Add Users

Selects user, distribution list, and public folder names from one or more address lists and adds them to the active list.

  Show Names from the

  Type Name or Select from List

  Add Button

  Add Users

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Show Names from the

Select the address list that contains the names that you want.


Type Name or Select from List

Type a name or select one from the list. As you type the letters of the name, the address list scrolls to match the letters that you type.


Add
Add Button

Adds the selected names to the Add Users box.


Add Users

Displays the names that you have added. Multiple names are separated with a semicolon (;). When you choose OK, these names are added to the Give Send On Behalf Of Permission To list in the Exchange Server tab.


Properties Button

Displays details about the selected name.


Find Button

Opens the Find dialog box, where you can specify advanced conditions to search for names. When the search is complete, all matching names are displayed in the search results list.

The search options vary according to the selected address list.


General (Directory Replication Connector)

  Overview

Use the Directory Replication Connector general property page to establish local and remote bridgehead servers. You can also add an administrative note.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Site Name

  Local Bridgehead Server

  Remote Bridgehead Server

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

Type a name (up to 64 characters) that uniquely identifies this directory replication connector.


Display Name

Type a name (up to 256 characters). This is the name that appears in the Administrator window.


Site Name

Displays the target site name. This name in this box cannot be changed.


Local Bridgehead Server

Type the name of the server that will process incoming and outgoing directory replication information.


Remote Bridgehead Server

Type the name of the server that will communicate with the local bridgehead server to maintain directory consistency.


Permissions (Directory Replication Container)
Permissions (Directory Replication Connector)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this directory replication connector. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this directory replication connector. For a directory replication connector, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, Service Account Admin, View Only Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for directory replication connector permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this directory replication connector.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this directory replication connector.
Delete	Delete objects.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this directory replication connector.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Schedule (Directory Replication Connector)

  Overview

Determines when requests are sent from a local bridgehead server to a remote bridgehead server for updated directory information. Choose more frequent requests where directory information in the remote site is updated often, but remember that more frequent replication can impact network performance.

The schedule property page contains a schedule grid with rows representing days and columns representing 1-hour blocks or 15-minute blocks (depending on the detail view you select). You can use the schedule grid to designate specific times or blocks of time when an event is to occur.

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Never

Disables directory replication. Choosing Never disables the Selected Times options.


Always

Sends requests to the remote bridgehead server for updated directory information every 15 minutes. Choosing Always disables the Selected Times options.


Selected Times

Assign specific replication times in the schedule grid. Select a time or block of time in the schedule grid. Requests are sent to the remote bridgehead server for updated directory information at the times you specify. Choosing Selected Times enables the Detail View options.


Detail View

Choose 1 Hour to display the schedule grid in one-hour increments. Choose 15 Minutes to display the schedule grid in 15-minute increments. These options are enabled only if you choose Selected Times.


Sites (Directory Replication Connector)

  Overview

The Inbound Site and Outbound Site lists are populated only after you completely configure a directory replication relationship between local and remote sites, and directory replication completes successfully at least once.

  Inbound Sites

  Outbound Sites

  Request Now


Inbound Sites

Select the site from which you want to request updated directory information.


Outbound Sites

Select the site to which you want to send updated directory information.


Request Now

Sends a request for updated directory information to the selected inbound sites.


General (Directory Synchronization)

  Overview

Use the General property page to view and set basic properties for the selected Directory Synchronization object.

The directory synchronization server and requestors, if any, that are associated with this Directory Synchronization object are shown in the Dirsync Connections box.

Note  If you want to configure the Directory Synchronization object for a server or requestor you have already created, and that server or requestor does not appear in the Dirsync Connections box, you should close the Directory Synchronization object for this Microsoft Exchange Server computer and open the Directory Synchronization object on the correct server.

  Dirsync Connection

  Administrative Note


Dirsync Connection

Displays the dirsync server and requestors, if any, that are associated with this Microsoft directory synchronization object.


Permissions (Directory Synchronization)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the directory synchronization object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on the directory synchronization object. For the directory synchronization object, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for directory synchronization object permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this directory synchronization object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this directory synchronization object.
Delete	Delete this directory synchronization object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this directory synchronization object.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Delivery Restrictions (Directory Synchronization)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to specify addresses from which this Directory Synchronization object will or will not accept messages. All rejected messages are returned to the originator.

Tip  You can use delivery restrictions to prevent messages unrelated to directory synchronization from being delivered to the Directory Synchronization object.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Accept Messages From

A list of all senders from which this recipient will accept messages. Select All if you want this recipient to accept messages from all senders. Select List and choose Modify to specify a list of senders from which this recipient will accept messages.


Reject Messages From

A list of all senders from which this recipient will not accept messages. Select None if you want this recipient to accept messages from all senders. Select List, and choose Modify to specify a list of senders from which this recipient will reject messages.


Modify Button

Opens the Address Book so you can select one or more recipients from the organization to add to either the Accept Messages From or the Reject Messages From boxes.


Incoming Templates (Directory Synchronization)

  Overview

Use the Incoming Templates property page to map incoming template information to Microsoft Exchange Server directory recipient attributes. For example, you can map MS Mail phone, telephone, and extension templates to the recipient office phone attribute, so that information stored differently on other systems is displayed consistently in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory.

  Incoming Template Mapping

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Incoming Template Mapping

Lists existing incoming template mappings. The String column displays the incoming string, and the Attribute column displays the internal Microsoft Exchange Server directory attribute to which the incoming string is mapped.


New Button

Opens the Incoming Template Mapping dialog box where you can create a new mapping.


Edit Button

Modifies an existing mapping in the Incoming Template Mapping box. The Incoming Template Mapping dialog box appears, and you can change the existing mapping.


Remove Button

Removes the existing mapping from the entry selected in the Incoming Template Mapping box.


Outgoing Templates (Directory Synchronization)

  Overview

Use the Outgoing Templates property page to map Microsoft Exchange Server directory recipient attributes to outgoing MS Mail-compatible template information. For example, you can map Microsoft Exchange Server location recipient attributes to MS Mail room and office templates so that information stored in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory is distributed correctly to each MS Mail requestor that requests information for a room or office template.

Adding, modifying, or removing template mappings will result in a full export of directory information during the next directory synchronization cycle.

  Outgoing Template Mapping

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button

  Up and Down Buttons


Outgoing Template Mapping

Lists existing outgoing template mappings. The Attribute column displays the internal Microsoft Exchange directory attribute that is being mapped, and the String column displays the string to which it is being mapped.


New Button

Opens the Outgoing Template Mapping dialog box where you can create a new mapping.


Edit Button

Modifies an existing mapping for an entry selected in the Outgoing Template Mapping box. The Outgoing Template Mapping dialog box appears, and you can change the existing mapping.


Remove Button

Removes the existing mapping for an entry selected in the Outgoing Template Mapping box.


Up and Down Buttons

Moves the selected attribute and its associated string up and down the list.

You specify the template mapping order when exporting attributes to the MS Mail postoffice.


General (Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Name

  Append To Imported Users' Display Name

  Dirsync Address Button

  Address Types

  Requestor Language

  Administrative Note

  Server


Name

Type a name (up to 255 characters) for this requestor. You should use a unique name that identifies this Microsoft Exchange Server site. This name appears in the Connections container in the Administrator window. You cannot change this name once the requestor is set up.


Append To Imported Users' Display Name

If enabled, puts the requestor name after each custom recipient that is created by the dirsync process.


Dirsync Address Button

Opens the Address Book where you can select the address of the dirsync Server. The dirsync address must be a custom recipient.


Address Types

Select the check box for each address type to request from the dirsync server.

MS Mail (PC) addresses are sent and received by default. If you do not select address types that the dirsync Server normally provides, this requestor will request (and receive) MS format e-mail addresses instead.


Requestor Language

The primary language used in your mail system. The default is English.


Server

Select a server in the local site to handle directory exchange messages. The default is the current server.


Permissions (Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this dirsync requestor. You delegate permissionsto a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this dirsync requestor. For the dirsync requestor, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for dirsync requestor permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this dirsync requestor.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this dirsync requestor.
Delete	Delete this dirsync requestor.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this dirsync requestor.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Import Container (Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

You use the Import Container property page to specify which recipient container receives imported address information and to assign trust levels to objects being imported.

Note  MS Mail and other messaging systems do not have the concept of directory objects or trust levels. When a recipient address is imported from a dirsync server, a recipient object is created in the container with the trust level you specify in the Import Containers property page. If you modify trust levels associated with a recipient object after it is added to the Microsoft Exchange Server directory, those modifications are overwritten during any subsequent directory exchange import cycle that includes this recipient.

By default, all updates received from a dirsync server are placed in the Recipients container and transmitted to all other dirsync servers during the next update cycle. If you want to make address information from more than one dirsync server available to Microsoft Exchange Server recipients, but you do not want to combine information between the dirsync servers, create a separate container for each group of imported recipients.

  Import Container

  Trust Level

  Container Button


Import Container

Select one of the available recipient containers in your site. This is the container in which imported address information will be placed.

Caution  Changing the directory import container after directory exchange has begun can cause the loss of directory exchange information.


Trust Level

Type or select a trust level to assign to incoming directory information.


Container Button

Opens the Container property pages where you can define a new container for imported recipients. When you are finished setting the options for the new imported recipients container, choose OK to return to the Import Container property page.

This is available only when setting up a dirsync requestor.


Export Containers (Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the Export Containers property page to specify the recipient containers from which to export directory information. You can also set a trust level to limit the directory information that is exported.

  Recipient Containers

  Export These Recipients

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Site

  Trust Level

  Export Custom Recipients


Recipient Containers

Lists all recipient containers in the currently selected site.


Export These Recipients

Lists all recipient containers from which directory information will be exported.


Add Button

Adds the selected container to the list of recipient containers from which directory information will be exported.


Remove Button

Removes the selected container from the list of recipient containers from which directory information will be exported.


Site

Lists all sites in your organization. When you select a site, a list of all recipient containers in the site appears in the Recipient Containers box.


Trust Level

Type or select a trust level to limit the directory information sent to the dirsync server. Only objects (from the selected containers) with a trust level equal to or lower than the level specified in the Trust Level box will be sent.


Export Custom Recipients

Clear the Export Custom Recipients check box if you do not want to send information about Microsoft Exchange custom recipients.


Settings (Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the Settings property page to configure advanced directory exchange functions.

  Dirsync Password

  Participation

  Template Information

  Dirsync Information


Dirsync Password

Type a password for this dirsync requestor to use when sending update messages to the dirsync server.


Participation

Select one or both of the following check boxes:

Send Updates to export directory information to the dirsync server

Receive Updates to import directory information from the dirsync server


Template Information

Select one or both of the following check boxes:

Send Local Template Information to export address templates to the dirsync server

Receive Template Information to import address templates from the dirsync server

If you select either option, you must configure template mappings in the Microsoft Directory Synchronization object.


Dirsync Information

Select one or both of the following check boxes:

Import On Next Cycle to request every entry (of the requested address types) available on the dirsync server.

Export On Next Cycle to send addresses from the specified containers in the Export Containers property page to the dirsync server.

If you are starting directory exchange for the first time, all local directory information is automatically exported, and all available information from the dirsync server is automatically imported.


Schedule (Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the Schedule property page to specify when directory synchronization messages are sent from the server to each requestor. The default is to send one update message each day at midnight. Directory synchronization messages are sent at the beginning of each hour selected in the schedule grid. Requestors messages to the server are processed at the time received.

  Schedule Grid


General (Dirsync Server)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Name

  Dirsync Administrator Button

  Copy Administrator On Outgoing Messages

  Forward Incoming Dirsync Messages To Administrator

  Administrative Note

  Server


Name

Type a name (up to 64 characters) for this directory synchronization server.


Dirsync Administrator Button

Opens the Address Book where you can select a user, public folder, or distribution list to receive directory exchange status and error messages.


Copy Administrator On Outgoing Messages

(Optional) Select to view each outgoing update message to each requestor.

Note  This option is typically used for troubleshooting.


Forward Incoming Dirsync Messages to Administrator

(Optional) Select to view each incoming update message from each requestor.

Note   This option is typically used for troubleshooting.


Server

Select the Microsoft Exchange Server computer to host the directory exchange process.

Note   Servers are listed in alphabetical order, and the server to which you're currently connected is not selected by default. Make sure you select the intended server from the list.


Permissions (Dirsync Server)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the directory synchronization object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on the directory synchronization object. For the directory synchronization object, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for directory synchronization object permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this directory synchronization object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this directory synchronization object.
Delete	Delete this directory synchronization object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this directory synchronization object.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Schedule (Dirsync Server)

  Overview

Use the Schedule property page to specify when directory synchronization messages are sent from the server to each requestor. The default is to send one update message each day at midnight. Directory synchronization messages are sent at the beginning of each hour selected in the schedule grid. Requestors messages to the server are processed at the time received.

  Schedule Grid


General (Remote Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Remote dirsync requestors are internal representations of dirsync requestors that use this server. This internal information is used to authenticate and respond to requestors during directory exchange.

Note  You must first create a custom recipient for each remote dirsync requestor to provide address information about the requestor.

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Name

  Append to Imported Users' Display Name

  Dirsync Address

  Password

  Requestor Address Type

  Requestor Language

  Export On Next Cycle

  Administrative Note


Name

Type a display name (up to 255 characters) for the remote requestor postoffice. This is the name that appears in the Administrator window.


Append to Imported Users' Display Name

If enabled, puts the requestor name after each Custom Recipient that is created by the dirsync process.


Dirsync Address

Opens the Address Book where you can select the remote dirsync requestor custom recipient you defined previously. This custom recipient provides address information about the requestor.


Password

Type the password used by the remote dirsync requestor for directory synchronization.


Requestor Address Type

In the Native Address Type box, select MS to send directory synchronization messages in MS Mail (PC) format. The default selection, MS, is used by MS Mail (PC) and all foreign dirsync requestors.

--or--

Select MSA to send directory exchange messages in MS Mail (AppleTalk) format.

Directory exchange update messages to each MS Mail (AppleTalk) requestor do not include updates submitted by that requestor. This avoids multiple entries in the MS Mail (AppleTalk) global address list.


Requestor Language

The primary language used in your mail system. The default is English.


Export On Next Cycle

Select to send all address information to the remote requestor during the next directory exchange cycle.


Permissions (Remote Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this remote dirsync requestor. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this remote dirsync requestor. For a remote dirsync requestor, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for remote dirsync requestor permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under this remote dirsync requestor.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this remote dirsync requestor.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this remote dirsync requestor.
Delete	Delete this remote dirsync requestor .
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this remote dirsync requestor.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Import Container (Remote Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the Import Containers property page to specify which recipient container receives imported address information and to assign trust levels to objects being imported.

Note  MS Mail and other messaging systems do not have the concept of directory objects or trust levels. When a recipient address is imported from a remote dirsync requestor during directory synchronization, a recipient object is created in the container with the trust level you specify in the Import Containers property page. If you modify trust levels associated with a recipient object after it is added to the directory, those modifications are overwritten during any subsequent directory synchronization import cycle that includes this recipient.

  Import Container

  Trust Level

  Container Button


Import Container

Select an available recipient container in your site. This is the container in which imported address information will be placed.

Caution  Changing the directory import container after directory exchange has begun can cause the loss of directory exchange information.


Trust Level

Type or select a trust level to assign to incoming directory information.


Container Button

Opens the Container property pages where you can define a new container for imported recipients.

When you are finished setting the options for the new imported recipients container, choose OK to return to the Import Containers property page.


Export Containers (Remote Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the Export Containers property page to specify what directory information is exported to the remote dirsync requestor during directory synchronization. By default, no information about the local site is exported.

  Recipient Containers

  Export These Recipients

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Site

  Trust Level

  Export Custom Recipients


Recipient Containers

Lists all recipient containers in the currently selected site.


Export These Recipients

Lists all recipient containers from which directory information will be exported to the remote dirsync requestor.


Add Button

Adds the selected container to the list of recipient containers from which directory information will be exported to the remote dirsync requestor.


Remove Button

Removes the selected container from the list of recipient containers from which directory information will be exported to the remote dirsync requestor.


Site

Lists all sites in your organization. When you select a messaging site, a list of all recipient containers in the site appears in the Recipient Containers box.


Trust Level

Type or select a trust level to limit the directory information sent to the remote dirsync server.

Only objects (from the selected containers) with a trust level equal to or lower than the level specified in the Trust Level box will be sent.


Export Custom Recipients

Select if you do not want to export information about custom recipients.


  Gateway

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Gateway

A gateway provides message transfer and translation between Microsoft Exchange Server and another messaging system.

Note These Help topics are for gateways in general and may not provide information for your specific gateway.

Use the following property pages to configure a gateway:

General

Permissions

Schedule

Address Space

Delivery Restrictions

Advanced

Import Container

Export Containers


General (Gateway)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Computer Name

  Message Size

  Administrative Note


Computer Name

The name given to the computer where the Microsoft Exchange Server gateway is installed.


Message Size

Use the General property page to specify the maximum size of messages that can be transported through the gateway. This is useful when you do not want users sending messages with large attachments that might affect performance. This setting applies to both inbound and outbound messages. If the size limit is exceeded, the message will be returned to the sender with a non-delivery report (NDR).

Choose No Limit to allow messages of any size to be sent. Choose Maximum to set the message size from 1 to 2,097,151K.


Permissions (Gateway)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this gateway. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this gateway. For a gateway, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for mailbox permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with this gateway.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the schedule in a gateway.
Delete	Delete objects within this site
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this mailbox.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Schedule (Gateway)

  Overview

Use the Schedule property page to control when and how often this gateway becomes active. It contains a schedule grid with rows representing days and columns representing 1-hour blocks or 15-minute blocks depending on the detail view you select. You can use the schedule grid to designate specific times or blocks of time when the gateway will become active.

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Address Space (Gateway)

  Overview

Use the Address Space property page to define the type and format of addresses used to identify messages to another site or foreign system. Each entry is called an address space and contains only as much of the address as is necessary to distinguish messages that should be sent through this gateway. You need to configure only the necessary address space options to uniquely identify the route to the site or foreign system. The address space determines which messages will be delivered to the gateway. Gateways process messages according to address type.

The cost associated with each address space is used to optimize message routing to the foreign system but does not affect message reception. All mail is sent using the address with the lowest cost. If two or more routes are available with the same cost, the load placed on the routes is roughly equal. Routing costs range from 1 to 100.

  Type Column

  Address Column

  Cost Column

  New General Button

  New X.400 Button

  New MS Mail Button

  New Internet Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Delivery Restrictions (Gateway)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to specify addresses from which this gateway will or will not accept messages. All rejected messages are returned to the originator.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Advanced (Gateway)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to specify values for message parameters, message transfer times, and message transfer quota.

  Message Parameters

  Message Transfer Times

  Message Transfer Quota


Message Parameters

  Unread limit (msgs)

Defines the maximum number of messages that can be held in the gateway's outbound queue. The MTA will not deliver any messages to the gateway when the number of messages in the outbound queue exceeds this value.

  Back-off interval (min)

The amount of time the MTA will wait before attempting to send more messages to the gateway's outbound queue.

  Max unread time (min)

The amount of time a message can be queued before it is returned to the sender as non-deliverable.


Message Transfer Times

  Urgent message

Maximum number of minutes a message of high importance can be queued in the gateway's information store folder before it is returned to the sender as non-deliverable.

  Normal message

Maximum number of minutes a message of normal importance can be queued in the gateway's information store folder before it is returned to the sender as non-deliverable.

  Non-urgent message

Maximum number of minutes a message of low importance can be queued in the gateway's information store folder before it is returned to the sender as non-deliverable.


Message Transfer Quota

  No limit

The amount of data in the gateway's information store outbound queue has no limit.

  Quota (K)

Specifies the largest amount of combined data queued in the gateway's information store outbound queue. The MTA will not deliver messages when this value is exceeded.


Import Container (Gateway)

  Overview

You use the Import Container property page to select an import container for addresses that might be transferred from your gateway. How you use this property page depends on the design of your gateway.

  Import Container

  Trust Level

  Container Button


Export Containers (Gateway)

  Overview

Use the Export Containers property page to specify the recipient containers from which to export directory information. You can also set a trust level to limit the directory information that is exported.

  Recipient Containers

  Export These Recipients

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Site

  Trust Level

  Export Custom Recipients


Access Control definition
access control

Allows the owner of a resource to determine who can access the resource and what they can do with it. In Microsoft Exchange Server, permissions can be granted to Windows NT user accounts, mailboxes, distribution lists, and public folders.


Address Book definition
Address Book

The Address Book makes a subset of the directory, including mailboxes, custom recipients, distribution lists, and public folders, available to users so they can access information about the organization just as they would a telephone directory. The Address Book can contain one or more address lists. See global address list and personal address list.

address list

A collection of recipients in the Address Book organized by their recipient container. Examples of address lists are the global address list and the personal address list (.PAB file).


Address Space definition
address space

A set of address information associated with a connector or gateway that identifies a certain type of messages and the route these messages should take. Address spaces are typically a subset of a complete address—they contain only the necessary elements to identify the route that a message should take.


Administrator Window definition
Administrator window

The main user interface display of the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program. The Administrator window provides the tools needed to manage and configure all Microsoft Exchange Server objects, including organizations, sites, and computers.


Administrator Program definition
Administrator program

A graphical user interface which enables system administrators to manage and configure all Microsoft Exchange Server objects, including organizations, sites, and computers.


Advanced Security definition
advanced security

Provides users with the ability to protect and verify messages as they are being transferred through a Microsoft Exchange Server organization. Advanced security includes digital signatures and encryption.


Alias definition
alias

A name or label used as an alternative means of addressing e-mail to a user's mailbox. An alias is typically a shortened version of the mailbox owner's name. For example, suzanf might be the alias for Suzan Fine's mailbox.


Authentication definition
authentication

Validation of a user's Windows NT Server log on information. Authentication requires users, processes, and services to enter a unique log on identifier and a password in order to access the system. When a user logs on to an account on a Windows NT Server domain, that authentication may be performed by any server of that domain. See also trust relationships.


AutoAssistants definition
AutoAssistants

In Microsoft Exchange Client, AutoAssistants are the Inbox Assistant and the Out of Office Assistant which can be used to create rules for managing and organizing information. The Inbox Assistant can be used to create rules which automatically filter incoming mail and take a variety of actions such as moving mail messages to a particular folder, forwarding messages to another user, or automatically deleting mail. The Out of Office Assistant can be set to respond to e-mail for users when they are out of the office.


Backbone definition
backbone

The network connection between LAN segments. A Microsoft Exchange Server messaging backbone allows users in one Microsoft Exchange Server system to communicate with users in another Microsoft Exchange Server system through one or more messaging protocols such as SNADS, PROFS, and SMTP.


Back End definition
back end

The set of Microsoft Exchange Server components installed on the server. See also front end.


Bridgehead Server definition
bridgehead server

A Microsoft Exchange Server computer which acts as the end-point of a messaging connection between two sites configured as an X.400 connector. This server is responsible for routing messages through that connection.


Certificate definition
certificate

Data used for digital signatures and encryption that binds the user's public key to the mailbox. Every user has two certificates—an encryption certificate which contains the user's public encryption key and is an attribute of the user's mailbox, and a signing certificate which contains the user's public signing key and is contained in the user's security file.


Child Object definition
child object

An object in the Administrator program directory hierarchy that is subordinate to another object, the parent object. For example, the server object is a child of the server container because it is in the server container. The child object inherits permissions from the parent object.

client installation point

A shared directory on a file server to which users can connect in order to install Microsoft Exchange Client. Once the client installation point has been created, users can run the Setup program to install a copy of the client software on their local hard disk. A client installation point can also used to set up a network share.


Client/Server Architecture definition
Client/server architecture

Microsoft Exchange Server uses a client/server architecture, where processing is distributed between client and server processes. The client (process) sends requests to a server (process), and the server carries out the instructions or obtains the requested information.


Connector definition
connector

A component provided with Microsoft Exchange Server that allows Microsoft Exchange Server to connect to other messaging systems. For example, the Internet Mail Connector enables Microsoft Exchange Client users to connect to the Internet.


Container definition
container

In the Administrator program, an object which contains other objects. For example, the Recipients container is composed of recipient objects.


Custom Recipient definition
custom recipient

Addressing information in the global or personal address book for recipients on other systems.


Digital Signatures definition
digital signatures

A feature of advanced security which provides source verification by allowing users to verify the source of information they receive or send. Also verifies that the contents of the message have not been modified during transit.


Directory Hierarchy definition
directory hierarchy

In the Administrator program, the hierarchical structure of objects in the directory that represent each component of the organization, such as the organization itself, recipients, servers, and so on. All objects in an organization or site can be managed by manipulating the structure of the directory hierarchy.


Directory Object definition
directory object

A record such as a server, a mailbox, or a distribution list which is stored in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory. Every object in the directory has properties which specify an object's characteristics and who can use and make changes to the object. You can define the properties of objects in the directory using the Administrator program.


Directory Replication definition
directory replication

The process that updates the directories of all Microsoft Exchange Server computers within a site and between sites with the same information. Within a site, directory replication is automatic. Between sites, you can configure directory replication so that only the desired information is replicated to other sites.


Directory Replication Bridgehead Server definition
directory replication bridgehead server

A Microsoft Exchange Server computer which acts as the end-point of a directory replication link between its site and a remote site. This server is responsible for requesting directory updates from the replication bridgehead server at the remote site.


Directory Schema definition
directory schema

(The schema). Defines the structure for information in the directory. The schema defines the rules for structuring information, such as which attributes are associated with which objects, and which types of values can be associated with which attributes. the schema also defines the relationship between objects. The directory enforces these rules.


Directory definition
directory

The directory stores all the information available about an organization's resources and users including mailboxes, public folders, distribution lists, servers, and more. Other components use the directory to map addresses and route messages. The directory is automatically replicated to all servers in a site, and it can be configured to be replicated automatically to servers in other sites. All recipient objects in the directory are contained in the Address Book which users can use like a telephone directory. The directory is based on the International Organization for Standards (ISO) X.500 specification.


Directory Synchronization Component definition
directory synchronization component

A Microsoft Exchange Server component which exchanges directory information between Microsoft Exchange Server, Microsoft Mail 3.x, and other messaging systems using the Mail 3.x directory synchronization protocol.


Directory Synchronization definition
directory synchronization

The process of keeping a Microsoft Exchange Server directory synchronized with directories from MS Mail (PC) and MS Mail (AppleTalk) systems. You can configure directory synchronization so that only the desired information is replicated to other enterprises or foreign systems.


Distribution List (DL) definition
distribution list (DL)

A collection of recipients logically grouped together and addressed as a single recipient. A message addressed to a distribution list will be delivered to every user in the list. Administrators can create distribution lists and add them to an address book such as the Global Address Book. Users can also create personal distribution lists and add them to their Personal Address Book (PAB). A Microsoft Exchange Server distribution list is similar to a PC Mail group.


Domain definition
domain

A group of servers running Windows NT Server. Optionally, a domain can also include LAN Manager 2.x servers, Windows NT Workstation clients, and other clients such as Windows for Workgroups and MS-DOS clients. All members of a domain share the same user account database and security policy.


Domain Controller definition
domain controller

Refers to the Windows NT Server computer that maintains the security policy and the master database for a domain, and authenticates domain log ons. Windows NT Server domains can have one primary domain controller (PDC) and one or more backup domain controllers (BDC).


Dynamic RAS Connector definition
Dynamic RAS Connector

A tool provided with Microsoft Exchange Server which connects sites on the same local area network (LAN) using RAS.


E-mail Address definition
e-mail address

The address by which Microsoft Exchange Server recipients (mailboxes, distribution lists, public folders, and custom recipients) are known to foreign mail systems. Microsoft Exchange Server automatically generates an X.400, MS Mail, and Internet address for each recipient. Additional proxy addresses are generated when third-party gateways are installed. An example of an e-mail address is an Internet mail address such as suzanf@fab.com which conforms to the standards set for SMTP communications.


Encryption definition
encryption

A feature of advanced security which provides confidentiality by allowing users to conceal data. The data is encrypted as it resides on disk and travels over a network connection.


Foreign Mail System definition
foreign mail system

A mail system other than Microsoft Exchange Server.


Form definition
form

Provides a structure for posting and viewing specific information. A custom form provides a structure for posting and viewing specific information. It may be a send form, such as a purchase requisition or expense report form, used to exchange information with another user, or it may be a post form used for posting and viewing information in an Exchange folder.


Forms Designer definition
Forms Designer

The Microsoft Exchange Client component which enables users to design custom forms that can make workgroups more productive. Forms Designer is a visual non-programming design tool that enables the forms designer to define the appearance and behavior of forms, form windows, and fields. Although designing forms does not require formal programming experience, familiarity with Microsoft Visual Basic 4.0 is helpful to take advantage of some advanced features of the Forms Designer.


Front End definition
front end

The set of Microsoft Exchange Client components installed on the client computer. See also back end.


Gateway definition
gateway

Third-party gateways translate, transfer, and deliver messages from Microsoft Exchange Server to foreign mail systems such as PROFS and SNADS. These components must be purchased separately.


Global Address List definition
global address list

Contains all recipients, custom recipients, distribution lists, and public folders in the organization. This address list is available by default to every user in the organization.


Home Server definition
home server

The Microsoft Exchange Server computer which contains a user's mailbox, personal address book, or other Microsoft Exchange files which are used frequently.


Host definition
host

An information process on an SMTP messaging system. It is characterized by a domain name. The computer that stores the host has an associated IP address.


Inbox Assistant definition
Inbox Assistant

In Microsoft Exchange Client, an AutoAssistant which enables users to create rules which automatically filter incoming mail and take a variety of actions such as moving mail messages to a particular folder, forwarding messages to another user, or automatically deleting mail.


Information Store definition
information store

A Microsoft Exchange Server core component. The information store is server-based storage that contains users' mailboxes and public and private folders, and enforces security on this information. It maintains information in two databases, the public information store and private information store. See also public information store, private information store.


Information Service definition
information service

A utility that enables Microsoft Exchange and other messaging applications to do one or more of the following: send or receive mail via a direct or remote connection; store, share, and/or retrieve information; obtain user address information. User's can specify information services in their profile.


Instance definition
instance

A single representation of an executed program, typically described in relation to other representations of the same program running simultaneously on the same computer. For example, if Microsoft Exchange Client was already running on a computer when a user started Microsoft Exchange Client, two instances of Microsoft Exchange Client would be running at the same time.

Instance can also mean a replica of a public folder. An instance of a public folder is a public folder that has been replicated from one Microsoft Exchange Server computer to another.


Internet Mail Connector definition
Internet Mail Connector

A Microsoft Exchange Server component that enables Microsoft Exchange Client users to seamlessly exchange messages with Internet users.


Key definition
key

Used to digitally sign and encrypt data. Each mailbox has two key pairs. One key pair is used for signing and verifying operations, the other pair is used for encrypting and decrypting operations. Each key pair consists of a public key which is publicly known, and a private key which is known only to the key's user.


Key Management Component definition
Key Management component

Manages security information which is used for digitally signing and sealing messages with Microsoft Exchange Server. The Key Management component generates and maintains the public and private encryption keys, stores public signing keys and private encryption keys, and generates tokens used to enable digital signatures and encryption capabilities for a mailbox. It also revokes security for a user when instructed by the Administrator program. The Key Management component is installed on the Key Management server (KM server).


Key Management Server definition
Key Management server (KM server)

The Microsoft Exchange Server computer that has the Key Management component installed. Only one KM server can be installed in an organization.


Local Delivery Message definition
local delivery message

A message sent between Microsoft Exchange Server recipients that share the same home server. Local delivery messages are processed by the information store, not by the MTA.


Local Replication definition
local replication

See offline folders.


Mailbox definition
mailbox

The delivery location for all incoming mail messages for a designated owner. Information in a user's mailbox is stored in the private information store on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer. A mailbox can contain received messages, message attachments, folders, folder hierarchy, and more. Mailboxes are set up by the administrator.


MAPI (Messaging Application Programming Interface) definition
MAPI (Messaging Application Programming Interface)

A common interface that Microsoft Exchange Client components use to access data from the server components. Messaging applications and information services that comply with MAPI can be "plugged" into Microsoft Exchange Server and Microsoft Exchange Client to provide additional functionality.


Message Handling System (MHS) definition
message handling system (MHS)

An X.400 message handling system is a collection of user agents (UAs) and message transfer agents (MTAs) that work together to transfer messages from one point to another.


Message Transfer Agent (MTA) definition
message transfer agent (MTA)

Like a postal service, the MTA routes messages to other Microsoft Exchange Server MTAs or gateways, information stores, and other X.400 MTAs in foreign systems. It also maps addresses, routes messages, and converts message formats.

In MS Mail, the Message Transfer Agent is a program that transfers external mail and system mail between postoffices on the network. These programs include the External Mail program, and the directory synchronization agents.

In the X.400 message handling system, a message transfer agent is a server-based process in the message transfer system responsible for routing and delivering messages. It is equivalent to a local postal sorting office. See the CCITT X.400 Recommendation for further information.


Message Transfer Applications definition
message transfer applications

Applications that transfer messages between systems on behalf of many entities, such as gateways.


Message Transfer Protocol definition
Message transfer protocol

In X.400, the P1 protocol that is used to establish communication between two message transfer agents.


Messaging-Aware Application definition
messaging-aware application

An application in which basic messaging capabilities add value to the primary function of the application, but messaging is not the primary function of the application. For example, a word-processor that can send documents to other users.


Messaging-Based Application definition
messaging-based application

An application that requires full access to all back-end messaging services, including the message database, directory, and transport services. For example, a mail client.


Messaging-Enabled Application definition
messaging-enabled application

An application that has some type of messaging capability as its main function. For example, a forms-routing application that sends an expense report to a series of recipients and records their comments.


Messaging Profile definition
messaging profile

A group of settings which provides Microsoft Exchange Server with essential information about a client's configuration. It contains the delivery location for incoming messages, files, and other items, the location of the user's personal address book, and a list of all the information services that are available. A user may have multiple profiles on a single client for different configurations; however, only one profile can be used at any one time. See also user profile.


Microsoft Mail Connector definition
Microsoft Mail Connector

A Microsoft Exchange Server component that provides seamless connectivity to MS Mail (PC), MS Mail (AppleTalk), and MS Mail (PC) gateways.


Microsoft Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector definition
Microsoft Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector

Enables Microsoft Exchange Server to exchange Microsoft Schedule+ free/busy information with MS Mail (PC). The Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector is an extension to the Microsoft Mail Connector.


MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) definition
MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions)

A message format consisting of a structured message header and structured message body with specifications for multi-media objects. It includes support for word processing documents, PostScript files, graphic and binary files, video, voice messages and other messaging types.


MIME-Conformant User Agent definition
MIME-conformant user agent

A user agent that you use to send and receive MIME messages.


Multi-valued Property definition
multi-valued property

A property which has multiple values associated with it. An example of a multi-valued property is an address which has multiple values including MS e-mail, X.400, and SMTP addresses.


Network Share definition
network share

A shared directory on a file server to which users can connect in order to install and run Microsoft Exchange. One network client share can be used by numerous clients, providing they are using the same network operating system.


Object definition
object

A record in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory such as a site, server, connector, mailbox, or distribution list. All objects in an organization can be managed in the Administrator program. The overall structure of an organization is determined by how objects are linked and their properties are defined.


Offline Folders definition
offline folders

A feature of Microsoft Exchange Client which makes public folders and mailbox folders available to users when they are offline. Folders configured for offline availability are stored in a .OST file on the user's disk. When users log on to their home server and the network connection is reestablished, Microsoft Exchange Client automatically synchronizes the offline copy of the folder that is stored locally on the client with the copy on the server.


Organization definition
organization

A collection of Microsoft Exchange servers, grouped into sites, that are linked together to provide all the information, messaging, and connectivity needed by a workgroup. The organization is the largest administrative unit which encompasses all the Microsoft Exchange Server computers that provide the messaging infrastructure for your company.


Parent Object definition
parent object

An object in the Administrator program directory hierarchy that is superior to another object, the child object. For example, the server container is the parent object of the server object because the server object is in the server container. Any permissions on the parent object are inherited by the child object.


Personal Folder File (.PST File) definition
personal folder file (.PST file)

Contains information intended for private use which can be stored locally on a user's disk or on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer. A personal folder can also be designated as the delivery location for mail.


Personal Address Book definition
personal address book

Users can create and maintain the personal address book in order to keep track of recipient addresses contained in the Address Book that they use frequently. They can also use the personal address book to create and maintain personal distribution lists, and custom recipient addresses for users in outside systems such as the Internet or X.400. The personal address book, also called a .PAB file, can be stored on a server or user's disk.


Postoffice definition
post office

A common set of data files on a server shared among all users of MS Mail (PC) and MS Mail (AppleTalk).


Private Information Store definition
private information store

In Microsoft Exchange Server, the subcomponent of the information store which maintains all messages exchanged by one person or a group of people. Every user has a personal mailbox on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer which contains personal messages.


Property definition
property

The attributes of a Microsoft Exchange Server directory object which can typically be selected using property sheets for the specified object. For example, to modify the permissions on a mailbox, make changes to the mailbox's Permissions property page.


Public Folder definition
public folder

A folder located on Microsoft Exchange Server computers that facilitate the exchange of all types of information between groups of people in an organization. A public folder can include information such as e-mail messages, spreadsheets, graphics, and voice mail and can be configured for different types of applications, for example, bulletin boards, discussion forums, customer tracking systems, and so on. Public folders are stored on Microsoft Exchange Server computers.


Public Folder Affinity definition
public folder affinity

Enables clients in one site to connect to public folders in other sites. Public folder affinity reduces network traffic caused by replication and reduces required storage space.


Public Folder Replication definition
public folder replication

The process of maintaining multiple public folder replicas. Public folder replication allows you to store copies of a public folder on multiple Microsoft Exchange Server computers guaranteeing that they remain in sync.


Public Information Store definition
public information store

In Microsoft Exchange Server, the subcomponent of the information store which maintains information stored in public folders.


Recipient definition
recipient

An object in the directory which can receive messages and information. Microsoft Exchange Server recipients are mailboxes, distribution lists, public folders, and custom recipients.


Recipient Address definition
recipient address

A set of strings that identify a recipient and follow certain standards such as those established for X.400 and SMTP systems.


Remote Procedure Call (RPC) definition
remote procedure call (RPC)

A message-passing facility that is independent of the underlying network and allows a distributed application to call services available on various machines in a network. Microsoft Exchange Server uses RPC for client-server communication.


Revocation definition
revocation

A feature of advanced security which warns users when they receive signed messages from users the organization no longer trusts. The KM server manages revocation using a revocation list which contains the serial number and the expiration date of each revoked user's certificate.


Routing definition
routing

The process of transferring and delivering messages to the appropriate recipient.


Routing Cost definition
routing cost

Used by the MTA to determine which route a message will take to reach its destination if there is more than one possible route. This is useful for redundancy and load balancing traffic across connections and between servers.


Routing Table definition
routing table

Contains information that the MTA needs to route messages to their destinations.

roving user

Users who log on to Microsoft Exchange Client from different computers in an organization.


Security Context definition
security context

An aspect of Windows NT Server that controls the access a user, a process, or a service has to system services.


Security File definition
security file

An encrypted file (.EPF file) which is automatically generated to store advanced security information. Every mailbox has one security file which is used to encrypt and sign messages. It can be stored on a server or a client's disk.


Schedule File definition
schedule file

A file which Microsoft Schedule+ automatically generates to store scheduling information for users. The schedule file (.SCD file) can be stored on a server or the client's disk. The information in this file is automatically stored in a hidden private folder on the user's home server so other users with the appropriate permissions can access it.


Schema definition
schema

See directory schema.


Service Account definition
service account

A Windows NT Server user account which Microsoft Exchange Server uses to start and run Microsoft Exchange Server services. Microsoft Exchange Server computers use the service account to validate other servers in the site and give them access to Microsoft Exchange Server services. All Microsoft Exchange Server computers in the site must use the same service account otherwise they cannot communicate with each other.


Signing definition
signing

A feature of advanced security which verifies to an e-mail recipient the identity of the sender. Signing also verifies that the content of an e-mail message has not been modified during transit. Signing prevents the originator of a message from attempting to send a message under the premise of another identity.


Site definition
site

One or more Microsoft Exchange Server computers generally corresponding to a single geographical location that share the same directory information (mailboxes, distribution lists, routing tables, and so on). All servers in a site must be able to communicate with each other through synchronous remote procedure calls (RPCs).


Site Connector definition
site connector

A tool provided with Microsoft Exchange Server which connects sites on the same local area network (LAN).


SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) definition
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

A session protocol used to transfer electronic mail between computers. It is a server-to-server protocol defined in STD 10, RFC 821. The Microsoft Exchange Server Internet Mail connector uses SMTP to transfer messages between a Microsoft Exchange Server site and an SMTP messaging system.


System Attendant definition
system attendant

A general maintenance service that must be running in order for Microsoft Exchange Server processes to run. Some of the tasks the system attendant performs include monitoring the state of messaging connections between servers, assisting in running monitoring tools, generating e-mail addresses for new message recipients, and logging information for message tracking purposes.


Target Server definition
target server

A Microsoft Exchange Server computer which acts as the end-point of a messaging link between two sites configured as a site connector. This server is responsible for routing messages through that link.


Transaction Log File definition
transaction log file

A type of file that Microsoft Exchange Server uses to provide fault tolerance in the event that data needs to be restored. When data is written to the information store or directory databases from memory, it is synchronously written to a transaction log file. Transaction log files can be used to construct data not yet written to the database in the event of a failure such as a power outage or a disk failure, provided the log files do not reside on the disk that failed.


Token definition
token

A random 8-character string used to enable digital signatures and encryption for a user or recover keys for a user. A token is used only once, and secures the connection between the Key Management server and the client before digital signatures and encryption has been established.


Trust Relationship definition
trust relationship

Trust relationships are links between Windows NT Server domains that enable pass-through authentication, in which a user has only one user account in one domain, yet can access the entire network. User accounts and global groups defined in a trusted domain can be given rights and resource permissions in a trusting domain, even though those accounts don't exist in the trusting domain's database. A trusting domain honors the logon authentication of a trusted domain.


User Agent (UA) definition
user agent (UA)

An X.400 or SMTP message system entity that acts of behalf of the user (the person or entity sending and receiving mail). Microsoft Mail is an example of a user agent.


User Account definition
user account

Consists of all the information that defines a user to Windows NT Server. This includes the user name and password required for the user to log on, the groups in which the user account has membership, and the rights and permissions the user has for using the system and accessing its resources.

Important Note: User passwords are known only to the user and cannot be viewed by the system administrator. Should a user forget a password, the user must set up his or her profile and personal folder file again. Any information associated with the user's original .PST file will be permanently lost.


User Profile definition
user profile

A group of settings used by Windows NT Server and Windows 95 which provides the operating system with essential information about a client's configuration.


View definition
view

A combination of settings in Microsoft Exchange Client for displaying and organizing the contents of a folder. Views allow users to view messages in folders by date, sender, recipient name, file size, or using a customized view.


X.25 Public Carrier definition
X.25 public carrier

A public data switching network that uses the X.25 communications protocol.


X.25 Public PAD (Packet Assembler/Disassembler) definition
X.25 public PAD (packet assembler/disassembler)

The hardware and software provided by an X.25 public carrier that allows other users to access an X.25 network by modem.


X.400 Message Format definition
X.400 message format

A message format consisting of two basic components, an envelope and the content.


X.400 Recommendation definition
X.400 Recommendation

A set of recommendations that defines the standard interfaces that make up an electronic messaging system for the enterprise. The X.400 Recommendation was developed by the Comite Consultatif Internationale de Telegraphie et Telephonie (CCITT) — a division of the United Nations — based on the OSI Reference Model and the protocols defined by the International Organization for Standardization (OSI). The CCITT is now called the United Nations International Telecommunications Union (ITU).


X.400 Connector definition
X.400 Connector

A Microsoft Exchange Server component that is integrated with the MTA and can be configured to connect sites within Microsoft Exchange Server, or to route messages to foreign X.400 systems. When handling communication between Microsoft Exchange Server and foreign X.400 systems, it maps addresses and converts Microsoft Exchange Server messages to native X.400 messages and vice versa. The X.400 connector conforms to the 1984 and 1988 CCITT X.400 standards.


X.400 Transport Stack definition
X.400 transport stack

Networking software required to support X.400 server-to-server message transport.


General (Connector)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Computer Name

  Message Size

  Administrative Note


Computer Name

The name given to the computer where the Microsoft Exchange Server connector is installed.


Message Size

You can configure the maximum size of messages transported through the Internet Mail Connector using the General property page. This is useful when you do not want users sending messages with large attachments that might affect performance. This setting applies to both inbound and outbound messages. If the message size is exceeded, the message will be returned to the sender with an NDR.

You can restrict message size by e-mail domain. For outbound messages, the maximum message size in the General property page is applied before the maximum message size specified by the domain.

Choose No Limit to allow messages of any size to be sent. Choose Maximum to set the message size from 1 to 2,097,151K.

Note  Message size should not be restricted when using the Internet Mail Connector as a site connector. This is to ensure that system messages used for directory replication and information store updates are not prevented from passing through the Internet Mail Connector.


Permissions (Connector)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this connector. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has. For connectors, Microsoft Exchange provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for connector permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under the site object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Delete	Delete objects within this site.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for objects within this site.
  Windows NT Accounts with Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts with Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Connections (Internet Mail Connector)

  Overview

Use the Connections property page to specify default connection information for the Internet Mail Connector.

  Transfer Mode

  Advanced Button

  Message Delivery

  Accept Or Reject By Host

  Connector Message Queues


Advanced Button

Displays the Advanced dialog. Use the dialog to specify the maximum number of inbound and outbound connections the Internet Mail Connector will accept and initiate at one time, and define the maximum number of messages sent during each connection and adjust the number of connections and messages based on resources available in your environment.


Transfer Mode

Specify the transfer mode for the Internet Mail Connector.

Option	Description
Inbound & Outbound	Accept inbound messages and send outbound messages.
Inbound Only	Accept only inbound messages.
Outbound Only	Send only outbound messages.
None (Flush Queues)	Do not accept inbound or outbound messages. This allows time for pending messages to be delivered.


Advanced Dialog (Internet Mail Connector)

  Overview

Specify the maximum number of inbound and outbound connections the Internet Mail Connector will accept and initiate at one time, and define the maximum number of messages sent during each connection and adjust the number of connections and messages based on resources available in your environment.

  Max. Number Of Inbound Connections

  Max. Number Of Outbound Connections

  Max. Number Of Connections To A Single Host

  Max. Number Of Messages Sent In A Connection

  Reset Default Values


Reset Default Values

Return all options to default settings.


Max. Number of Messages Sent in a Connection

The maximum number of messages to be sent during each outbound connection.


Max. Number of Connections to a Single Host

The maximum number of connections the Internet Mail Connector can make to a single host at one time.


Max. Number of Outbound Connections

The maximum number of outbound connections the Internet Mail Connector can make at one time.


Max. Number of Inbound Connections

The maximum number of inbound connections the Internet Mail Connector can accept at one time.


Message Delivery

Configure the Internet Mail Connector to use domain name service (DNS) queries or to deliver messages to a specified host. To deliver mail to a specific host, select Forward All Messages To Host, and type the IP or fully qualified address of the host. Choose the E-Mail Domain button to specify delivery by e-mail domain.


Specify By E-Mail Domain

Defines the way messages will be delivered based on the domain name of the destination.

  Add Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Remove Button

Removes the selected e-mail domain from the list


Edit Button

Displays the Edit E-Mail Domain dialog. Use the dialog to change the name of an existing e-mail domain.


Add Button

Displays the Add E-Mail Domain dialog. Use the dialog to create an e-mail domain.


Add or Edit E-Mail Domain

Use the Add E-Mail Domain dialog to add an e-mail domain; use Edit E-Mail Domain to edit an existing domain. Type the name of the new domain or edit the current name. Choose either DNS, or forward messages to a host that you type in the box.

  E-Mail Domain

  Delivery


Delivery

Use DNS

Choose this option when you want to use DNS queries to deliver messages to the domain specified in E-Mail Domain.

Forward all messages for this domain to host

Choose this option to forward e-mail to the host you specify. Type the host name in the field provided.


E-Mail Domain

Type the name of the new e-mail domain, or change the existing name.


Accept or Reject By Host

If you choose Accept Messages From All Hosts, messages from any host not explicitly listed to be rejected will be accepted.

Choosing Accept or Reject By Host enables the Specify Hosts button. Click Specify Hosts to display the Specify Host dialog. Use the dialog to specify the host computers from which you want to reject messages.


Specify Hosts

Use Specify Hosts to identify the hosts from which you will accept or reject messages.

  IP Address

  Action

  Add Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Remove Button

Removes the selected host from the list of hosts from which you will either accept or reject messages.


Edit Button

Select Edit to change whether you choose to accept or reject messages from the selected host. You can also change the IP address and/or mask for a host from which you are currently accepting or rejecting messages.


Add Button

Select Add to specify the IP address and mask for the host from which you want to accept or reject messages.


Action

Identifies whether messages will be accepted or rejected from the host.


IP Address

Displays the Internet Protocol (IP) address for the host.


Add or Edit Hosts

Use this dialog to add or change a host IP address and choose whether the connection will be accepted or rejected (messages originating from the host will not be received).

  Accept connection from this host

  Reject connection from this host

  IP Address

  Mask


Mask

Type the mask for the IP Address.

To control access, the IP address specified is matched against the IP address of the host that is connecting to the Internet Mail Connector. The mask specifies which bits are relevant in the match. In Boolean logic, this is equivalent to exclusive-oring the addresses, then anding the result with the mask. If the result is zero, then it is a match.

For example:

IP 192.11.154.0

Mask: 255.255.255.0

Therefore, any IP address in 192.11.154.n would match, where n = 1-254.


IP Address

Type the IP (Internet protocol) address of the SMTP hosts(s) that will be accepted or rejected. Wildcarding is accomplished using the Mask field, If you are only specifying a single IP address  to be rejected you do not need to use the Mask field.


Reject connection from this host

Choose this option if you do not want to receive messages from this host.


Accept connection from this host

Choose this option if you want to receive messages from this host.


Connector Message Queues

Retry Interval (hrs.)

The Internet Mail Connector can be set to wait a specified number of hours before retrying a host to which a previous connection attempt has failed. If the Internet Mail Connector attempts to deliver a message to an SMTP host for which it has obtained an IP address and does not receive a response from the host, the connector attempts to reconnect after the period of time specified in the Retry interval box.

The first number in the list determines the time the Internet Mail Connector will wait between the initial delivery attempt and the first retry. The second number is the amount of time the Internet Mail Connector will wait between the first retry and the second retry, and so on. The last specified time interval will be repeated until either the connection is made or the specified timeout value has been reached.

Message Timeouts Button

Message timeout values can be specified for urgent (high importance), normal, and non-urgent (low importance) messages. If the timeout is reached before the message can be sent, the sender is notified with an NDR and the message is not sent.


Message Timeouts

Message timeout values can be specified for urgent (high importance), normal, and non-urgent (low importance) messages. If the timeout is reached before the message can be sent, the sender is notified with an NDR and the message is not sent.

  Urgent Message Timeout (hrs)

  Normal Message Timeout (hrs)

  Non-Urgent Message Timeout (hrs)

  Disable notifications for queued mail

  Notify sender for queued mail

  Reset Default Values Button


Reset Default Values Button

Resets the default hours values for the timeout and notification frequency fields on the Message Timeouts dialog.


Notify sender for queued mail

Choose one or more options to notify the sender of queued mail.

The Internet Mail Connector notifies the sender when an outbound message has been queued beyond the time specified in the Connections property page. The default is to only notify the sender for queued mail of high importance.

Option	Description
Urgent mail every (hrs)	Select to enable notification for messages of high importance. This is the default. Type a value for the number of hours before notification. The default is 4 hours.
Normal mail every (hrs)	Select to enable notification for messages of normal importance. Type a value for the number of hours before notification. When selected, the default is 12 hours.
Non-urgent mail every (hrs)	Select to enable notification for messages of low importance. Type a value for the number of hours before notification. When selected, the default is 24 hours.
You can disable notification by choosing Disable notifications for queued mail.


Disable notifications for queued mail

Choosing this option means the Internet Mail Connector will not notify the sender when an outbound message has been queued beyond the time specified on the Connections property page.


Non-urgent message timeout (hrs)

The maximum amount of time the Internet Mail Connector will try to send a message of low importance. The default is 72 hours. The maximum value is 999.


Normal message timeout (hrs)

The maximum amount of time the Internet Mail Connector will try to send a message of normal importance. The default is 48 hours. The maximum value is 999.


Urgent message timeout (hrs)

The maximum amount of time the Internet Mail Connector will try to send a message of high importance. The default is 24 hours. The maximum value is 999.


Internet Mail (Internet Mail Connector)

  Overview

Use the Internet Mail property page to:

Assign an administrator's mailbox to receive delivery status messages.

Specify an address type for sender addresses.

Set up non-delivery report (NDR) notifications.

Specify a message attachment content format.

Specify a default character set.

Specify message content by domain.

Enable rich text for outbound messages.

Disable out-of-office responses.

Enable or disable automatic replies to the Internet and display names for outbound messages.

Specify the maximum number of characters per line.

  Address Type

  Administrator's Mailbox

  Change Button

  Notifications Button

  Send Attachments Using

  Interoperability Button

  Character Set Translation

  E-Mail Domain Button

  Enable Message Tracking


Address Type

The address type is used by the Internet Mail Connector to define the e-mail address that will be used for the sender and recipient of an outbound message. This is useful when your organization is using multiple Internet Mail Connectors. One connector may service internal SMTP addresses, so the address type used by that connector may be different from the address type used to send mail outside the organization. The address type typically matches the address space of the connector.

For more information about address type, see the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator's Guide.


Administrator's Mailbox

Displays the recipient for the administrator's mailbox. To specify a different recipient, choose the Change button.


Change Button

Displays a dialog which enables you to select a different administrator's mailbox.


Notifications Button

Displays the Notifications dialog. Use the dialog to specify when, and under what conditions, you want to send notifications for non-delivery reports.


Send Attachments Using

Specify whether outbound messages with attachments will be encoded using Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) or UNIX-to-UNIX Encode (UUENCODE).


Interoperability Button

Displays the Interoperability dialog. Use the dialog to specify whether interoperability options such as Microsoft Exchange rich text, word-wrap, and automatic replies will be enabled.


Character Set Translation

Specify the default character set to be used when sending outbound and receiving inbound MIME and non-MIME messages. When the content conversion occurs from SMTP to Exchange internal format and vice versa, the character set you specify is used. The Internet Mail Connector should be configured to match remote SMTP hosts, or characters may be lost.


E-Mail Domain Button

Displays the E-Mail Domain dialog. If you want to use different encoding methods and character sets for individual domains, you would use the dialog to specify settings for the domains. These settings will override the default message content information and allow you to configure individual domains separately.


Enable Message Tracking

When checked, causes the MTA to create a daily log file that contains routing information about all the messages that the MTA processes. These daily log files are used by the Message Tracking Center to determine routing information for specific messages.


E-Mail Domain

Allows you to add, edit, remove, or rearrange e-mail domains. If you want to use different encoding methods and character sets for individual domains, you would use the E-Mail Domain dialog to specify settings for the domains. These settings will override the default message content information and allow you to configure individual domains separately.

  E-Mail Domain

  Add Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Remove Button

Removes the selected e-mail domain from the list.


Edit Button

Displays the Edit E-Mail Domain dialog. You can use the dialog to change the domain name, maximum message size, encoding method, and character set translation for the selected domain.


Add Button

Displays the Add E-Mail Domain dialog. Use the dialog to specify the domain name, maximum message size, encoding method, and character set translation for the new domain.


E-Mail Domain

Lists email domain names or IP addresses for domains. For a domain, you can change the maximum message size, encoding method, and character set translation.

The Internet Mail Connector searches the list starting at the top and moves down until a match is found. Therefore, subdomain names should be listed before domains. You can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reposition domains on the list.


Add or Edit E-Mail Domain

Allows you to specify or change encoding methods and character sets for individual domains.

  E-Mail Domain

  Maximum Message Size

  Send Attachments Using

  Interoperability Button

  Character Set Translation


E-Mail Domain

Type the domain name or IP address of the domain. Subdomains and fully-qualified domain names are allowed. Wildcard characters are not allowed.


Maximum Message Size

Specify the maximum number of bytes for messages sent using this connector, or choose No Limit.


Notifications

Use the Notifications dialog to specify when, and under what conditions, the Internet Mail Connector should notify the administrator of non-delivery reports (NDRs).

  Always send notifications when non-delivery reports are generated

  Send notifications for these non-delivery reports


Send notifications for these non-delivery reports

Select to specify the types of NDR the administrator will receive. By default, Multiple matches for an E-Mail address occurred is the only option enabled.


Always send notifications when non-delivery reports are generated

Select to notify the administrator about all non-delivery reports. The box is clear by default.


Interoperability

Use Interoperability dialog to enable or disable interoperability options such as Microsoft Exchange rich text, word-wrap, and automatic replies.

  Send Microsoft Exchange rich text formatting

  Message text word wrap

  Disable Out of Office responses to the Internet

  Disable automatic replies to the Internet

  Disable sending Display names to the Internet

  Reset default values


Reset Default Values Button

Resets the Interoperability fields to their default values.


Disable sending Display names to the Internet

Clear to enable display names for messages sent through the Internet Mail Connector (the default). Select to disable display names for messages sent through the Internet Mail Connector.


Disable Automatic Replies to the Internet

Clear to allow automatic replies to messages received from the Internet (the default). Select to disable automatic replies to messages received by the Internet Mail Connector.


Disable Out Of Office responses to the Internet

Clear to allow out-of-office responses to the Internet (the default). Select to disable out-of-office responses to messages received by the Internet Mail Connector.


Message text word wrap

Never

Prevent text from wrapping on outbound uuencode messages. Message text word-wrap cannot be configured for MIME messages. The ability to display a specific number of characters per line depends on the receiving station's capabilities.

At Column

Lines will be hard wrapped at the specified column.


Send Microsoft Exchange rich text formatting

Select Always to always send Microsoft Exchange rich text, User to send Microsoft Exchange rich text only when enabled for the recipient (the default), or Never to never send Microsoft Exchange rich text.


Address Space (Connector)

  Overview

Connectors are used to create paths for messages to be sent outside a site. These paths are represented by address spaces. Address spaces can be used to balance the messaging load when you use multiple Internet Mail Connectors. For example, if you have two Internet Mail Connectors, you can designate one connector to process messages destined for domainA and domainB and the other to process messages destined for domainC. However, if you use two Internet Mail Connectors to handle a large throughput to a single domain, you can configure both connectors to process the same addresses for equal load balancing.

To route all SMTP messages through an Internet Mail Connector, choose the New Internet template and choose OK without typing an e-mail domain. To route all messages to company.com through an Internet Mail Connector, choose the New Internet template and type company.com under E-Mail Domain.

The cost associated with each address space is used to optimize outbound message routing but does not affect message reception. Routing costs range from 1 to 100. All mail is sent using the route with the lowest cost. If two or more routes are available with the same cost, the load placed on the routes is roughly equal.

  Type Column

  Address Column

  Cost Column

  New General Button

  New X.400 Button

  New MS Mail Button

  New Internet Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Address Space Overview
Internet Mail Connector Overview

MS Mail Connector Overview


Type Column

Displays the type of address (such as X.400 or SMTP).


Address Column

Displays the address space for which the connector is responsible. Type an asterisk (*) to have the MTA send all SMTP mail to the IMC.


Cost Column

Defines the cost associated with the address space. Each address space cost is used to optimize outbound message routing but does not affect message reception. Routing costs range from 1 to 100. All mail is sent using the route with the lowest cost. If two or more routes are available with the same cost, the load placed on the routes is roughly equal.


Edit Button

Displays the properties dialog for the selected Internet Mail Connector. Use the dialog to modify addressing information.


Remove Button

Deletes the selected address.


New General

Adds a new general address for the remote system. Type the address type, full address information, and the routing cost.


New X.400

In the various address information boxes, type the required X.400 address information. For information and guidelines on X.400 address formats, see the Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning Guide.


New MS Mail

In the various address information boxes, type the required Microsoft Mail address information. For information and guidelines on Microsoft Mail address formats, see the Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning Guide.


New Internet

Adds an SMTP address to the address space. Type the domain name or IP address of the SMTP system this connector is responsible for.


Delivery Restrictions (Internet Mail Connector)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to accept or reject messages from any sender listed in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory. For example, if a message is addressed to a foreign system, it is returned to the sender if the sender's address is in the Reject messages from box or does not appear in the Accept messages from box. Delivery restrictions are optional and do not affect incoming messages. The default is to accept messages from all senders and reject messages from none.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify


Accept Messages From

A list of all senders from which this recipient will accept messages. Select All if you want this recipient to accept messages from all senders, or select List and choose Modify to specify a list of senders from which this recipient will accept messages.


Reject Messages From

A list of all senders from which this recipient will not accept messages. Select None if you want this recipient to accept messages from all senders, or select List, and choose Modify to specify a list of senders from which this recipient will reject messages.


Modify

Opens the Address Book so you can select one or more recipients from the organization to add to either the Accept Messages From or the Reject Messages From boxes.


Advanced (Internet Mail Connector)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to specify values for message parameters, message transfer times, and message transfer quota.

  Message Parameters

  Maximum Transfer Times (Min)

  Message Transfer Quota


Message Parameters

Unread limit (msgs)

Defines the maximum number of messages that can be queued in the Internet Mail Connector information store OUT folder. The MTA will not deliver any messages to the Internet Mail Connector when the number of messages in the Internet Mail Connector information store OUT folder exceeds this value.

Back-off interval (min)

The amount of time the MTA will wait before attempting to send more messages to the Internet Mail Connector information store OUT folder.

Max unread time (min)

The amount of time a message can be queued before it is returned to the sender as non-deliverable.


Maximum Transfer Times (Min)

Urgent message

Maximum number of minutes a message of high importance can be queued in the Internet Mail Connector information store folder before it is returned to the sender as non-deliverable.

Normal message

Maximum number of minutes a message of normal importance can be queued in the Internet Mail Connector information store folder before it is returned to the sender as non-deliverable.

Non-urgent message

Maximum number of minutes a message of low importance can be queued in the Internet Mail Connector information store folder before it is returned to the sender as non-deliverable.


Message Transfer Quota

No limit

The amount of data in the Internet Mail Connector information store OUT folder has no limit.

Quota (K)

Specifies the largest amount of combined data queued in the Internet Mail Connector information store OUT folder. The MTA will not deliver messages when this value is exceeded.


Connected Sites (Internet Mail Connector)

  Overview

Use the Connected Sites property page to ensure directory replication can take place and that other connectors in the organization can be accessed. Connected sites should list all sites that will receive mail through this Internet Mail Connector, regardless of direct or indirect connection to the connector. Knowledge of all other sites are inherited automatically through directory replication.

  Organization

  Site

  Routing Address

  Cost

  New

  Edit

  Remove


Organization

The directory name of the organization.


Site

The name of the site that will be connected.


Routing Address

The details of the address for the connected site.


Cost

A value associated with sending to this address, connector, or SMTP host. The default is 1. The number can be a number between 1 and 100.


Type

The type of address to use for encapsulation. This is an address type that is defined for recipients in the directory. An example of an address type is SMTP.


New

Displays a property sheet with General and Routing Address property pages so you can define a new connected site. In the General property page, specify the Organization and Site. In the Routing Address property page, specify the Type, Address, and Cost.


Edit

Displays a property sheet with General and Routing Address property pages so you can edit a selected connected site. In the General property page, specify the Organization and Site. In the Routing Address property page, specify the Type, Address, and Cost.


Remove

Removes the selected connected site.


MIME Types (Internet Mail Connector)

  Overview

Configures the MIME content-type and corresponding file extension mappings so that the Internet Mail Connector will automatically decode the contents of a MIME message.

  MIME Content Type

  Associated Extension

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button

  Move Up and Move Down Buttons


Remove Button

Removes the selected content type and its associated extension from the list.


Edit Button

Displays the Edit MIME Type dialog. Use the dialog to change the MIME content type and associated extension.


New Button

Displays the New MIME Type dialog. Use the dialog to specify a new MIME content type and its associated extension.


Associated Extension

Lists the extensions associated with the file types.


MIME Content Type

Lists MIME content types.

In MIME there are primary types, which describe the general content of a message, and subtypes, which describe the specific format of the file. The two types are separated by a forward slash, such as text/plain.


Move Up and Move Down Buttons

Moves the selected MIME Content Type up or down the list.

Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to specify the order of the MIME Content Types list for the Internet Mail Connector.


New/Edit MIME Type

Use the New MIME Type dialog to specify or select a MIME content type and its associated extension. Use the Edit MIME Type dialog to change a MIME content type and/or associated extension.

  MIME Content Type

  Associated Extension


Associated Extension

Type the extension that will be associated with the content type.


MIME Content Type

Lists the MIME content types you can select. You can also type a new MIME content type.

In MIME there are primary types, which describe the general content of a message, and subtypes, which describe the specific format of the file. The two types are separated by a forward slash, such as text/plain.


Queues (Internet Mail Connector)

  Overview

There are four queues for the Internet Mail Connector. When tracking outbound messages through the queues, remember that they go from the MTA queue to the Internet Mail Connector, to the Internet Mail Connector's MTS Out queue. The Internet Mail Connector converts the message and places it in the Out queue until the message is sent.

  Queue Name

  Destination Host

  Originator

  Submit Time

  Delivery

  Details Button

  Refresh Button

  Delete Button

  Retry Now Button


Queue Name

Displays the name of the queue you want to view and the number of items in the queue. The In queue holds incoming messages waiting to be converted by the connector, then delivered to the information store. The MTS Out queue holds Outgoing messages received from the MTA and waiting to be converted by the IMC. The Out queue holds outgoing messages waiting to be sent by the connector.


Destination Host

Name of the host server to which the message is being sent.


Originator

Name of the person who sent the message.


Submit Time

Time the message was sent.


Delivery Status

Indicates whether or not the delivery attempt was successful.


Details Button

Displays the Details dialog to view information about a queued message.


Refresh Button

Updates the display of all Internet Mail Connector queues.


Delete Button

Deletes those messages interfering with the processing of a queue. Deleted messages are permanently erased from the disk and a non-delivery report is sent to the originator.


Retry Now Button

Forces the Internet Mail Connector to attempt to transport the message.


Details

Use the Details dialog to view information about a queued message.

  Originator

  Recipients

  MTS-ID

  Message ID

  Destination Host

  Submit Time

  Size

  Delivery Status

  Next Retry Time

  Retries


Retries

Number of times the connector attempted to deliver the message.


Next Retry Time

Time scheduled for resending if previous attempts were unsuccessful.


Size

Size of the message in bytes.


Message ID

Identifies the message. For incoming mail, the Message ID is assigned by the connector.  On outgoing mail, it is assigned by the MTA.


Recipients

Lists the mailboxes to which the message was sent.


MTS-ID

Identifies the message system component that handled the mail. For outgoing Microsoft Exchange mail, it identifies the MTA.


Menu and Command Reference

Click any of the following menu option names for a list of all menu commands. For detailed information about a specific command, click the command name.


File Menu Options
File Menu

Connect to Server

Close

New Mailbox

New Distribution List

New Custom Recipient

New Other >

Server Monitor

Link Monitor

Recipients Container

MTA Transport Stack

X.400 Connector

Dynamic RAS Connector

Site Connector

Directory Replication Connector

Dirsync Requestor

Dirsync Server

Remote Dirsync Requestor

Information Store

Raw Object

Properties

Raw Properties

Duplicate

Exit


Edit Menu Options
Edit Menu

Undo

Cut

Copy

Paste

Delete

Delete Raw Object

Select All


View Menu Options
View Menu

Mailboxes

Distribution Lists

Custom Recipients

Public Folders

All

Hidden Recipients

Raw Directory

Columns

Sort by >

Display Name

Last Modified Date

Font

Move Splitbar

Status Bar


Tools Menu Options
Tools Menu

Directory Import

Directory Export

Extract Windows NT Account List

Extract NetWare Account List

Find Recipients

Move Mailbox

Clean Mailbox

Start Monitor

Track Message

Forms Administrator

Save Connections on Exit

Save Connections Now

Options


Window Menu Options
Window Menu

New Window

Cascade

Tile Horizontally

Tile Vertically

Arrange Icons

Refresh

Select Window


Help Menu Options
Help Menu

Microsoft Exchange Server Help Topics

Books Online

About Microsoft Exchange Administrator


File Menu

Use the commands on this menu to open and close connections to Microsoft Exchange Server computers, to create new recipients, monitors, and connectors, to duplicate objects, to view an object's properties, and to quit Microsoft Exchange Server. For more information, choose a command name.

Connect to Server

Close

New Mailbox

New Distribution List

New Custom Recipient

New Other >

Server Monitor

Link Monitor

Recipients Container

MTA Transport Stack

X.400 Connector

Dynamic RAS Connector

Site Connector

Directory Replication Connector

Dirsync Requestor

Dirsync Server

Remote Dirsync Requestor

Information Store

Raw Object

Properties

Raw Properties

Duplicate

Exit


Connect to Server Command (File Menu)

Specify the Microsoft Exchange Server computer to which you want to connect. To administer a site, you must connect to a server in that site.

Connecting to a server provides a view of the directory hierarchy from that server's perspective. You can view and modify the attributes of all directory objects within the site, provided you have sufficient permissions. In addition, you can view (but not modify) directory objects from other sites that replicate directory information to this site.

Connect to Server Dialog Box Options

  What server do you want to connect to?

  Browse Button

  Set As Default


What server do you want to connect to?

Type the name of the server to which you want to connect, or choose Browse to select a server.


Browse Button

Opens the Server Browser dialog box, where you can select any available server in your organization.


Set As Default

Select this option to automatically connect to the server shown in Connect To Which Server? each time you start Microsoft Exchange Administrator.


Close Command (File Menu)

Disconnects from a connected server. If you have connections to multiple servers, select the window for the connection you wish to close, and choose Close.


New Mailbox Command (File Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox.

Choosing New Mailbox opens the Mailbox property pages, where you can provide configuration information for the new mailbox.


See Also

Mailbox Overview


New Distribution List Command (File Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new distribution list.

Choosing the New Distribution List command opens the Distribution List property pages, where you can add or remove recipients from the distribution list and provide other configuration information.


See Also

Distribution List Overview


New Custom Recipient Command (File Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new custom recipient.

Choosing the New Custom Recipient command opens the New E-Mail Address dialog box, where you can select the type of address you want to create for this custom recipient.


See Also

Custom Recipient Overview


New Other Command (File Menu)

Lists a variety of commands for creating objects, including server and link monitors, recipients containers, X.400 connectors and transport stacks, dirsync requestors and servers, remote dirsync requestors, and site connectors.


New Server Monitor Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new server monitor, which monitors the status of Microsoft Exchange Server services running on one or more servers.

Choosing the New Server Monitor command opens the Server Monitor property pages, where you can provide configuration information for the new server monitor.


See Also

Server Monitor Overview


New Link Monitor Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new link monitor, which monitors the status of messaging links along any messaging path.

Choosing the New Link Monitor command opens the Link Monitor property pages, where you can provide configuration information for the new link monitor.


See Also

Link Monitor Overview


New Recipients Container Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new recipients container. Recipients containers hold message recipients. There can be numerous recipients containers in a site.

Choosing New Recipients Container opens the Recipients Container property pages, where can you provide configuration information for the new recipients container.


See Also

Recipients Container Overview


New MTA Transport Stack Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Installs an MTA transport stack on this server.

Before creating an X.400 or dynamic RAS connector, you must install the corresponding transport stack. For example, if you want to create an X.400 TP/4 connector, you must first install and configure a TP/4 stack.

Choosing New MTA Transport Stack opens the New MTA Transport Stack dialog where you can select the type of stack you want to install.


See Also

MTA Transport Stack Overview


New X.400 Connector Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new X.400 connector, which connects a site to other X.400 systems, or to other sites in your organization. Before creating an X.400 connector, you must install a corresponding MTA transport stack on any server in your site.

Choosing New X.400 Connector opens the New X.400 Connector dialog box, where you select the type of connector you want to create. You then configure the connector using the X.400 Connector property pages.


See Also

X.400 Connector Overview


New Dynamic RAS Connector Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new dynamic RAS connector, which connects two Microsoft Exchange Server sites over RAS.


See Also

Dynamic RAS Connector Overview


New Site Connector Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new site connector. A site connector connects two sites that are on the same local area network.


See Also

Site Connector Overview


New Directory Replication Connector Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new directory replication connector, which enables sharing of up-to-date directory information between Microsoft Exchange sites.


See Also

Directory Replication Connector Overview


New Dirsync Requestor Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new directory synchronization requestor.

Choosing the New Dirsync Requestor command opens the Dirsync Requestor property pages, where you provide configuration information for the new requestor.


See Also

Dirsync Requestor Overview


New Dirsync Server Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new dirsync server. A dirsync server is a component used in the process of exchanging directory information with systems that follow the MS Mail 3.x Dirsync protocol. It configures the DXA to send updated directory information to remote dirsync requestors.

Note  Once you create a dirsync server, you must create one remote dirsync requestor record for each dirsync requestor that will be using this dirsync server.

Choosing New Dirsync Server opens the Dirsync Server property pages, where you provide configuration information for the new server.


See Also

Dirsync Server Overview


New Remote Dirsync Requestor Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new remote dirsync requestor. A remote dirsync requestor is a component used in the process of exchanging directory information with systems that use the MS Mail 3.x Dirsync protocol. It defines a remote dirsync requestor record.

Note  The New Remote Dirsync Requestor command is disabled until you create a Microsoft Exchange Server dirsync server.


See Also

Remote Dirsync Requestor Overview


New Information Store Command (New Other Menu)

Creates a new public or private information store. The public information store holds all public folders and public folder replicas on a server and the information that they contain. The private information store holds all mailboxes on a server and the information, such as messages and attachments, that they contain.


Raw Object Command (New Other Menu)

Creates a new raw object.

Note  This command is only available when running the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program in raw mode. Use the /r command line switch to start the Administrator program in raw mode.


Properties Command (File Menu)

Displays the properties of the currently selected directory object.


Raw Properties Command (File Menu)

  See Also

Displays the raw properties of the currently selected directory object. Raw properties are the list of all schema attributes associated with a particular object.

Note  This command is only available when running the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program in raw mode. Use the /r command line switch to start the Administrator program in raw mode.


See Also

Command Line Switches


Duplicate Command (File Menu)

Duplicates the currently selected object. Choosing Duplicate creates a new object with the same properties as the selected object. Properties that are unique for every object (such as Display Name) are left blank and must be filled in.


Exit Command (File Menu)

Quits Microsoft Exchange Server and closes any open connections to Microsoft Exchange Server computers.

You can also quit Microsoft Exchange Server by:

Choosing Close on the application Control menu

Double-clicking the application Control-menu box.


Edit Menu

Use the commands on this menu to move, copy, delete, replace, and select text. For more information, choose a command name.

Undo

Cut

Copy

Paste

Delete

Delete Raw Object

Select All


Undo Command (Edit Menu)

Reverses the effects of the last move, copy, delete, or select action you performed. If you cannot reverse your last action, Undo is unavailable.


Cut Command (Edit Menu)

Moves selected text onto the Clipboard. Text that you cut or copy onto the Clipboard replaces the previous Clipboard contents.


Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copies selected text onto the Clipboard. Text that you copy onto the Clipboard replaces the previous Clipboard contents.


Paste Command (Edit Menu)

Inserts the Clipboard contents at the insertion point. If any text is selected, Paste replaces it with the contents of the Clipboard. If the Clipboard is empty or the selection cannot be replaced, Paste is not available.


Delete Command (Edit Menu)

Deletes the currently selected directory object.

Warning  Once you delete an object it can be recovered only by restoring directory and information store data from a previously made backup tape.


Delete Raw Object (Edit Menu)

Deletes the selected raw object.

Note  This command is only available when running the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program in raw mode. Use the /r command line switch to start the Administrator program in raw mode.


Select All Command (Edit Menu)

Selects all objects that appear on the right side of the Administrator window.


View Menu

Use the commands on this menu to change the way information is displayed in the Administrator window. For more information, choose a command name.

Mailboxes

Distribution Lists

Custom Recipients

Public Folders

All

Hidden Recipients

Raw Directory

Columns

Sort by >

Display Name

Last Modified Date

Font

Move Splitbar

Status Bar


Mailboxes Command (View Menu)

Changes the view of the currently selected Recipients container to show only mailboxes.

Note  This command is available only when a Recipients container is selected.


Distribution Lists Command (View Menu)

Changes the view of the currently selected Recipients container to show only distribution lists.

Note  This command is available only when a Recipients container is selected.


Custom Recipients Command (View Menu)

Changes the view of the currently selected Recipients container to show only custom recipients.

Note  This command is available only when a Recipients container is selected.


Public Folders Command (View Menu)

Changes the view of the currently selected Recipients container to show only public folders.

Note  This command is available only when a Recipients container is selected.


All Command (View Menu)

Changes the view of the currently selected Recipients container to show all recipient types (mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and public folders).

Note  This command is available only when a Recipients container is selected.


Hidden Recipients Command (View Menu)

Displays all hidden recipients in the currently selected Recipients container. Hidden recipients represent system objects that are used for configuration and replication purposes and do not normally appear in the directory.

Note  This command is available only when a Recipients container is selected.


Columns Command (View Menu)

Changes the columns of information that appear in the selected Recipients container.

Note  This command is available only when a Recipients container is selected.


Raw Directory Command (View Menu)

Changes the view of the left pane to a raw directory.

Note  This command is only available when running the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program in raw mode. Use the /r command line switch to start the Administrator program in raw mode.


Sort By Command (View Menu)

Lists the sorting options for directory objects that appear on the right side of the Administrator window.

You can sort by:

Display name

Date the object was last modified

Choose the sort option you want.


Display Name Command (Sort By Menu)

Sorts directory objects that appear on the right side of the Administrator window alphabetically by display name.


Last Modified Date Command (Sort By Menu)

Sorts directory objects that appear on the right side of the Administrator window chronologically by when they were last modified.


Font Command (View Menu)

Changes the display font used in the Administrator window. Font opens the standard Font dialog box, which lets you choose a font type, style, and size.


Move Splitbar Command (View Menu)

Moves the split bar, which divides the left side of the Administrator window from the right side.

  You can click the split bar and drag it to the left or right.


Status Bar Command (View Menu)

Displays or hides the status bar at the bottom of the window.

When the status bar is displayed, Status Bar is checked on the View menu.

The status bar displays the following information:

Information about a selected command.

Progress indicators when some action is taking place, such as connecting to a server.

The box on the right end of the status bar displays the total number of directory objects in the currently selected container.


Tools Menu

Provides access to tools that let you perform a variety of administrative tasks. For more information, choose a command name.

Directory Import

Directory Export

Extract Windows NT Account List

Extract NetWare Account List

Find Recipients

Move Mailbox

Clean Mailbox

Start Monitor

Track Message

Forms Administrator

Save Connections on Exit

Save Connections Now

Options


Directory Import Command (Tools Menu)

  See Also

Creates or modifies directory objects based on the contents of a text file.

You can use Directory Import to:

Import directory information from another e-mail system.

Add or change personal information (such as phone number and mailbox space quotas) to existing mailboxes and custom recipients.

Create distribution lists and populate them with members.

Modify directory attributes of all services in a site.

Directory Import Dialog Box Options

  Windows NT Domain

  MS Exchange Server

  Container Button

  Recipient Template/Recipient Button

  Import File/File Button

  Account Creation Options

  Logging Level Options

  Separators Button

  Multivalued Properties


See Also

Command Line Directory Import Utility


Windows NT Domain

Select the Windows NT domain where new accounts will be created. This applies if you select Create Windows NT Account under Account Creation Options.


MS Exchange Server

Select the Microsoft Exchange Server computer in this site where you want to import directory information.


Container Button

Displays the Recipient container where directory information will be imported.

Choose Select to open the Containers dialog box where you can specify the recipient container you want.


Recipient Template Button

Displays the template mailbox, distribution list, or custom recipient to copy for all new recipients of the same type that are imported.

Choose Recipient to open the Address Book where you can select a recipient.


Import File Button

Shows the path and filename of the import file that contains the information you are importing.

Choose File to specify the path and filename for the import file.


Account Creation Options

Select options for creating or deleting Windows NT accounts during directory import:

Create Windows NT Account creates a Windows NT account for each mailbox that is created. Accounts are created in the domain specified under Security domain.

Generate Random Password creates a random password for each newly created Windows NT account. Passwords are written to the BIMPORT.PSW file in the working directory of the Administrator program and must be distributed to users before they can log on to Windows NT.

Delete Windows NT Account deletes the Windows NT accounts associated with all mailboxes you are deleting.


Logging Level Options

Select an option to determine the extent of logging for directory import:

None  Record only the start and finish of an import operation.

Low  Only log errors occurring while importing an object.

High  Record all errors, warnings and informational messages.


Separators Button

Opens the Separators dialog box where you can specify the characters used as separators in the import file.


Multivalued Properties

Select Append if imported data in a multivalued property should be added to existing data. Select Overwrite if imported data in a multivalued property should replace any existing data.


Directory Export Command (Tools Menu)

  See Also

Writes information about mailboxes, custom recipients, and distribution lists to a text file.

You can use Directory Export to:

Export directory information to another e-mail system.

Create a text file of all properties for mailboxes, custom recipients, or distribution lists.

Create a text file that can be used by Directory Import to import directory information.

  MS Exchange Server

  Home Server

  Export File Button

  Container Button

  Include Subcontainers

  Export Objects Options

  Logging Level Options

  Separators Button

  Character Set

  Include Hidden Objects

  Export Button


See Also

Command Line Directory Export Utility


MS Exchange Server

Select the Microsoft Exchange Server computer from which the export will be run.


Home Server

Select the Microsoft Exchange server containing the data you want to export.


Export File Button

Displays the Directory Export File dialog. Use the dialog to specify the file name for the exported directory information.


Container Button

Displays the Directory Export Container dialog. Use the dialog to select the recipients container containing the recipient objects to be exported.


Include Subcontainers

Includes the recipient objects in the subcontainers of the specified Recipients container.


Export Objects Options

Select the recipient objects to be exported (mailbox, custom recipient, or distribution list).


Separators Button

Displays the Separators dialog. Use the dialog to specify the separators to be used in the exported file. Separators distinguish column, quote, and property types of information in the file.


Character Set

Specifies which character set to use when creating the export file.


Export Button

Starts the export process. Directory Export exports the information you selected to the file you specified.


Include Hidden Objects

Includes hidden recipient objects.


Extract Windows NT Account List Command (Tools Menu)

Selectively copies account information for existing LAN manager and Windows NT users. You can then use Directory Import to import this information into Microsoft Exchange Server and create mailboxes.

Note  To use Extract Windows NT Account List, you must have a Windows NT Server. You must be logged on to the Windows NT Server as a user or as an administrator and know the name of the primary or backup domain controllers.


Extract NetWare Account List Command (Tools Menu)

Selectively copies account information for existing NetWare users. You can then use Directory Import to import this information into Microsoft Exchange Server and create mailboxes.

Note  To use Extract NetWare Account List, you must have a NetWare 3.x or 4.x server running bindery emulation. You also need a NetWare account and password that has supervisor rights to the server.


Find Recipients Command (Tools Menu)

Displays the Find Recipients dialog box, where you search for recipients by specifying a container, personal information, or defining custom attributes.


Move Mailbox Command (Tools Menu)

Moves a mailbox to another server within a site. Any time you move a user, you must edit their profile to point to the new server.

Note When moving mailboxes to a new server, the size of the mailbox contents on the destination server may increase. This is because individual copies of single-instance messages are created for each moved mailbox in the private information store on the destination server.

Move Mailbox Dialog Box Options

  Move Mailbox To


Move Mailbox To

Choose the destination server from the list of servers in your site where you want to move the selected mailbox.


Clean Mailbox Command (Tools Menu)

Deletes messages from the selected mailbox based on a variety of criteria that you can set.

You can choose to delete messages permanently or move them to the Deleted Items folder.


Start Monitor Command (Tools Menu)

  See Also

Starts the selected link monitor or server monitor.


See Also

Link Monitor Overview

Server Monitor Overview


Track Message Command (Tools Menu)

  See Also

Opens the Select Message To Track dialog box where you can select a message to track based on a variety of criteria. Once you isolate a specific message, you can open the Message Tracking Center window where you can view routing and delivery information about the message.


See Also

Messages Tracking Events


Forms Administrator Command (Tools Menu)

Displays the Organization Forms Library Administrator dialog box, where you create various forms to meet specific needs.


Save Connections on Exit Command (Tools Menu)

Saves all connections to Microsoft Exchange Server computers that are open when you quit the Administrator program.

The next time you start the Administrator program, these connections will be reestablished.


Save Connections Now Command (Tools Menu)

Saves all connections to Microsoft Exchange Server computers that are open when you choose this command.

The next time you start the Administrator program, these connections will be reestablished.


Options Command (Tools Menu)

Sets default auto naming options and permissions options.


Window Menu

Controls the arrangement and appearance of windows and lets you switch between open windows. For more information, choose a command name.

New Window

Cascade

Tile Horizontally

Tile Vertically

Arrange Icons

Refresh

Select Window


New Window Command (Window Menu)

Opens a new window.

If an Administrator window is currently selected, a new Administrator window with a connection to the same server is opened.

If a Message Tracking Center window is currently selected, a new Message Tracking Center window is opened. You can connect to any server.


Cascade Command (Window Menu)

Arranges all open windows so that they overlap. The title bar of each window remains visible, making it easy for you to select any window.


Tile Horizontally Command (Window Menu)

Arranges all open windows without overlap so that each window is wider than it is long.


Tile Vertically Command (Window Menu)

Arranges all open windows without overlap so that each window is longer than it is wide.


Arrange Icons Command (Window Menu)

Arranges icons (reduced windows) so that they line up neatly and do not overlap.


Refresh Command (Window Menu)

Updates the active Administrator window with current directory information.


Select Window (Window Menu)

A list of open windows is displayed at the bottom of the Window menu. When you choose an open window, you make it active. A check mark appears in front of the name of the active window.


Help Menu

Displays Microsoft Exchange Server online documentation. For more information, choose a command name.

Microsoft Exchange Server Help Topics

Books Online

About Microsoft Exchange Server


Contents Command (Help Menu)

Displays the Help Contents for Microsoft Exchange Server.

The Contents screen displays the categories of Help available. To see all of the procedure topics, click Expand.

To display an alphabetical list of all of the topics and definitions in the online documentation for Microsoft Exchange Server, choose Index.


Search for Help On Command (Help Menu)

Searches Help for information you want. Type or select keywords for the information you want, and a list of available Help topics appears.

Search Dialog Box Options

Keyword List

Type or select the keyword that describes the information you want to find. The keyword list automatically scrolls as you type letters in the box.

Show Topics

Displays the Help topics that contain the information you want to search for.

Go To

Select the topic you want, and then choose Go To to display that topic.


Microsoft Exchange Server Help Topics (Help Menu)

Displays the Help Finder window. The Help Finder window contains three tabbed pages that provide access to all topics in the Microsoft Exchange Server Help system.

Contents

Displays a graphical outline of Help topics.

Index

Displays an alphabetical index of Help topics.

Find

Provides access to full-text search capabilities.

Note  For more information on using the Help Finder window, open the window and press F1.


Books Online Command (Help Menu)

Provides access to an online version of the complete Microsoft Exchange Server documentation.


About Microsoft Exchange Server Command (Help Menu)

Displays information about your copy of Microsoft Exchange Server, including the version number, and the copyright, legal, and licensing notices.


Control Menu

Adjusts the appearance of windows in Microsoft Exchange Server. For more information, choose a command name.

Restore Command

Move Command

Size Command

Minimize Command

Maximize Command

Close Command

Switch To Command


Restore Command (Control Menu)

  See Also

Returns the active window to the previous size and location (before you maximized or minimized the it).

You can also restore a window by clicking Restore in the upper-right corner of the window when it is maximized or by double-clicking the title bar.

  Restore button

To restore a minimized window, click the icon and choose Restore, or double-click the icon.


See Also

Minimize Command (Control Menus)

Maximize Command (Control Menus)


Move Command (Control Menu)

Moves the active window or dialog box. When you choose Move, the insertion point becomes a four-headed arrow. Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the window. When the window is in the location you want, press ENTER.

This command is unavailable if you maximize a window.

You can also move a window that is not maximized or an open dialog box by dragging the title bar.


Size Command (Control Menu)

  See Also

Changes the size of the active window. When you choose Size, the insertion point becomes a four-headed arrow. Use the arrow key on the keyboard to select the corresponding border you want to size. For example, use the right arrow key to resize the right border. When the window is the size you want, press ENTER.

This command is unavailable if you maximize a window.

You can also size a window that is not maximized by dragging one of the window's borders or one of its four corners. When you position the insertion point over one of the window's borders, the insertion point becomes a 2-headed arrow, at which point you can drag the window until it is the size you want.


See Also

Minimize Command (Control Menus)

Maximize Command (Control Menus)


Minimize Command (Control Menu)

  See Also

Reduces the active window to an icon.

You can also reduce a window to an icon by clicking Minimize in the upper-right corner of the window.

  Minimize button

To restore a minimized window, click the icon and choose Restore, or double-click the icon.


See Also

Maximize Command (Control Menus)

Size Command (Control Menus)


Maximize Command (Control Menu)

  See Also

Enlarges the active window to fill the screen.

  Maximize button

You can also maximize the active window by clicking Maximize in the upper-right corner of the window, or by double-clicking the title bar.


See Also

Minimize Command (Control Menus)

Size Command (Control Menus)


Close Command (Control Menu)

Closes the active window or an open dialog box. If you try to close a message in composition, Microsoft Exchange suggests that you save the unsent message before you close it. If you close a message without saving it, you lose any information that you have typed.

The Close command on the Control menu closes Microsoft Exchange, but leaves other messaging applications running. You can also do this by choosing Exit from the File menu in Microsoft Exchange.

To close the active window, you can also choose Close on the File menu in Microsoft Exchange.

You can also close a window by double-clicking the Control-menu box in the upper-left corner of the window.

To quit Microsoft Exchange and sign out of all messaging applications, choose Exit And Log Off from the File menu in Microsoft Exchange.


Switch To Command (Control Menu)

Displays a list of all open applications so that you can switch to or close any application in the list. You can also display the list by pressing CTRL+ESC or by double-clicking a blank area on your desktop.

Task List Dialog Box Options

Task List

Select the application you want to switch to or close.

New Task

Type or select an additional task.

Run

Runs the selected application or new task.

Switch To

Activates the selected application.

End Task

Closes the selected application.

Cascade

Arranges open windows so they are equally sized and overlapping with all title bars visible. Minimized windows and icons are arranged across the bottom of your desktop.

Tile

Arranges open windows so that they do not overlap. Minimized windows and icons are arranged across the bottom of your desktop.

Arrange Icons

Arranges the icons for all minimized windows across the bottom of your desktop.


Next Command (Control Menu)

When you have more than one window open, switches to the next window.


Previous Command (Control Menu)

When you have more than one window open, switches to the previous window.


General (Monitors Container)

  Overview

Use the General property page to change the display name (up to 256 characters) which appears in the Administrator window.


Permissions (Monitors Container)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this monitor. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this monitor. Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, Service Account Admin, View Only Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for monitor permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this monitor.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this monitor.
Delete	Delete objects.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this monitor.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


 General (Server Monitor)

  Overview

Use the General property page to specify a server monitor configuration and display name, to indicate whether a log file should be kept that contains a record of the monitor's activity, and to set the interval at which sites are polled for their status.

  Directory Name

  Display Name

  Log File

  Browse Button

  Normal Polling Interval

  Critical Sites Polling Interval


Directory Name

The name (up to 64 characters) that uniquely identifies this monitor.


Display Name

Type a name (up to 256 characters). This name appears in the Administrator window.


Log File

The name of the file where the log, status information, and resulting notifications will be kept.


Browse Button

Specify a path and filename for a log file. If no path and filename are specified, a log file is not created.

Tip  The log file will be easy to find from anywhere on the network if the path to the log file is in Universal Naming Convention. For example: \\servername\c$\sm_berk.log


Normal Polling Interval

Type the default polling interval which indicates how often the monitor will check services running on the servers.


Critical Sites Polling Interval

Type the polling interval, which indicates how often the monitor will check services on servers that are in warning or alert state. An alert state occurs when one or more server components are down.


Permissions (Server Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this monitor. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this monitor. Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, Service Account Admin, View Only Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for monitor permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this monitor.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this monitor.
Delete	Delete objects.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this monitor.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Notification (Server Monitor)

  Overview    [image]  See Also

You use the Notification property page to specify how to notify administrators when a server is in a warning or alert state. A warning state (indicating a possible problem ) occurs when a ping message fails to return within the bounce duration that you set for warning status. An alert state (indicating a serious problem) occurs when a ping message fails to return within the bounce duration you set for an alert status. Notification can be in the form of messages, network alerts, and notification applications, such as a pager program.

You can also set up an escalation path. This is a time-ordered list of people to notify. For example, the primary support person can be notified immediately when the monitor enters a warning state. The secondary people that need to be notified can have a longer time delay or not be notified until the monitor enters an alert state.

  When

  How

  Who

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


See Also

Escalation Editor


When

Indicates how long after a server goes into alert or warning state that the notification occurs.

The symbols on the left indicate if the notification is for an alert (red down arrow) or warning (exclamation point), if the status is unknown (a question mark), or if the status is normal (up arrow).


How

Indicates the type of notification event that occurs. For example, you can specify that a message be sent to the administrator.


Who

Indicates where the notification is sent. For example, if you choose Mail Message as the notification type, you must specify the recipient's mailbox to which the notification is sent.


New Button

Displays the New Notification dialog box, in which you add a notification event to the list. Select an event and choose OK to open its associated Escalation Editor dialog box, in which you specify the type of the notification event and when it should occur.


Edit Button

Opens the associated Escalation Editor dialog box, where you edit the selected notification event.


Remove Button

Removes the selected notification event from the list.


Servers (Server Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Servers property page to specify the servers to be monitored.

  Servers

  Monitored Servers

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Site

  Services Button


Site

Displays the site currently selected. Click the down arrow to display all the sites in your organization.


Servers

Lists all servers in the currently selected site (Site field). Select the servers that you want to monitor and click Add.


Monitored Servers

Lists all servers being monitored by this monitor.


Add Button

Adds the selected server to the list of monitored servers.


Remove Button

Removes the selected server from the list of monitored servers.


Services Button

Displays the Services property page in which you specify the services on this server that will be checked by a server monitor.


Actions (Server Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Actions property page to specify the escalation actions that this monitor takes when a service is not running. When these actions occur is determined by the Critical Sites Polling Interval you set in the General property page. The escalation actions you specify are used for all servers being monitored. If you want to specify a different set of escalation actions for different servers, you must create multiple server monitors. Escalation actions and notification events (set in the Notification property page) are independent of each other. You can configure notification to occur before, during, or after escalation actions.

  First Attempt

  Second Attempt

  Subsequent Attempts

  Restart Delay (Seconds)

  Restart Message


First Attempt

The action that will be taken the first time a monitored server is polled and found to be in a warning or alert state. Select one of the following options:

Take No Action if the server monitor should notify you only of a failed service.

Restart Service if the server monitor should attempt to restart the missing service.

Restart Computer if the server monitor should attempt to restart the computer with the missing service.

Caution  Restarting the computer can interfere with other non-Microsoft Exchange Server services. If any of the monitored servers should not be restarted, do not use the Restart Computer option.


Second Attempt

The action that will be taken the second time a monitored server is polled and found to be in a warning or alert state. Select one of the following options:

Take No Action if the server monitor should notify you only of a failed service.

Restart Service if the server monitor should attempt to restart the missing service.

Restart Computer if the server monitor should attempt to restart the computer with the missing service.

Caution  Restarting the computer can interfere with other non-Microsoft Exchange Server services. If any of the monitored servers should not be restarted, do not use the Restart Computer option.


Subsequent Attempts

Select the action that will be taken on the third and all subsequent times that a monitored server is polled and found to be in a warning or alert state.

Note  The action that you specify here will occur continuously at intervals determined by the Critical Sites Polling Interval (set on the General property page). Make sure that the interval you specify allows sufficient time for the escalation action to occur. For example, if a server takes 5 minutes to start and you select Restart Computer as the escalation action, be sure that the Critical Sites Polling Interval is set to more than 5 minutes.

Select one of the following options:

Take No Action if the server monitor should only notify you of a failed service.

Restart Service if the server monitor should attempt to restart the missing service.

Restart Computer if the server monitor should attempt to restart the computer with the missing service.

Caution  Restarting the computer can interfere with other non-Microsoft Exchange Server services. If any of the monitored servers should not be restarted, do not use the Restart Computer option.


Restart Delay (Seconds)

If you selected Restart Computer as one of the escalation actions, type a delay (in seconds) in the Restart Delay box, before the computer is shut down. This delay gives those using a Microsoft Exchange Server computer as a workstation time to save their work.


Restart Message

If you selected Restart Computer as one of the escalation actions, in the Restart Message box, type the message that you want to appear in the Restart Warning message box on the server to be restarted.


Clock (Server Monitor)

  Overview

You use the Clock property page to cause an alert if a monitored server's internal clock is off by more than a specified number of seconds. You can also specify that the clocks of the monitored servers are synchronized with the monitoring computer's clock. Synchronization uses the time zone information in Windows NT so that monitors can function correctly with servers in other time zones.

  Warning if off by more than

  Alert if off by more than

  Synchronize


Warning If Off By More Than

Type the minimum number of seconds that the two clocks can differ before a warning notification occurs.


Alert If Off By More Than

Type the minimum number of seconds that the two clocks can differ before an alert notification occurs.


Synchronize

Clear these check boxes if you do not want the clocks of monitored servers to be synchronized with the monitoring computer's clock.


Actions (Monitored Server)

Use this property page to stop, start, pause, and continue service on any component or connector. The status is shown in real time and the display is updated for each RPC interval.

  Services

  Version

  Status

  Start Button

  Stop Button

  Pause Button

  Continue Button


Services

Lists the components and connectors monitored.


Version

Lists the version of the service, if known.


Status

Lists the current status as determined by its response to the monitor's RPC call.


Start Button

Starts a stopped service.


Stop Button

Stops a running service.


Pause Button

Temporarily stops a running service.


Continue Button

Restarts a paused service.


Clock (Monitored Server)

Displays measurement results and time zone information.

  Measurement Results

  Time Zone Information


Measurement Results

Last Reported Time.  The time on the server's clock when the last monitored check occurred.

Clock Offset.  The difference between the time of the clocks on the server that's being monitored versus on the server that's running the server monitor.


Time Zone Information

Bias.  The difference between the server clock time and GMT.

Daylight Savings Time.  This box is selected when an adjustment is made for Daylight Savings Time.

Standard Name.  Name of the standard local time for the server being monitored.

Change On.  Day when the standard local time changes to Daylight Savings Time, or when Daylight Savings Time changes to standard local time.

Daylight Name.  Name of the alternate local time for Daylight Savings Time.


Notification (Monitored Server)

Sets the instructions for notifying people in the organization when a monitored server component does not respond to the RPC.

  Who

  When

  How


Who

The person, mailbox, or computer notified.


When

The time that the notice was sent.


How

The method used for notification. The options are launch a process, send a mail message, or display a Windows NT alert.


Maintenance Status (Monitored Server)

Displays the maintenance status, who made the last modification, and when it was made.

  Current Maintenance Status

  Last Modification


Current Maintenance Status

Notifications Suspended. Indicates if notifications are stopped during maintenance mode.

Repairs Suspended. Indicates if repairs are stopped during maintenance mode.


Last Modification

Time.  Shows the time of the last modification.

Modified By.  Shows the name of the last person to make a modification.


General (Link Monitor)

  Overview

Use the General property page to specify a link monitor configuration and display name, to indicate whether a log file should record the monitor's activity, and to set the interval at which sites are polled for their status.

  Directory Name

  Display Name

  Log File

  Browse Button

  Normal Polling Interval

  Critical Sites Polling Interval


Browse Button

Specify a path and filename for a log file. If no path and filename are specified, a log file is not created.

Tip  The log file will be easy to find from anywhere on the network if the path to the log file is in Universal Naming Convention. For example: \\servername\c$\lm_berk.log


Normal Polling Interval

Type the default polling interval, which indicates how often this link monitor sends ping messages to the servers and foreign systems.


Critical Sites Polling Interval

Type the polling interval, which indicates how often the monitor will check services on servers  in warning or alert state. Warning and alert states occur when a ping message fails to return in the length of time you specify on the Bounce property page.


Permissions (Link Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this monitor. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this monitor. Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, Service Account Admin, View Only Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for monitor permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this monitor.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this monitor.
Delete	Delete objects.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this monitor.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Notification (Link Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Notification property page to specify how to notify administrators when a server is in a warning or alert state. A warning state (indicating a possible problem) occurs when a ping message fails to return in the amount of time specified for Warning Level in the Bounce property page. An alert state (indicating a serious problem) occurs when a ping message fails to return in the amount of time specified for Alert Level in the Bounce property page. Notification can be in the form of messages, network alerts, and notification applications, such as a pager program.

You can also set up an escalation path. This is a time-ordered list of people to notify. For example, the primary support person can be notified immediately when the monitor enters a warning state. The secondary people that need to be notified can have a longer time delay or not be notified until the monitor enters an alert state.

  When

  How

  Who

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Servers (Link Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Servers property page to specify which servers are to be monitored.

  Servers

  Monitored Servers

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Site


Recipients (Link Monitor)

  Overview

You use the Recipients property page to configure a link monitor to check connections to other organizations or foreign systems. You do this by specifying the recipient in the other organization or foreign system that will receive ping messages sent by this link monitor. Recipients in other organizations or foreign systems are represented as custom recipients in Microsoft Exchange Server.

You can specify real recipients and have an automated program reply to the ping messages. You can also specify addresses that are not valid. The foreign system returns all ping messages as having non-valid recipients. For example, on a Lotus cc:Mail system, you can configure a monitor to send messages to NULL/NULL, a non-valid address. All messages sent to this address are moved across the gateway, rejected as not valid by cc:Mail, and returned to Microsoft Exchange Server addressed to the sender.

  Message Subject Returned From

  Message Subject Or Body Returned From

  None

  List

  Modify Button


Message Subject Returned From

Lists recipients in other sites and foreign systems that will receive ping messages that you know are deliverable. The original subject can appear in either the Subject field or the message body.


Message Subject Or Body Returned From

Lists recipients in other sites and foreign systems that will receive ping messages and have an automated program reply that will return the message with the original subject in the Subject field.


None

Choose None to include no recipients in the list.


List

Choose List to include a specific set of recipients in the list. Choose Modify to pick the recipients that will be included in the list.


Modify Button

Opens the Address Book where you can select one or more recipients.


Bounce (Link Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Bounce property page to configure the warning and alert durations for each monitor. One set of durations is used for all recipients and servers monitored by this link monitor. You can create multiple link monitors if the monitored servers and foreign systems have different bounce durations. A bounce duration is the longest acceptable round-trip time for a message to travel between the monitor's home server and another Microsoft Exchange Server computer or foreign system. You determine the value based on tests that you have performed previously.

  Enter Warning State After

  Enter Alert State After


Enter Warning State After

Type a value, and select a unit of time from the list. If the round-trip time for a ping message exceeds this value, the connection between servers is considered to be in a warning state. When a server or foreign system is in a warning state, it is polled at intervals determined by the Critical Sites Polling Interval set on the General property page. In addition, the notification events you set on the Notification property page are initiated.


Enter Alert State After

Type a value, and select a unit of time from the drop-down list. If the round-trip time for a ping message exceeds this value, the connection between servers is considered to be in an alert state. When a server or foreign system is in an alert state, it is polled at intervals determined by the Critical Sites Polling Interval set on the General property page. In addition, the notification events you set on the Notification property page are initiated.


General (Monitored Link)

Allows you to examine the delay at each step in the link.

  Last Received Bounce Mail

  Pending Request


Last Received Bounce Mail

Request Sent.  Time the ping message was submitted to the information store on the sending server.

Request Received.  Time the ping message was received by the information store on the destination server.

Reply Sent.  Time the system attendant on the destination server submitted the ping message to the information store on that server.

Reply Received.  The time the link monitor received a reply to the ping message.

Request Time.  The elapsed time between Request Sent and Request Received.

Turnaround Time.  The elapsed time between Request Received and Reply Sent.  This includes the processing time of the system attendant on the destination server.

Reply Time.  The elapsed time between Reply Sent and Reply Received. This includes MTA transport time on both servers.

Total Time.  The elapsed time between Request Sent and Reply Received.


Pending Request

The date and time of all ping messages sent but not yet returned.


Notification (Monitored Link)

Use the Notification property page to see who has been notified (and how) when the round-trip time for a ping message to return exceeds the bounce threshold for a monitored link.

This page is read-only; it cannot be edited. Once the Notification property page is displayed, it is not updated. To see current notifications, close and reopen the property page.

  When

  Who

  How


When

The time the notice was sent.


Who

The method used for notification. The options are to launch a process, send a mail message, or display a Windows NT alert.


How

The person, mailbox, or computer notified.


Maintenance Status (Monitored Link)

Use the Maintenance Status property page to determine if the ping message is late because the destination server is down for scheduled maintenance.

Sometimes the link monitor may miss the maintenance status message. This can happen if the link monitor does not send a ping message while the server is replying with a maintenance status message.

  Current Maintenance Status

  Last Modification


Current Maintenance Status

Notifications Suspended.  Indicates if notifications are stopped during maintenance mode.

Repairs Suspended.  Indicates if repairs are stopped during maintenance mode.


Last Modification

Time.  Shows the time of the last modification.

Modified By.  Shows the name of the last person to make a modification.


Select Message To Track

You can find a message using a variety of criteria, and then track it through your network. When you find the message you want to track, select it and choose OK to open the Message Tracking Center window.

Find messages containing:

  From

  Sent To

  Find Now Button

  Search On Server

  Browse

  Look Back __ Days

  Start Date

  Message Display Area

  Cancel


From

Opens the shared address book list. Select an address from the list to search for messages from that address.

If this field is blank, Track Message searches for all messages to the recipients in the Sent To field, but either the From or Sent To fields must be filled in.

Note:  You cannot select names from your personal address book here. To do that, choose Cancel and use Advanced Search in the Message Tracking Center window.


Sent To

Opens the Select One or More Recipients list, which displays all shared address books. Select a mailbox from the list. Track Message searches for all messages sent to that mailbox.

If this field is left blank, Track Message searches for all messages from the originator in the From field, but either the From or Sent To fields must be filled in.

Note  You cannot select names from your personal address book. To search for a name that is not in a shared address book, choose Cancel and choose Advanced Search in the Message Tracking Center window.


Find Now Button

Activates the search for messages that meet all the criteria in the Find Messages Containing fields. When the search is complete, the messages found are displayed in the window.


Search On Server

Displays the server that will be searched for the message.

The default is the home server of the mailbox in the From field. To change the server, choose Browse.

Note  When searching for a message, Track Message limits its search to the logs of one server. When tracking, it reads the logs of any server that handled the message.


Browse

Opens the Server Browser, in which you can select the server that you want to search.


Look Back __ Days

Type the number of prior daily logs to search. If 0, it searches only today's log. 0 is the default.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT, so you may have to look back an extra day to get all of a day's log in local time.


Start Date

The date of the first tracking log that will be searched. The Start Date changes to match the Look Back __ Days field.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT, so you may have to look back an extra day to get all of a day's log in local time.


Message Display Area

When you choose Find Now, messages that meet all of the criteria in the Find Messages Containing fields are displayed here.

Select a message a choose OK. The Message Tracking Center window appears so you can track the message.

Option	Description
Icon	Represents the type of message tracking event.
Time	The date and time that the message was sent. Displayed in time local to the Administration program.
Size	Message size in bytes.
No. recp. (number of recipients)	The number of mailboxes to which the message was sent. A distribution list counts as one recipient.
Recipients	Displays the first mailbox in the recipients list. Choose Properties to see the entire list.
Note   Each line in the display represents a startup mail-handling event for a message. The same message may appear in more than one event. It doesn't matter which instance you select, since the message is tracked, not the event.


Cancel

Closes this window without selecting a message and goes to the Message Tracking Center window.


Select Message to Track

Search for a message by its message ID.

  Search on server

  Browse Button

  Message ID

  Look back days

  Start date


Search on server

Displays the server that will be searched for the message.

The default is the server you are logged on to. To change the server, choose Browse.

Note  When searching for a message, Track Message limits its search to the logs of one server. When tracking, it reads the logs of any server that handled the message.


Browse Button

Opens the Server Browser, in which you can select the server that you want to search.


Message ID

Type a message ID in this field or use Ctrl-V to paste one.

Message ID is a unique identifier for Microsoft Exchange Server messages that stays with the message from its origination to delivery or transfer to a gateway. It includes the site and server of the originator and the time it was sent.


Look Back __ Days

Type the number of prior daily logs to search. If 0, it searches only today's log. 0 is the default.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT, so you may have to look back an extra day to get all of a day's log in local time.


Start Date

The date of the first tracking log that will be searched. The Start Date changes to match the Look Back __ Days field.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT, so you may have to look back an extra day to get all a day's log in local time.


Advanced Search

Use Advanced Search to:

Search for a message by its message ID.

Search for a message sent from outside the network

Search for a message to or from mailboxes that do not appear in a shared address book.

  Sent by Microsoft Exchange Server

  Transferred into This Site

  By Message ID


Sent by Microsoft Exchange Server

Select this option to search for messages from Microsoft Exchange Server components like the System Attendant, MTA, or directory.


Transferred into This Site

Select this option to search for messages received from a connector or gateway, or messages from mailboxes that are not in any shared address book.


By Message ID

Select this option to search for a message by its Message ID.

Message ID is a unique identifier for Microsoft Exchange messages that stays with the message from its origination to delivery or transfer to a gateway. It includes the site and server of the originator and the time it was sent.

Tip  The Message ID is in the properties page for the message. To find it in the Microsoft Exchange Client:

1.	Select the message from a client folder, like Sent Items or Inbox.

2.	From the File menu, choose Properties.

3.	Select the Message ID tab.

Message IDs can also be found in event log detail and log files of utilities.


Message Tracking Center

Use this window to search for messages to track and to activate tracking. When tracking is complete, the message track is displayed in the tracking history window. You can select any event in the track and get more detailed information.

  Message ID

  Originator

  Start on server

  Start date

  Search button

  Advanced Search button

  Track Button

  Find Recipient in Tracking History button

  Properties button

  Tracking history window


Message ID

The message ID of the message selected for tracking.

To change the Message ID, choose Advanced Search, which will track a different message.

Message ID is a unique identifier for Microsoft Exchange Server messages that stays with the message from its origination to delivery or transfer to a gateway. It includes the site and server of the originator and the time it was sent.


Originator

The mailbox that sent the message.

To search for messages from a different originator, choose Search.


Start on server

The message trace begins from the log of this server. Select Message to Track found an event in the server's tracking log indicating that the message was sent from or entered the network through this server.


Start date

The date that the search begins. According to the tracking log, this is the date that the selected message was sent or entered the network.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT.


Search button

Opens the Select Message to Track window so that you can search for a message.


Advanced Search button

Opens the Advanced Search dialog. Use Advanced Search to:

Search for a message by its Message ID.

Search for a message sent from outside the network.

Search for a message from a Microsoft Exchange Server component.


Track Button

Activates message tracking for the selected message. When the search is complete, it displays the message tracking events found for the message in the Tracking History window.


Find Recipient in Tracking History button

Finds events involving a recipient that you specify and displays them in bold type.


Properties button

Displays details of the event selected.


Tracking history window

Displays message tracking events in a hierarchy. Each line represents one event and each level represents a branch in the message path, some of which are concurrent.


Message Tracking Events

These record each step in the process of handling mail messages. The events are generated by Microsoft Exchange Server components (the MTA, information store, MS Mail Connector and Internet Mail Connector).

Event Type	Description
Message transfer in	The message was received from a server, connector or gateway.
Report transfer in	A delivery receipt or non-delivery report was received from a server, connector or gateway.
Message submission	The message was sent by the client.
Message transfer out	The message was sent to a server, connector, or gateway.
Report transfer out	A delivery receipt or non-delivery report was sent to a server, connector, or gateway.
Message delivered	The message was delivered to a mailbox or public folder.
Report delivered	A delivery receipt or non-delivery report was delivered to a mailbox.
Distribution list expansion	A recipient distribution list was expanded so the message could be sent to different servers.
Message redirected	The message was sent to a mailbox other than those of the recipients.
Message rerouted	The message was routed to an alternate path.
Report absorption	The number of delivery receipts or non-delivery reports exceeded a threshold and the messages were deleted.
Report generation	A delivery receipt or non-delivery report was created.
Unroutable report discarded	A delivery receipt or non-delivery report could not be routed and was deleted from the queue.
Local Delivery	The sender and recipient are on the same server.
Backbone transfer in	Mail was received from another MAPI system across a connector or gateway.
Backbone transfer out	Mail was sent to another MAPI system across a connector or gateway.
Gateway transfer out	The message was sent through a gateway.
Gateway transfer in	The message was received from a gateway.
Gateway report transfer in	A delivery receipt or non-delivery report was received from a gateway.
Gateway report transfer out	A delivery receipt or non-delivery report was sent through a gateway.
Gateway report generation	A gateway generated a non-delivery report for a message.


Connect to Server

Type the name of a server or choose Browse to select the server from a list.

If you usually connect to the same server, select the server, then select Set as default. In the future, the Connect to Server box displays the default server name.


Distribution List Expansion

Displays detailed information about the expansion of a distribution list.

Event type	Describes the message tracking event.
From	The distinguished name of the originator, if known, or the known address.
Time	The time that the distribution list was expanded is displayed in time local to the Administrator program.
DL Name	The name of the distribution list that was expanded.
Size	Message size, in bytes.
Priority	The importance level assigned to the message by the originator.


Gateway Message Transfer

Displays detailed information about mail messages sent to and received from non-Exchange systems.

Event type	Describes the message tracking event.
From	The address of the originator.
Time	The time that the mail message was sent from or received by the connector is displayed in time local to the Administrator program.
Transferred to	The connector that transported the message to or from the gateway.
Remote ID	The unique identifier assigned by the gateway service.
Size	Message size, in bytes.
Priority	The importance level assigned to the message by the originator.
Recipients List	Displays all addresses to which the message was sent.


Gateway Report Generation

Displays detailed information about delivery receipts and non-delivery reports sent to and received from non-Exchange systems. Some of the information concerns the report and some describes the message that is the subject of the report.

Event type	Describes the message tracking event.
From	The address of the message originator.
Time	The time that the report was sent from or received by the connector is displayed in time local to the Administrator program.
Transferred to	The connector that transported the report to or from the gateway.
Remote ID	The unique identifier assigned to the report by the gateway service.
Subject ID	The unique identifier assigned to the message by Microsoft Exchange Server.
Gateway	The remote non-Exchange network that sent or received the report.
Size	Size of the report, in bytes.
Priority	The importance level assigned to the report by its originator.
Recipients List	Displays all addresses to which the subject message was sent.
Delivery info	The status of attempts to deliver the subject message to each recipient.


Message Type

Displays detailed information about mail message handling within the network.

Event type	Describes the message tracking event.
From	The distinguished name of the originator.
Time	The time that the mail message was sent or received is displayed in time local to the Administrator program.
Transferred to	The Microsoft Exchange Server component that generated this event.
Size	Message size, in bytes.
Priority	The importance level assigned to the message by the originator.
Recipients List	Displays all addresses to which the message was sent.


Report Generation

Displays detailed information about delivery receipts and non-delivery reports handled by the network. Some of the information concerns the report and some describes the message that is the subject of the report.

Event type	Describes the message tracking event.
From	The address of the message originator.
Time	The time that the report was sent from or received by the network is displayed in time local to the Administrator program.
Transferred to	The Microsoft Exchange Server component that generated this event.
Report MTSID	The Microsoft Exchange Server message ID of the report.
Size	Size of the report, in bytes.
Priority	The importance level assigned to the report message by the originator.
Recipients List	Displays all addresses to which the message was sent.
Delivery info	The status of attempts to deliver the message to each recipient.


Message Rerouted

Displays detailed information about messages sent to recipients other than those in the recipient list.

Event type	Describes the message tracking event.
Time	The time this event was generated is displayed in time local to the Administrator program.
Old MTA name	The MTA in original recipient's server.
New MTA name	The MTA in the current recipient's server.


Select System Message to Track

Search for a message from a Microsoft Exchange Server component:

  Directory service

  Information store

  System attendant (including NDRs, delivery receipts, and ping messages).

  Directory synchronization

When you find the message, select it and choose OK . This opens the Message Tracking Center window in which you start message tracking and view a trace of the message through your network.

  Search on server

  Browse Button

  Find Now Button

  From

  Look back __ days

  Start date

  System message list

  Properties Button


Search on server

Displays the server that will be searched for the message.

The default is the server with the selected connector. To change the server, choose Browse.

Note  When searching for a message, Track Message limits its search to the logs of one server. When tracking, it reads the logs of any server that handled the message.


Browse Button

Opens the Server Browser where you can select the server that you want to search.


Find Now Button

Activates the search for messages that meet all the criteria in the Find Messages Containing fields. When the search is complete, the messages found are displayed in the window.


From

Select a Microsoft Exchange Server component from the list to search for messages sent from the component.

Note   You must select a component for this field. It cannot be left blank.


Look back __ days

Type the number of prior daily logs to search. If 0, it searches only today's log. 0 is the default.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT, so you may have to look back an extra day to get all of a day's log in local time.


Start Date

The date of the first tracking log that will be searched. The Start Date changes to match the Look Back __ Days field.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT, so you may have to look back an extra day to get all of a day's log in local time.


System Message Display Area

When you choose Find Now, messages that meet all of the criteria in the Find Messages Containing fields are displayed here.

Select a message and choose OK. The Message Tracking Center window appears so you can track the message.

Option	Description
Icon	Represents the type of tracking events.
Time	The date and time the message was sent is displayed in time local to the Administration program.
Size	Message size in bytes.
No. recp. (number of recipients)	The number of mailboxes to which the message was sent. A distribution list counts as one recipient.
Recipients	Displays the first mailbox in the recipients list. Choose Properties to see the entire list.


Properties Button

Displays details of the event selected.


Select Inbound Message to Track

Search for a message transferred to Microsoft Exchange Server from a connector or gateway. When you find the message, select it and choose OK. This opens the Message Tracking Center window where you start message tracking and view a trace of the message through your network.

  From

  Sent To

  Find Now Button

  Transferred from

  Look back days

  Search on server

  Browse Button

  Inbound messages list

  Properties Button


From

Type an e-mail address in the field or choose From to choose from a shared address book. It will search for all messages from this address.

Type the address in the format for the gateway. For example:

SMTP:agobi@ferguson.com


Sent To

Type an e-mail address in the field or choose Sent To to choose from a shared address book. It will search for all messages to this address.

Type the address in the format for the gateway. For example:

SMTP:agobi@ferguson.com


Find Now Button

Activates the search for messages that meet all the criteria in the Find Messages Containing fields. When the search is complete, the messages found are displayed in the window.


Transferred from

Select from the list of installed connectors to search for messages from that gateway.

Track Messages searches the log of the server with that connector.


Look back days

Type the number of prior daily logs to search. If 0, it searches only today's log. 0 is the default.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT, so you may have to look back an extra day to get all of a day's log in local time.


Search on server

Displays the server that will be searched for the message.

The default is the server with the selected connector. To change the server, choose Browse.

Note  When searching for a message, Track Message limits its search to the logs of one server. When tracking, it reads the logs of any server that handled the message.


Browse Button

Opens the Server Browser where you can select the server that you want to search.


Inbound messages list

When you choose Find Now, messages that meet all of the criteria in the Find Messages Containing fields are displayed here.

Select a message and choose OK. The Message Tracking Center window appears so you can track the message.

Option	Description
Icon	Represents the type of  tracking events.
Time	The date and time the message was sent is displayed in time local to the Administration program.
Size	Message size in bytes
No. recp. (number of recipients)	The number of mailboxes to which the message was sent. A distribution list counts as one recipient.
Recipients	Displays the first mailbox in the recipients list. Choose Properties to see the entire list.
Note  Each line in the display represents an entry event for a message. The same message may appear in more than one event. It doesn't matter which instance you select since the message is tracked, not the event.


Properties Button

Displays details of the event selected.


Interchange (Microsoft Mail Connector)

  Overview

Use the Interchange property page to configure how messages are moved and translated between Microsoft Exchange Server and the Connector postoffice. You can also use the Interchange property page to configure the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA when connecting to an MS Mail (AppleTalk) server.

  Administrator's Mailbox

  Primary Language For Clients

  Maximize MS Mail 3.x Compatibility

  Enable Message Tracking

  MS Mail Connector (AppleTalk) MTA/Configure Button


 Administrator's Mailbox

The recipient in your organization that will receive Microsoft Mail Connector administrative messages.

Choose the Change button to open the Address Book. From the Address Book you can select a recipient to act as the administrator. The recipient can be a mailbox, public folder, distribution list, or custom recipient.


Primary Language For Clients

The primary language used for the Microsoft Exchange clients. This is for interoperability with MS Mail 3.x clients that use a different language. Select the language that the majority of your clients use. The default is the language being used by Microsoft Exchange Server.


Maximize MS Mail 3.x Compatibility

Creates two versions of each OLE object (up to 1 megabyte each) to support previous versions of OLE when transferring messages between Microsoft Exchange Server and MS Mail 3.x.

Note   Selecting this option increases the total message size. If this option is not selected, MS Mail 3.x users cannot view or save embedded objects sent from Microsoft Exchange clients.


Enable Message Tracking

Tracks messages through the connector for troubleshooting. When message tracking is enabled, each component that handles mail records its activities in a log maintained by the system attendant on each server. The log becomes a trace of the processing of each mail message as each component receives, processes, and delivers the mail to the next component. The mail tracking log is stored in \EXCHSRVR\TRACKING.LOG.


MS Mail Connector (AppleTalk) MTA

Configures the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA to move and translate messages from the Connector postoffice to MS Mail (AppleTalk). Choose the Configure button to set Microsoft Mail Connector (AppleTalk) MTA options.


Local Postoffice (Microsoft Mail Connector)

  Overview

Use the Local Postoffice property page to modify details about the Microsoft Mail Connector postoffice. This information is used when setting up message routing and service from MS Mail (PC).

  Network

  Postoffice

  Sign-on ID

  Sign-on Password

  Regenerate Button


Network

The MS Mail (PC) network name of the Microsoft Mail Connector postoffice. The default name is based on the Microsoft Exchange Server organization name.

Note  Changing the network or postoffice names causes regeneration of the MS e-mail address used in this site. Changing the network or postoffice name after message transfer has started causes messages that were in transit during the change to be returned. Verify that routing information for MS Mail postoffices, gateways, External programs, and other connections to this site reflect any changes you make.


Postoffice

The MS Mail postoffice name of the Microsoft Mail Connector postoffice. The default name is based on the Microsoft Exchange Server site name.

Note  Changing the network or postoffice names causes regeneration of the MS e-mail address used in this site. Changing the network or postoffice name after message transfer has started causes messages that were in transit during the change to be returned. Verify that routing information for MS Mail postoffices, gateways, External programs, and other connections to this site reflect any changes you make.


Sign-on ID

The serial number identifier (in the format XX-XXXXX) of the Connector postoffice. This ID number is assigned during installation and cannot be changed.

A sign-on ID is required for an external MS Mail postoffice that has been specified as a direct route type and connected via an asynchronous or X.25 connection.


Sign-on Password

The password (up to 8 characters) required to connect to the Microsoft Mail Connector postoffice.

A sign-on password is required for an external MS Mail postoffice that has been specified as a direct route type and connected via an asynchronous or X.25 connection.


Regenerate Button

Any change to network or postoffice names causes regeneration of the MS e-mail address for this site. Changing the network or postoffice name after message transfer has started causes messages that were in transit during the change to be returned. You must also stop, reconfigure, and restart all MS Mail gateways, External programs, and other connectors in the same site to include any changes.


Connections (Microsoft Mail Connector)

  Overview

Use the Connections property page to configure connections to MS Mail postoffices.

  Create

  Modify

  Delete

  Queue

  Confirm Before Connection Changes Are Applied


Create

Sets up a new LAN, asynchronous, X.25, or indirect connection to an MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

Note  The Create Connection dialog box changes to reflect the connection type you select in the Connection Parameters box.


Modify

Displays a Modify Connection dialog box for the selected connection.

Note  This dialog box varies according to the type of connection you select.


Delete

Removes the selected connection.

Note  This button is unavailable if there are indirect connections to other postoffices through a selected direct connection.


Queue

Displays a dialog box that shows all messages waiting to be transferred from the selected connection. You can also return or delete messages waiting to be transferred.


Confirm Before Connection Changes Are Applied

If this box is selected, a confirmation message will be displayed before changes become permanent.


Connector MTAs (Microsoft Mail Connector)

  Overview

Use the Connector MTAs property page to create and configure Microsoft Mail Connector (PC) MTAs to provide message transfer services.

  New Button

  Configure Button

  Delete Button

  Log Status Button

When a Connector (PC) MTA has been created, you can add and remove service to LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffices and edit LAN and X.25 connection parameters.

  Edit Button

  List Button


New Button

Creates a new instance of the Connector (PC) MTA.

Note   You can create as many instances as necessary to perform message transfer. To optimize performance, you should generally create a separate instance of the Connector (PC) MTA to service each group of postoffices based on the type of connection used, such as LAN, asynchronous, or X.25.

However, if you have a small number of LAN-connected MS Mail postoffices you want to service compared to asynchronous or X.25-connected MS Mail postoffices, you can set up an asynchronous or X.25 Connector (PC) MTA and then add the LAN-connected postoffices to the list of postoffices serviced by that Connector (PC) MTA.


Configure Button

Opens the Configure MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Instance dialog box and displays the selected Connector (PC) MTA.


Delete Button

Removes the selected instance of the Connector (PC) MTA.

Important  Deleting a Connector (PC) MTA immediately stops message transfer to serviced postoffices and deletes all messages in transit through the specified instance of the Connector (PC) MTA.


Log Status Button

Records the current status of the selected Connector (PC) MTA instance in the Windows NT application event log.


Edit Button

Opens the Edit LAN or X.25 Connection Parameters dialog box. This button is unavailable if the selected postoffice is connected by asynchronous transport.

Tip  To change the network or postoffice name, change the connection path or X.121 address, or to set options for asynchronous connections, use the Connections property page.


List Button

Displays the Serviced LAN Postoffices dialog box, which lists LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffices serviced (and available for service) by the selected Connector (PC) MTA.

Note  When configuring an asynchronous (Async and LAN) MTA service, all asynchronous MS Mail (PC) postoffice connections are automatically serviced by this MTA service. Similarly, when configuring an X.25 (X.25 and LAN) MTA service, all X.25 connections are automatically serviced by this MTA service. However, you can add and remove service to LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffices from any instance of the Connector (PC) MTA.


MS Mail Connector (AppleTalk) MTA

Use the MS Mail Connector (AppleTalk) MTA Options dialog box to enable and configure the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA service settings.

  Set Status

  Startup

Note  To use the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA, you must also set up the Microsoft Exchange Connection gateway on the MS Mail (AppleTalk) server. Windows NT services for Macintosh network software must be installed and running on the Microsoft Exchange Server computer. Also, the Connector postoffice must be created as a Macintosh-accessible volume for both the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA and the Microsoft Exchange Connection gateway to function correctly.


Set Status

Specifies whether the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA is active.

Note  When the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA is enabled, it is registered as a Windows NT service and displayed in the Connections property page. You can use the Connections property page to view message queues destined for MS Mail (AppleTalk). However, you can modify the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA only in this dialog box.


Startup

Specifies whether the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA starts automatically when this Microsoft Exchange Server computer is started or is manually started using the Control Panel or Server Manager.


Microsoft Exchange Connection Gateway

A gateway program for MS Mail (AppleTalk) servers. The gateway exchanges information with Microsoft Exchange Server through the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA. This program is available on a Macintosh formatted floppy disk supplied with Microsoft Exchange Server. For more information, see the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator's Guide.


Create Connection (LAN)

Use the Create Connection dialog box to set up routing to a LAN-connected postoffice. When setting up this connection, some boxes are unavailable for manual changes.

  Network

  Postoffice

  Connection Parameters

  Postoffice Path Change Button

  Connection Attempts

  Upload Routing Button

Tip  To create an asynchronous, X.25, or indirect connection, select the appropriate option button in the Connection Parameters box.


Postoffice Path Change Button

Displays the Postoffice Path dialog box. This path specifies the location of an MS Mail (PC) postoffice on the same LAN.


Connection Attempts

The number of times (1 to 99) to attempt to deliver messages before returning them as nondeliverable.


Upload Routing Button

Retrieves routing information about indirect postoffices from this LAN-connected postoffice. You can display the information in the Downstream Postoffices Summary dialog box.

Note  If the routing information retrieved from the LAN-connected postoffice matches the indirect connection information shown in the Connections property page (there are no changes to be made to the Microsoft Mail Connector routing information), the Downstream Postoffices Summary dialog box is not displayed.


Postoffice Path

Use the Postoffice Path dialog box to specify the network location of a MS Mail (PC) postoffice on the same local area network (LAN).

  Path

  Connect As

  Password


Path

The network path to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

Note  Before attempting a connection to a NetWare server, your Windows NT server must be running the Gateway Service for NetWare. When typing a network path to a NetWare server, use the uniform naming convention (UNC) format (\\servername\sharename\path for a Windows NT server or \\servername\volumename\path for a NetWare server).


Connect As

The network logon name used when connecting to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Password

The network logon password used when connecting to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Downstream Postoffices Summary

Displays a list of any indirect postoffices connected to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice. You can include any of the postoffices listed to be indirectly connected to the Microsoft Mail Connector.

  Action Column

  Postoffice Column

  Messages Column


Action Column

Displays proposed changes to the Microsoft Mail Connector routing information in the Connections property page.


Postoffice Column

Displays the network and postoffice name of each downstream postoffice retrieved from the directly-connected postoffice.


Messages Column

Displays messages waiting to be transferred.


Create Connection (Asynchronous)

Use the Create Connection dialog box to set up routing to an asynchronously connected postoffice.

  Network

  Postoffice

  Sign-on ID

  Password

  Connection Attempts

  Phone Number

  Options Button

Tip  To create a LAN, X.25, or indirect connection, select the appropriate option button in the Connection Parameters box.


Network

The network name (up to 10 characters) of the MS Mail (PC) postoffice. This can be found by using the MS Mail Administrator program (Config Password command).


Postoffice

The postoffice name (up to 10 characters) of the MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Sign-on ID

The serial number identifier (in the format XX-XXXXX) of the remote MS Mail (PC) postoffice. This can be found by using the MS Mail Administrator program (Config Password command).


Password

The password used to log on to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Connection Attempts

The number of times (0 to 99) to attempt to connect to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Phone Number

The phone number of the MS Mail External program that receives and distributes messages at the remote MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Options Button

Set message transfer options for individual postoffices over an asynchronous or X.25 connection in the Connection Options dialog box.


Create Connection (X.25)

Use the Create Connection dialog box to set up routing to an X.25-connected postoffice.

  Network

  Postoffice

  Sign-on ID

  Password

  Connection Attempts

  X.121 Address

  Options Button

Tip  To create a LAN, asynchronous, or indirect connection, select the appropriate option button in the Connection Parameters box.


X.121 Address

The address (up to 16 hexadecimal characters) of the MS Mail External program that receives and distributes messages at the remote MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Connection Options

Use the Connection Options dialog box to set message transfer options for individual postoffices over an asynchronous or X.25 connection.

  Maximum Message Size

  Failed Connection Retry Interval For Urgent Mail

  Failed Connection Retry Interval For Normal Mail

  Dial Every

  Allow Mail Reception After Sending

  Return Registered Mail Confirmation


Maximum Message Size

The maximum size (0 to 9999 kilobytes) of messages to be transferred to this postoffice. This setting includes message body and attachments but excludes routing information appended to each message.


Failed Connection Retry Interval For Urgent Mail

The length of time (1 to 999 minutes) to wait before attempting to reestablish a failed connection when urgent messages are queued for transfer.


Failed Connection Retry Interval For Normal Mail

The length of time (1 to 999 minutes) to wait before attempting to reestablish a failed connection when normal messages are queued for transfer.


Dial Every

The interval (1 to 999 minutes) between regular calls to transfer messages.


Allow Mail Reception After Sending

Permits two-way message transfer during the same call.


Return Registered Mail Confirmation

Automatically sends confirmation receipts when registered mail is received at the Connector postoffice. This option is selected by default.


Create Connection (Indirect)

Use the Create Connection dialog box to set up routing to an indirectly connected MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

  Network

  Postoffice

  Indirect Via

Tip  You can also set up indirect connections by retrieving routing information from a LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffice using the Update Routing option in the Create Connection (LAN) dialog box. To create a LAN, asynchronous, or X.25 connection, select the appropriate option button in the Connection Parameters box.


Indirect Via

An existing directly-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffice through which messages for the indirect MS Mail (PC) postoffice are routed.


Messages Queued for __ (MS Mail (PC) Postoffice)

Use this dialog box to view, return, or delete messages waiting to be transferred to the selected MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

  From Column

  Subject Column

  Message ID Column

  Date/Time Column

  Refresh Button

  Delete Button

  Return Button

  Send Non-Delivery Reports When Messages Deleted


From Column

Displays the sender of the message.


Subject Column

Displays the subject of the message.


Message ID Column

Displays the identification number of the message.


Date/Time Column

Displays the date and time that the message arrived in the queue.


Refresh Button

Updates the display to reflect the current queue status.


Delete Button

Deletes the selected message from the queue.


Return Button

Returns the selected message and removes it from the queue.


Send Non-Delivery Reports When Messages Deleted

Sends a notice to the originator of a message if it is removed or deleted from the queue.


New/Configure MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Service

Use the New MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Service dialog box to set up an instance of the Connector (PC) MTA to service LAN-connected postoffices.

  Service Name

  Sent At Serviced Postoffices

  Received At Serviced Postoffices

  Update Configuration Every __ Minutes

  Check For Mail Every __ Minutes

  Options Button

  Connection Parameters


Service Name

A unique name for this Connector (PC) MTA. This name is used to identify and register this instance as a Windows NT service.


Sent At Serviced Postoffices

Records incoming message events in the Windows NT application event log. This option is selected by default.


Received At Serviced Postoffices

Records outgoing message events in the Windows NT application event log. This option is selected by default.


Update Configuration Every

The interval (0 to 999 minutes) between checks for updated configuration information.


Check For Mail Every

The interval (0 to 999 minutes) between checks for mail coming to the Connector postoffice.


Options Button

Displays the MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Options dialog box to set service and message transfer options.


Connection Parameters

The connection transport type (or types) over which this instance of the Connector (PC) MTA service connects to MS Mail (PC) postoffices.


New MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Service (Async and LAN)

Use the New MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Service dialog box to set up an instance of the Connector (PC) MTA to service LAN and asynchronously-connected and LAN-connected postoffices.

  Service Name

  Sent At Serviced Postoffices

  Received At Serviced Postoffices

  Update Configuration Every __ Minutes

  Check For Mail Every __ Minutes

  Options Button

  Connection Parameters

  Communications Port

  Modem Script

  Modem Timeout

  Communications Mode

Note  Settings that are specific to asynchronous communications are not visible until Async and LAN is selected in the Communication Parameters box.


Communications Port

A communications port (COM 1 to 256) or the name of an additional port for which you have loaded a device driver.

Note  If you use a port other than COM1-4, you should not specify a port in the modem script.


Modem Script

A file used to specify the modem configuration for connection to MS Mail (PC) postoffices. The default is DEFAULT.SCR.

Note  If you want to use a script you have written and compiled, it must be placed in the ..\EXCHANGE\CONNECT\MSMCON\MAILDATA\GLB directory.


Modem Timeout

The amount of time (0 to 999 seconds) to wait for valid communications to be established after dialing a phone number.


Communications Mode

Determines the directional transport of messages serviced by this MTA instance.


New MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Service (X.25 and LAN)

Use the New MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Instance dialog box to set up an instance of the Connector (PC) MTA to service LAN and X.25-connected postoffices.

  Service Name

  Log Messages Sent At Serviced Postoffices

  Log Messages Received At Serviced Postoffices

  Update Configuration Every __ Minutes

  Check For Mail Every __ Minutes

  Options Button

  Connection Parameters

  X.121 Address

  Port Number

  Listen User Data

  Listen User Facilities

Note  Settings that are specific to X.25 communications are not visible until X.25 and LAN is selected in the Communication Parameters box.


X.121 Address

The local X.121 address (up to 16 hexadecimal characters) of the Connector (PC) MTA.


Port Number

The X.25 adapter port number (0 to 255) to use for message transport.


Listen User Data

The listen user data information (up to 255 hexadecimal characters) specified by the local X.25 service provider.


Listen User Facilities

The listen user facilities information (up to 218 hexadecimal characters) specified by the local X.25 service provider.


MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Options

Use the MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Options dialog box to set service and message transfer options for the selected Connector (PC) MTA instance.

  Maximum LAN Message Size

  Close Postoffice If __ (KB) Free

  Open Postoffice If __ (KB) Free

  NetBIOS Notification

  Disable Mailer

  Disable Mail Dispatch

  Startup


Maximum LAN Message Size

The maximum size (0 to 999,999 kilobytes) of messages that can be transferred to and from a LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


 Close Postoffice If __ (KB) Free

The minimum amount of disk space (0 to 999,999,999 kilobytes) required on a destination postoffice for message transfer to be performed.

If the available space on a MS Mail (PC) postoffice drops below this amount, it is marked as unavailable and message transfer stops.


 Open Postoffice If __ (KB) Free

The minimum amount of disk space (0 to 999,999,999 kilobytes) required on a destination postoffice to restore it to an available state after being marked unavailable.

If the available space on a closed MS Mail (PC) postoffice rises above this amount, it is marked as available and message transfer resumes.


 NetBIOS Notification

Notifies MS Mail users about new mail delivered to MS Mail (PC) postoffices on the same LAN using NetBIOS.


 Disable Mailer

Prevents this instance of the Connector (PC) MTA from distributing messages to recipient mailboxes on LAN-connected MS Mail postoffices.


 Disable Mail Dispatch

Prevents this instance of the connector MTA from processing directory synchronization messages on LAN-connected MS Mail postoffices.


 Startup

Specifies whether this instance of the Connector (PC) MTA starts automatically when this Microsoft Exchange Server computer is started or is manually started using the Control Panel or Server Manager.


Serviced LAN Postoffices

Use this dialog box to add and remove service to available LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffices.

Add Button  Adds service to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice selected in the Available LAN Postoffices box.

Remove Button  Removes service to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice selected in the Serviced LAN Postoffices box.

Note  Every Connector (PC) MTA can service LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffices, However, to optimize performance, you should create a separate instance of the Connector (PC) MTA to service a group of postoffices based on the type of connection used, such as LAN, asynchronous, or X.25.


Edit LAN Parameters

Use the Edit LAN Parameters dialog box to modify connection and service options to the selected LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

Account Name  The logon name used when connecting to the remote MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

Password  The password used when connecting to the remote MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

Do Not Pick Up Mail At This Postoffice  Prevents two-way message transfer during the same connection.

Note  To change the network or postoffice name or to change the connection path, use the Connections property page.


Edit X.25 Parameters

Use the Edit X.25 Parameters dialog box to modify connection and service options to the selected X.25-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

Call User Data  Data transfer information required to establish a connection specified by the remote MS Mail (PC) postoffice's X.25 service provider.

Call User Facilities  Communication information required to establish a connection specified by the remote MS Mail (PC) postoffice's X.25 service provider.

Note  To change the network or postoffice name or to change the X.121 address, use the Connections property page.


Corrections Summary

Use the Corrections Summary property page to view errors that have been detected in the registry and accept or reject proposed corrections.

  Object Name Column

  Attribute Column

  Reset Value Column

  Current Value Column


Object Name Column

The Microsoft Mail Connector component, such as connector interchange or Connector (PC) MTA, for which a non-valid value was found in the registry.


Attribute Name Column

The connector component attribute, such as code page, for which a non-valid value was found in the registry.


Reset Value Column

A proposed correction to replace the non-valid value found in the registry.


Current Value Column

The invalid attribute value that was found in the registry.


Apply Changes Now

Use the Microsoft Mail Connector confirmation dialog box to verify that you want new changes to postoffice connection information applied now.

OK  Applies connection changes.

Cancel  Discards all new connection changes.


<Unable to locate page title>


Visual Guide

Click any container or object in the directory hierarchy depicted below for more information.


Add-Ins Container


  Add-Ins Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Add-Ins Container

The Add-Ins container holds optional third-party services that don't require a mailbox.  Other optional services include Directory exchange, PC interchange, and AppleTalk interchange.

Use the following property pages to configure the Add-Ins container:

General

Permissions


Addressing Container


  Addressing Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container

The Addressing container holds the following directory objects:

E-Mail Address Generators let you automatically generate e-mail addresses.

Details Templates let you customize the appearance and functionality of dialog boxes.

One-Off Address Templates let you customize the appearance and functionality of dialog boxes that let you create one-off e-mail addresses.

Use the following property pages to configure the Addressing container:

General

Permissions


  E-Mail Address Generators Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ E-Mail Address Generators Container

The E-Mail Address Generators container holds the following e-mail address generators, which automatically generate e-mail addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server recipients:

Internet e-mail generator: generates Internet e-mail addresses.

MS Mail e-mail generator: generates MS Mail e-mail addresses.

X.400 e-mail generator: generates X.400 e-mail addresses.

Use the following property pages to configure the E-Mail Address Generators container:

General

Permissions


  E-Mail Address Generator

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ E-Mail Address Generators Container\ E-Mail Address Generator

You configure e-mail address generators to automatically generate Internet, MS Mail, and X.400 addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server recipients.

Use the following property pages to configure an e-mail address generator:

General

Permissions


  Details Templates Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ Details Templates Container

The Details Templates container holds various Details Templates Language containers for various foreign languages. Details templates let you customize dialog boxes.

Use the following property pages to configure the Details Templates container:

General

Permissions


  Details Templates Language Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ Details Templates Container\ Language Container

The Details Templates Language container holds details templates in various languages (such as US/English, German, and Japanese). Details templates let you customize various dialog boxes.

Use the following property pages to configure the Details Templates Language container:

General

Permissions


  Details Template

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ Details Templates Container\ Language Container\ Details Template

Details templates let you customize various dialog boxes.

Use the following property pages to configure a details template:

General

Permissions

Templates

MS DOS Templates


  One-Off Address Templates Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ One-Off Address Templates Container

The One-Off Address Templates container holds various One-off Address Templates containers, which contain one-off address templates in various languages. One-off address templates let you customize the Microsoft Exchange Client dialog boxes that prompt you for one-off e-mail address information.

Use the following property pages to configure the One-Off Address Templates container:

General

Permissions


  One-Off Address Templates Language Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ One-Off Address Templates Container\ Language Container

The One-Off Address Templates Language container holds one-off address templates in various languages (such as US/English, German, and Japanese). One-off address templates let you customize the Microsoft Exchange Client dialog boxes that prompt you for one-off e-mail address information.

Use the following property pages to configure the One-Off Address Templates Languages container:

General

Permissions


  One-Off Address Template

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ One-Off Address Templates Container\ Language Container\ One-Off Address Template

One-off address templates let you customize the Microsoft Exchange Client dialog boxes that prompt you for one-off address information.

Use the following property pages to configure a one-off address template:

General

Permissions

Templates

MS DOS Templates


  Directory Synchronization

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ Directory Synchronization

When you configure a directory synchronization server or requestor in the local site, one server is selected to run each synchronization process. By default, the server selected is the one to which you are currently connected. (Check the Administrator window for the server name.) The directory synchronization object on the selected server imports and exports information during directory synchronization. The default settings for the directory synchronization object allow both server and requestor functions to be performed without making any changes.

Use the following property pages to configure the directory synchronization object:

General

Permissions

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Incoming Templates

Outgoing Templates

Diagnostics Logging


  Dirsync Requestor

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ Dirsync Requestor

The dirsync requestor periodically queries the Microsoft Exchange Server directory for changes to recipient information. When Microsoft Exchange Server recipients are added, deleted, or modified, the directory synchronization component sends (according to schedule) updates to the MS Mail directory server postoffice. The component also requests address updates from the MS Mail directory server postoffice.

Use the following property pages to configure a dirsync requestor:

General

Permissions

Import Containers

Export Containers

Settings

Schedule


  Dirsync Server

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ Dirsync Server

A dirsync server processes incoming updates from one or more directory requestors and incorporates the updates into the directory as custom recipient objects. It also sends updates on recipients in response to update requests from a directory requestor postoffice. You can configure only one directory synchronization server in a site to service all requestors.

Note  You can create only one dirsync server per site. Once you create a dirsync server, you must create at least one remote dirsync requestor.

Use the following property pages to configure a dirsync server:

General

Permissions

Schedule


  Remote Dirsync Requestor

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ Dirsync Server\ Remote Dirsync Requestor

Remote directory synchronization requestors are internal representations of dirsync requestors that use a Microsoft Exchange Server dirsync server. This internal information is used to authenticate and respond to requestors during directory synchronization.

Each dirsync requestor to a dirsync server must be defined in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory as a remote dirsync requestor. To set up a remote dirsync requestor, you perform the following tasks:

Create a custom recipient that specifies the address of the remote dirsync requestor (done automatically for MS Mail 3.x requestors).

Define a remote dirsync requestor object in the directory.

Configure permissions and decide which directory containers to use when importing and exporting address information from the remote dirsync requestor.

When you have completed the above tasks, you should verify that the dirsync requestor is correctly configured on each system and that each system can communicate with the Microsoft Exchange Server (through the MS Mail Connector or other connection).

Use the following property pages to configure a remote dirsync requestor:

General

Permissions

Import Containers

Export Containers


  Internet Mail Connector

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ Internet Mail Connector

The Internet Mail Connector is the SMTP server component of the Microsoft Exchange Server. It provides message transfer and translation between a Microsoft Exchange Server computer and SMTP messaging systems, such as the Internet. You can also use an Internet Mail Connector to connect to foreign X.400 systems or to connect Microsoft Exchange Server sites not on the same local area network (LAN).

Use the following property pages to configure the Internet Mail Connector:

General

Permissions

Connected Sites

Connections

Address Space

Delivery Restrictions

Advanced

Diagnostics Logging

Internet Mail

Queues

MIME Types


Monitors Container


  Monitors Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Monitors Container

The Monitors container holds the monitoring tools, including server monitors and link monitors, that let you regulate your servers and connections, and troubleshoot and resolve various messaging problems.

Use the following property pages to configure the Monitors container:

General

Permissions


  Server Monitor

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Monitors Container\ Server Monitor

Server monitors track the condition of servers in a site. Notification occurs if a service fails to start or shuts down, if clients cannot connect to the server, or if the server is not on the network. Server monitors can also restart computers or services and synchronize the clocks.

Use the following property pages to configure server monitors:

General

Permissions

Notification

Servers

Actions

Clock


  Link Monitor

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Monitors Container\ Link Monitor

Link monitors observe the round-trip time of ping messages sent between a Microsoft Exchange Server computer and another server or foreign system. Notification occurs if the round trip takes longer than expected.

Use the following property pages to configure link monitors:

General

Permissions

Notification

Servers

Recipients

Bounce


  MS Mail Connector

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ MS Mail Connector

The MS (PC) Mail Connector transfers information between Microsoft Exchange Server sites and Microsoft Mail for PC Networks.

A message from Microsoft Exchange to MS Mail is picked up by the Connector interchange, converted to MS Mail format, and placed in a temporary information store of the Microsoft Mail Connector. The Microsoft Mail Connector (PC) MTA then retrieves the message and delivers it to the MS Mail postoffice.

Use the following property pages to configure the MS Mail Connector:

General

Address Space

Diagnostics Logging

Interchange

Local Postoffice

Connections

Connector MTAs


Recipients Container


  Recipients Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Recipients Container

The Recipients container holds Microsoft Exchange Server message recipients. A site can contain numerous Recipients containers. Recipients include mailboxes, mailbox agents, distribution lists, public folders, and custom recipients.

Use the following property pages to configure a Recipients container:

General

Permissions


  Mailbox

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Recipients Container\ Mailbox

A mailbox is a private repository for e-mail and other information in the private information store of Microsoft Exchange Server. Users must have a mailbox to send and receive messages. A mailbox usually has only one user, but it can be shared by many users.

Use the following property pages to configure a mailbox:

General

Permissions

Organization

Phone/Notes

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Delivery Options

Custom Attributes

Advanced


  Distribution List

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Recipients Container\ Distribution List

A distribution list is a group of recipients created to expedite large mailings.

Use the following property pages to configure a distribution list:

General

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Custom Attributes

Advanced


Public Folder (Site)
  Public Folder

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Recipients Container\ Public Folder

Public folders hold information that can be shared by various users. Public folders reside in the public information store on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer and can be copied, or replicated, to one or more additional Microsoft Exchange Server computers. When you make a change in a public folder, that change is replicated to every replica of that folder throughout the organization.

Use the following property pages to configure a public folder:

General

Replicas

Folder Replication Status

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Custom Attributes

Advanced


  Custom Recipient

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Recipients Container\ Custom Recipient

A custom recipient is a recipient outside the messaging site, local postoffice, or organization, such as an Internet recipient with an SMTP address. When you create a custom recipient, it appears in the site Address Book and it can send messages to and receive messages from Microsoft Exchange Server.

Use the following property pages to configure a custom recipient:

General

Organization

Phone/Notes

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Custom Attributes

Advanced


Servers Container


  Servers Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container

The Servers container holds a server object for each Windows NT Server computer in a particular Microsoft Exchange Server site.

Use the following property pages to configure the Servers container:

General

Permissions


  Server

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server

A server is a Windows NT Server computer running Microsoft Exchange Server. In the directory hierarchy, the server object is the parent of the core server components, which include the directory service, directory synchronization, system attendant, public information store, private information store, and message transfer agent (MTA). The server object also contains any installed MTA transport stacks, and an object called the Server Recipients container, which contains all recipients on this server.

Use the following property pages to configure a server:

General

Permissions

Services

Locales

IS Maintenance

Diagnostics Logging

Advanced

Database Paths


  Directory Service

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ Directory Service

The Directory service stores all information about an organization's resources and users, such as information about servers, mailboxes, and public folders.

Use the following property pages to configure the Directory service:

General

Permissions

E-Mail Addresses

Diagnostics Logging


  MTA

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ Message Transfer Agent

The message transfer agent (MTA) provides addressing and routing information for sending messages from one server to another.

Use the following property pages to configure the MTA for the selected server:

General

Permissions

Queues

Diagnostics Logging


  Private Information Store

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ Private Information Store

The private information store holds all the mailboxes on a particular server.

Use the following property pages to configure the private information store:

General

Permissions

Logons

Mailbox Resources

Diagnostics Logging


  Public Information Store

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ Public Information Store

The public information store holds all public folders  on a particular server. These public folders can be replicated to servers in other Microsoft Exchange Server sites, enabling users in those sites to access that information.

Use the following property pages to configure the public information store:

General

Instances

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Age Limits

E-Mail Addresses

Server Replication Status

Folder Replication Status

Advanced

Diagnostics Logging

Logons

Public Folder Resources


  Organization

The organization is the root object or starting point of the Microsoft Exchange Server directory. All other directory objects are subordinate to the organization object. When setting up Microsoft Exchange Server, you name the organization. This is the directory name used in addressing and cannot be changed.

Use the following property pages to configure the organization object:

General

Permissions


  Site

Path:  Organization\ Site

A site is a group of one or more servers connected to the same local area network (LAN). The site object contains all the components (such as servers and monitors) of a site. In the Microsoft Exchange Server directory, the site object is the parent of the following containers: Recipients and Configuration.

Use the following property pages to configure a site:

General

Permissions


Connections Container


  Connections Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container

The Connections container holds all the connectors and gateways that connect Microsoft Exchange Server sites with each other and with foreign systems.

Use the following property pages to configure the Connections container:

General

Permissions


  Site Connector

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ Site Connector

A site connector connects two Microsoft Exchange Server sites on the same local area network (LAN).

Use the following property pages to configure a Site Connector:

General

Permissions

Target Servers

Address Space

Override


  Dynamic RAS Connector

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ Dynamic RAS Connector

The Dynamic Remote Access Service (RAS) Connector connects two sites. This asynchronous connection uses the RAS function provided with the Microsoft Windows NT Server.

Use the following property pages to configure a Dynamic RAS Connector:

General

Permissions

Schedule

RAS Override

MTA Override

Connected Sites

Address Space

Delivery Restrictions


  Server Recipients Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ Server Recipients Container

The Server Recipients container holds the recipients on a server. Recipients can send and receive messages and include mailboxes, mailbox agents, distribution lists, public folders, and custom recipients.

Use the following property pages to configure the Server Recipients container:

General

Permissions


  Mailbox Agent

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Recipients Container\ Mailbox Agent

A mailbox agent sends and receives messages and provides mailbox routing and schedule information to the message transport agent and connectors.

Use the following property pages to configure a mailbox agent:

General

Permissions


  X.400 Connector

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ X.400 Connector

Use an X.400 Connector to connect to foreign X.400 systems or to connect Microsoft Exchange Server sites not on the same local area network (LAN).

Note  Before creating an X.400 Connector, you must install the corresponding MTA transport stack.

Use the following property pages to configure an X.400 connector:

General

Permissions

Schedule

Stack

Override

Connected Sites

Address Space

Delivery Restrictions

Advanced


  MTA Transport Stack

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ MTA Transport Stack

An MTA transport stack defines the transport used with an X.400 Connector or Dynamic RAS Connector. The server installed with the stack processes all messages from all connectors within the site that reference the stack.

Before configuring an X.400 Connector or Dynamic RAS Connector, you must install the corresponding transport stack. For example, to configure an X.400 TP4 Connector, you must first install and configure a TP4 stack.

Use the following property pages to configure an MTA transport stack:

General

Permissions


  Configuration Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container

The Configuration container holds the objects for configuring services, components, connections, monitors, and recipients. The container holds the following objects: Add-Ins, Addressing, Connections, Directory Replication, Monitors, Servers, DS Site Configuration, Gateway, Information Store Site Configuration, MTA Site Configuration, Site Addressing, Encryption, and CA.

Use the following property pages to set up the Configuration container:

General

Permissions

Service Account Password


Folders Container


  Folders Container

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container

The Folders container holds the public, private, and system folders configured for Microsoft Exchange Server.


  Public Folders Container

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ Public Folders Container

The Public Folders container holds all public folders and public folder replicas configured for Microsoft Exchange Server.


Public Folder (Folders Container)
  Public Folder

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ Public Folders Container\ Public Folder

Public folders hold information that can be shared by various users. Public folders reside in the public information store on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer and can be copied, or replicated, to one or more additional Microsoft Exchange Server computers. When you make a change in a public folder, that change is replicated to every replica of the folder throughout the organization.

Use the following property pages to configure a public folder:

General

Replicas

Folder Replication Status

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Custom Attributes

Advanced


  System Folders Container

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container

The System Folders container holds the Schedule+ Free/Busy information, offline Address Book, and EForms registry folders for the Microsoft Exchange Server.


  EForms Registry Container

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container\ EForms Registry Container

The EForms Registry container holds all of the organization forms libraries that have been created in an organization. Organization forms libraries are public folders that store electronic forms.


  Organization Forms Library

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container\ Organization Forms Library

An organization forms library is a public folder that stores forms. By default, forms saved to an organization forms library are available to all users. Therefore, users do not need special permissions to read messages composed with these forms, and they can use these forms to compose messages. Organization forms libraries can be replicated between sites in your organization, making the forms widely available.

Use the following property pages to configure an organization forms library:

General

Replicas

Folder Replication Status

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Custom Attributes

Advanced


  Offline Address Book Container

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container\ Offline Address Book Container

The Offline Address Book container holds the offline Address Books configured for Microsoft Exchange Server.  Offline Address Books contain lists of recipients that remote users can access to get information about other users in the organization.


  Offline Address Book

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container\ Offline Address Book Container\ Offline Address Book

Remote users can use offline Address Books to get information about other users in the organization. Users can download the offline Address Book to their laptops or portable computers when they connect to the Microsoft Exchange Client remotely. The offline Address Book can contain any list of recipients that you specify. You can create one offline Address Book per site. Using the Global Address List container as a basis for the offline Address Book ensures that remote users can send mail to any recipient in your organization.

Use the following property pages to configure an offline Address Book:

General

Replicas

Folder Replication Status

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Custom Attributes

Advanced


  Schedule+ Free Busy Container

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container\ Schedule+ Free Busy Container

The Schedule+ Free/Busy container holds one Schedule+ Free/Busy folder for each site. Microsoft Exchange Server creates one each time you configure a new site. Each time you create a new mailbox, an entry is created in the Schedule+ Free/Busy Information public folder for the associated Windows NT account.


  Schedule+ Free Busy Information

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container\ Schedule+ Free Busy Container\ Schedule+ Free Busy Information

The Schedule+ Free/Busy Information public folder is created automatically when you install Microsoft Exchange Server and configure the first site and server. The first time a user logs on to Schedule+, an entry is created in the Schedule+ Free/Busy Information public folder for the associated mailbox. By default, each time the user changes the information in the schedule file, the Schedule+ Free/Busy Information public folder is updated accordingly. Individual users can prevent the publication of free/busy information by using the Set Access permissions dialog box in Schedule+.

Use the following property pages to configure Schedule+ Free/Busy Information public folders:

General

Replicas

Folder Replication Status

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Custom Attributes

Advanced


  Extension

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Add-Ins Container\ Extension

To add property pages to a directory object, you install an extension DLL by adding and configuring an Administrator-Extension object in the directory. You assign a name to this administration extension by specifying an Extension-Name. For example, you may set it to match the service name. The Administrator program builds a Common-Name attribute for the extension from the Extension-Name attribute and the platform designation.

Use the following property pages to configure an extension:

General

Permissions


Directory Replication Container


  Directory Replication Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Directory Replication Container

The Directory Replication container holds the Directory Replication Connectors configured for Microsoft Exchange Server. Directory Replication Connectors are bi-directional site connections that enable replication of directory changes from one site to other sites.

Use the following property pages to configure the Directory Replication container:

General

Permissions


  Directory Replication Connector

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Directory Replication Container\ Directory Replication Connector

To set up directory replication between sites, you must create and configure a directory replication connector which is a bi-directional replication connection between two sites. You must designate and schedule one server in each site to request updated directory information from the other site. At the scheduled times, the local server requests directory updates from the remote server.

Use the following property pages to configure a directory replication connector:

General

Permissions

Schedule

Sites


  System Attendant

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ System Attendant

The system attendant generates e-mail addresses for new recipients and maintains message tracking log information. In addition, the system attendant monitors the connections of Microsoft Exchange Server computers.

Use the following property pages to configure the system attendant:

General

Permissions

E-mail Addresses


  DS Site Configuration

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ DS Site Configuration

DS site configuration allows you to set values for directory objects in your site. The directory objects include mailboxes, distribution lists, public folders, custom recipients, and mailbox agents. This information is used by other components in Microsoft Exchange Server services and the Microsoft Exchange Client.

You use directory information to set up an offline Address Book and establish custom attributes. You can also determine how long you want to save a tombstone (which indicates a deleted object) and how often you want to remove those tombstones.

Use the following property pages to configure a DS site:

General

Permissions

Offline Address Book Schedule

Offline Address Book

Custom Attributes


  Information Store Site Configuration

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ InformationStore Site Configuration

All public folders on a server reside in the information store. Use information store site configuration to: specify which users have the right to create top-level public folders, specify the timing of warning messages if space allotments for mailboxes or public folders are exceeded, or enable clients in your site to connect to public folders in other sites.

Use the following property pages to configure an information store site:

General

Permissions

Top Level Folder Creation

Storage Warnings

Public Folder Affinity


  MTA Site Configuration

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ MTA Site Configuration

The message transfer agent (MTA) provides the addressing and routing information for sending messages from one server to another. Use MTA site configuration to set values for all MTAs in your site. You can set the messaging defaults, enable message tracking, specify the recipient of undeliverable messages, and enter a display name for the site.

Use the following property pages to configure an MTA for a site:

General

Permissions

Messaging Defaults


  Site Addressing

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Site Addressing

Microsoft Exchange Server automatically generates site addresses for MS Mail, SMTP, and X.400 address types. These site addresses are based on the organization and site names you specified during installation, and are used to create recipient addresses. Some organization and site names contain characters that are not valid for certain address types. Therefore, you may need to modify the site addresses.

Use the following property pages to modify site addresses:

General

Permissions

Site Addressing

Routing Calculation Schedule

Routing


  Global Address List

Path:  Organization\ Global Address List

The Global Address List contains the mailboxes, distribution lists, public folders, and custom recipients for an organization.

Use the following property pages to configure a mailbox:

General

Organization

Phone/Notes

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Delivery Options

Custom Attributes

Advanced

Use the following property pages to configure a distribution list:

General

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Custom Attributes

Advanced

Use the following property pages to configure a public folder:

General

Replicas

Folder Replication Status

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Custom Attributes

Advanced

Use the following property pages to configure a custom recipient:

General

Organization

Phone/Notes

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Custom Attributes

Advanced


  Encryption

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Encryption

Use encryption to enable or disable enhanced security for a mailbox, or to recover a user's security key. Microsoft Exchange Server can use one of three encryption algorithms to encrypt the contents of a message: CAST-64, DES, and CAST-40. The North American version of the Microsoft Exchange Client supports all three algorithms. All other localized versions of the Microsoft Exchange Client support the CAST-40 algorithm.

Use the following property pages to set up encryption:

General

Permissions

Security


  CA

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ CA

The certification authority (CA) object appears when you install a Key Management (KM) server for a site. Before installing a KM server in a site, ensure that you can see the CA object in the Configuration container for the other sites in your organization.

Use the following property pages to change the display name, specify an administrative note, or assign permissions for the Key Management server:

General

Permissions


When You Have a Question

If you have a question about Microsoft Exchange Server, first look in the product documentation or consult online Help. You can also find late-breaking updates and technical information in the README file that came with your Microsoft Exchange Server disks. If you cannot find the answer, contact the Microsoft Product Support Services.

Outside the United States and Canada, contact Microsoft Product Support Services at the Microsoft subsidiary office that serves your area. For information about Microsoft subsidiary offices, see Product Support Worldwide.

Microsoft AnswerPoint

Microsoft AnswerPoint offers high-quality technical support options that allow you to get what you need:  the right answers right now.  For information about support services in the United States and Canada, see Product Support Within the United States and Canada.

Services and prices may vary outside the United States and Canada. Microsoft AnswerPoint is subject to Microsoft's then-current prices, terms, and conditions, and is subject to change without notice.


Product Support Within the United States and Canada

In the United States and Canada, the following support options are available through Microsoft AnswerPoint:

Use the System Info feature to view information about your system

AnswerPoint Information Services

AnswerPoint Priority Support

Text Telephone

Other Support Options

Other Microsoft Services

See also

Product Support Worldwide


Use the System Info feature to view information about your system

The System Info feature examines your computer and displays information about Microsoft Exchange Server and your operating system. This information may be useful to the technical support engineer, should you need to call for assistance.

To see information with the System Info feature

1.	From the Help menu, choose About Microsoft Exchange Server.

2.	Choose the System Info button.

3.	Select the type of information you want to view.

You can also save or print information and run programs from the System Info dialog box.

See also

AnswerPoint Information Services

AnswerPoint Priority Support

Text Telephone

Other Support Options

Other Microsoft Services


AnswerPoint Information Services

AnswerPoint Information Services provides you with the latest technical and support information for all Microsoft products. You can access a variety of Information Services 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.  AnswerPoint Information Services reference robust technical support content.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Use the Microsoft FAQ to find "the right answers, right now." Here you will find quick answers to the most common technical issues on using your favorite Microsoft product.

Microsoft Knowledge Base

The Microsoft Knowledge Base is the same database that Microsoft support engineers use to provide answers over the phone from our regional product support locations. It is a comprehensive collection of more than 50,000 detailed articles with technical information about Microsoft products, bug and fix lists, documentation errors, and answers to commonly asked technical support questions.

Microsoft Software Library

The Microsoft Software Library contains hundreds of free software add-ons, bug fixes, peripheral drivers, software updates, and programming aids for easy downloading at your convenience.

Internet Services: Microsoft FTP and World Wide Web sites

Microsoft's Internet services are enormously popular. More than 750,000 of our customers access the Microsoft Knowledge Base or Microsoft Software Library each week by using Internet services. We also have additional Microsoft information, such as resource kits, white papers, and the latest information about Microsoft products. It's easy to search through these technical sources to find what you need.  If you're an Internet user, you can access this information for no charge (connect charges may apply) at the following locations:

The Microsoft World Wide Web site is located at http://www.microsoft.com.

The Microsoft FTP site is located at ftp.microsoft.com.

The Microsoft Network and other online services

You can access the 50,000-plus Microsoft Knowledge Base articles and the Microsoft Software Library files through The Microsoft Network and other online services. Additional technical information and community services, such as the Microsoft Frequently Asked Questions, Member-to-Member Bulletin Board Services, and World Wide Web links, are available on The Microsoft Network. To access Microsoft support services on The Microsoft Network, choose Go To Other Location from the Edit menu and type MSSUPPORT.

Microsoft Partner Network (MSPN)

The Microsoft Partner network (MSPN) is a global information and communications system that connects customers with the people and information needed to build business solutions based on Microsoft products.  Services include threaded bulletin boards, service request forms, online alerts, and a comprehensive database of Microsoft information.  MSPN is used by Microsoft Solution Providers and customers who purchase annual 35 or 75 incident accounts.

Microsoft TechNet

Microsoft TechNet is the front-line resource for fast complete answers to technical questions on Microsoft desktop and system products. From crucial data on client/server and workgroup computing, systems platforms, and database products to the latest on support for Microsoft Windows and Macintosh-based applications, it's all on Microsoft TechNet.  Microsoft TechNet is US$299 annually for a single-user license, or US$699 annually for a single-server, unlimited-users license. To subscribe to Microsoft TechNet, call (800) 344-2121.

Microsoft Download Service (MSDL)

The Microsoft Download Service (MSDL) contains sample programs, device drivers, patches, software updates, and programming aids. Direct modem access to MSDL is available in the United States by dialing (206) 936-6735. In Canada, call (905) 507-3022. The service is available 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, including holidays. The connection information is as follows: 1200, 2400, or 9600 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit.

Microsoft Developer Network (MSDN)

The Microsoft Developer Network (MSDN) is the official source of development toolkits, operating systems, and development-related technical, strategic, and resource information from Microsoft. It is the comprehensive source of programming information and toolkits for those who write applications for the Microsoft Windows and Windows NT operating systems, or use Microsoft products for development purposes. MSDN is an annual membership program. Members are kept up to date through regular delivery of information in the Development Library CDs, a newsletter, and other information sources. To subscribe to the Microsoft Developer Network, call (800) 759-5474.

Microsoft FastTips:

This automated service provides quick answers to your common technical questions via an automated toll-free telephone number or fax.  To access FastTips or to receive a map and catalog, call the FastTips number listed for your product of interest:

Product	Telephone Number
Desktop Applications	(800) 936-4100
Personal Operating Systems	(800) 936-4200
Development Tools	(800) 936-4300
Business Systems	(800) 936-4400
See also

AnswerPoint Priority Support

Text Telephone

Other Support Options

Other Microsoft Services


AnswerPoint Priority Support

Microsoft AnswerPoint offers priority telephone access to Microsoft support engineers 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, excluding holidays.

In the United States, call (900) 555-2100; $195 (U.S.) per incident. Charges appear on your telephone bill.

In the United States, call (800) 936-5900, at $195 (U.S.) per incident, billed to your VISA card, MasterCard, or American Express card.

In Canada, call (800) 668-7975 for more information.

See also

AnswerPoint Information Services

Text Telephone

Other Support Options

Other Microsoft Services


Text Telephone

Microsoft text telephone (TT/TDD) services are available for the deaf or hard-of-hearing. In the United States, using a TT/TDD modem, dial (206) 635-4948 between 6:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M. Pacific time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. In Canada, using a TT/TDD modem, dial (905) 568-9641 between 8:00 A.M. and 8:00 P.M. Eastern time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.

See also

AnswerPoint Information Services

AnswerPoint Priority Support

Other Support Options

Other Microsoft Services


Other Support Options

Microsoft AnswerPoint offers annual fee-based support plans. For information, in the United States, contact the Microsoft Support Sales Group at (800) 936-3500 between 6:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M. Pacific time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. In Canada, call (800) 563-9048 between 8:30 A.M. and 6:30 P.M. Eastern time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.  Technical support is not available through these sales numbers.

AnswerPoint Information Services

AnswerPoint Priority Support

Text Telephone

Other Microsoft Services


Product Training and Consultation
Other Microsoft Services

Microsoft Authorized Support Centers

Microsoft Authorized Support Centers (ASCs) are a select group of strategic support providers who offer high quality customized support services that span the complete systems life cycle of planning, implementation and maintenance of your multivendor environment.  Services include:  on-site support, integration and implementation services, help desk services, hardware support, development resources, and others. Choosing an ASC allows you to work with one vendor for all of your technical support and service needs. You can also combine ASC services with your in-house help desk or Microsoft support service option to best fit your information technology support needs.

For more information on the ASC program, in the U.S. call (800) 936-3500 between 6:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M. Pacific time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.  In Canada, call (800) 563-9048 between 8:00 A.M. and 8:00 P.M. Eastern time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.

Microsoft Solution Providers Program

Microsoft Solution Providers are independent developers, consultants, and systems analysts that offer fee-based technical training and support, industry knowledge, objective advice, and a range of value-added services to companies of all sizes.  Solution Providers work with organizations to help implement computing systems that take advantage of today's powerful new technologies.

For the name of a Microsoft Solution Provider near you, in the U.S. call (800) 426-9400 between 6:30 A.M. and 5:30 P.M. Pacific time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.  In Canada, call (800) 563-9048 between 8:00 A.M. and 8:00 P.M. Eastern time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.

Microsoft TechNet

Microsoft TechNet is the front-line resource for fast, complete answers to technical questions on Microsoft systems and desktop products.  Information available on TechNet ranges from crucial data on client-server and workgroup computing, systems platforms, and database products, to the latest on support for Microsoft Windows and Macintosh-based applications.  As a TechNet user you receive:

Twelve monthly compact discs containing the Microsoft Knowledge Base, Microsoft operating systems product resource kits, customer solutions, key Microsoft conference session notes, and other valuable information.

Twelve monthly supplemental (drivers and patches) compact discs containing the Microsoft Software Library.

A 20% discount on Microsoft Press books

For more information about Microsoft TechNet, in the United States and Canada, call (800) 344-2121, between 7:00 A.M. and 7:00 P.M. Central time, Monday through Friday.  Outside of the U.S. and Canada, contact your Microsoft Subsidiary, or call (303) 684-0914.

See also

AnswerPoint Information Services

AnswerPoint Priority Support

Text Telephone

Other Support Options


Product Support Worldwide

If you are outside the United States and have a question about a Microsoft product, first:

Consult the documentation and other printed information included with your product.

Check online Help.

Check the README files that come with your product disks. These files provide general information that became available after the books in the product package were published.

Consult electronic options such as the Microsoft Network forums or bulletin boards, if available.

If you cannot find a solution, you can receive information on how to obtain product support by contacting the Microsoft subsidiary office that serves your country.

Microsoft Support

Microsoft offers high-quality technical support options that allow you to get what you need:  the right answers right now.

Microsoft support is subject to Microsoft's then-current prices, terms, and conditions in place in each country at the time the services are used and is subject to change without notice.

Calling a Microsoft Subsidiary Office

When you call, you should be at your computer and have the appropriate product documentation at hand. Be prepared to give the following information:

The version number of Microsoft product that you are using.

The type of hardware that you are using, including network hardware, if applicable.

The operating system that you are using.

The exact wording of any messages that appeared on your screen.

A description of what happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred.

A description of how you tried to solve the problem.

Microsoft subsidiary offices and the countries they serve are listed below.

If there is no Microsoft office in your country, please contact the establishment from which you purchased your Microsoft product.

Area	Telephone Numbers
Argentina	Microsoft de Argentina S.A.Customer Service: (54) (1) 819-1900 Fax: (54) (1) 819-1921 Technical Support (POS and DAD): (54) (1) 314-0560 Technical Support (BSD and DD, only for installation): (54) (1) 954-5666
Australia	Microsoft Pty. Ltd. Fax: (61) (02)805-0519 Sales Information Centre: (61) (02) 870-2100 Installation Support: (61) (02) 870-2132 Bulletin Board Service: (61) (02) 878-5200 Technical Support: (61) (02) 870-2131
Austria	Microsoft Ges.m.b.H. Phone: 0222-68 76 07 Fax: 0222-68 16 2710 Information: 0660-6520 Prices, updates, etc.: 0660-6520 General information about Microsoft Support in Central Europe: FAX: 0049/2622/167006
Belgium	Microsoft NV Phone: 02-7303911 Customer Service: 02-7303922 Bulletin Board: 02-7268545 (14400/1200/2400/9600 bd, 8N1, ANSI) Technical Support: 02-5133274 (Dutch speaking) 02-5023432 (English speaking) 02-5132268 (French speaking)
Bolivia	See Argentina
Brazil	Microsoft Informatica Ltda. Phone: (55) (11) 514 -7100 Fax: (55) (11) 514 - 7106/514-7107 Technical Support Phone: (55) (11) 871-0090 Technical Support Fax: (55) (11) 262-8638 Technical Support Bulletin Board Service: (55) (11) 872-4106 Technical Support Help by Fax (55) (11) 871-4701
Canada	Microsoft Canada Inc. Head Office Phone: 1 (905) 568-0434 Customer Support Centre: 1 (800) 563-9048 Microsoft AnswerPoint: Priority Support: 1 (800) 936-5900 Text Telephone (TT/TDD) 1 (206) 635-4948 Technical Support Bulletin Board Service: 1 (905) 507-3022
Caribbean	Microsoft Caribbean, Inc. Phone: (809) 273-3600 Fax: (809) 273-3636 Technical Support: (214) 714-9100
Chile	Microsoft Chile S.A. Phone: 56-2-330-6000 Fax: 56-2-330-6190 Customer Service: 56-2-800-213121
Colombia	Microsoft Colombia Phone: (571) 618 2245 Fax:(571) 618 2269 Technical Support: (571) 618 2255
Czech Republic	Microsoft Panská 6 11000 Praha 1 Phone (+42) (2) 24237089 or 2423 4325 Fax: (+42) (2) 2423 4343 Technical Support: Phone: (+42) (2) 2451 0554 or 53 52 56 (Win95 only)
Denmark	Microsoft Denmark AS Phone: (45) (44) 89 01 11 Microsoft Sales Support: (45) (44) 89 01 90 Microsoft FaxSvar: (45) (44) 89 01 44 Microsoft BBS: (45) (44) 66 90 46 (Document 303030 in FaxSvar contains detailed instructions) Technical Support: (45)  (44) 89 01 11 Microsoft MSDL: 44 66 90 46 Microsoft FastTips: 44 89 01 44
Dubai	Microsoft Middle East Phone: (971) 4 513 888 Fax: (971) 4 527 444
Ecuador	Corporation Microsoft del Ecuador S.A. Phone: (593) 2 460-447, (593) 2 460-451 Customer Service: (593) 2 460-453, (593) 2 460-458 Technical Support: (593) 2 463-094
England	See United Kingdom
Finland	Microsoft OY Phone: (0358) (90) 525 502 500 Microsoft FaxSvar: (46) (0)8 752 29 00 (Information in Swedish and English) Microsoft BBS: (46) (0) 8 750 47 42 (Information in Swedish and English) Microsoft MSDL: 90-455 03 66 Microsoft FastTips: 90-525 502 550 For Technical Support, please contact your local dealer.
France	Microsoft France Phone: (33) (1) 69-86-46-46 Fax: (33) (1) 64-46-06-60 Telex: MSPARIS 604322 Technical Support: Phone: (33) (1) 69-86-10-20 Technical Support Fax: (33) (1) 69-28-00-28 Fax Information Service: (33) 36-70-13-13
French Polynesia	See France
Germany	Microsoft GmbH Phone: 089-3176-0 Fax: 089-3176-1000 Telex: (17) 89 83 28 MS GMBH D Information: 089-3176 1199 Prices, updates, etc.: 089-3176 1199 Bulletin board, device drivers, tech notes: Btx: *microsoft# or *610808000# General information about Microsoft Support in Central Europe: FAX: 02622/167006
Greece	Microsoft Hellas, S.A. Phone: (30)(1)6806-775 through (30) 1 6806-779 Fax: (30)(1)6806 780
Hong Kong	Microsoft Hong Kong Limited PSS Faxback Service: 2535-9293 Microsoft Club Upgrade Centre: 2880-5085 Microsoft Club Member Hotline: 2516-5113 Technical Support: (852) 804-4222
Hungary	Microsoft Hungary Phone: (+36) (1) 268-1668 Fax: (+36) (1) 268-1558 Technical Support: Phone: (36) (1) 2MSINFO (267-4636)
Ireland	See United Kingdom
India	Microsoft India Phone: (01) (91) 646 0694, 646 0767, 646 0813 Fax: (01) (91) 646-0813
Indonesia (SP)	Indonesia - Jakarta Technical Support Phone: (6221) 572-1060 Fax: (6221) 573-2077
Israel	Microsoft Israel Ltd. Phone: 972-3-613-0833 Fax: 972-3-613-0834
Italy	Microsoft SpA Phone: (39) (2) 7039-21 Fax: (39) (2) 7039-2020 Customer Service (Prices, new product info, product literature): (39) (2) 7039-8359 Bulletin Board: (39) (2) 7030-0102 Technical Support: (39) (2) 7039-8351
Japan	Microsoft Company Ltd. Chofu Technology Center Technical Support Phone: (81) (424) 41-8700 Fax Information Service Fax: (81) (3) 5454-8100 (1#-0# for guidance) Microsoft Support Sales (Technical Support options / Support Contract) Phone: 0120-37-0196(toll free domestic only) Channel Marketing (Pre-sales Product Support) Information Center Phone: (81) (3) 5454-2300 Fax: (81) (3) 5454-7951 Customer Service Phone (Version upgrade/Registration) Phone: (81) (3) 5454-2305 Fax: (81) (3) 5454-7952
Korea	Microsoft CH Phone: (82) (2) 531-4500 Fax: (82) (2) 531-1724 Office Tech Support Line: (822) 508-0040 Windows Tech Support Line: (822) 563-0054 Developer Tech Support Line: (822) 566-0071 Back Office Tech Support Line: (822) 566-0027 Technical Support Fax: (82) (2) 531-4600 Technical Support Bulletin Board Service: (82) (2) 538-3256
Liechtenstein	See Switzerland (German speaking)
Luxembourg	Microsoft NV Phone: (32) 2-7303911 Customer Service: (32) 2-7303922  Bulletin Board: (32) 2-7350045 (1200/2400/9600 bd, 8N1, ANSI) Technical Support: (32) 2-5133274 (Dutch speaking) (32) 2-5023432 (English speaking) (32) 2-5132268 (French speaking)
Malaysia (SP)	Microsoft (Malaysia) Sdn Bhd: Phone: (60-3) 794-9595 Fax    : (60-3) 791-6080
México	Microsoft México, S.A. de C.V. Technical Support: (52) (5) 325-0912 Standard Support: Installation and Handling for Applications and Operating Systems Technical Support: (52)(5) 237-4800 Developers Tools and Advanced Systems Customer Service. (52)(5) 325-0911 Fast Tips: (52)(5) 237-4894 (24 hours x 365 days service) Bulletin Board Service: (52) (5) 628-6200  (2400s/14400k baud, 8 bits, No parity, 1 stop bit, ANSI terminal emulation) (52) (5) 628-6202 (14400k baud, 8 bits, No parity, 1 stop bit, ANSI terminal emulation) User: MSMEXICO, NO Password
Netherlands	Microsoft BV Phone: 023-5689189 Customer Service: 023-5677700  Bulletin Board: 023-5634221 (1200/2400/9600 bd, 8N1, ANSI) Technical Support: 023-5677877 (Dutch speaking) 023-5677853 (English speaking)
New Zealand	Microsoft New Zealand Ltd Phone: 64 (9) 358-3724 Fax: 64 (9) 358-3726 Technical Support: Phone: 64 (9) 357-5575 Fax: 64 (9) 307-0516 and 357-5577
Northern Ireland	See United Kingdom
Norway	Microsoft Norway AS Phone: (47) (22) 02 25 50 Microsoft Sales Support: (47) (22) 02 25 80 Microsoft BBS: (47) 22 18 22 09 (Document 404040 in FaxSvar contains detailed instructions) Microsoft FaxSvar: (47) (22) 02 25 70 Technical Support: (47) (22) 02 25 50 Microsoft MSDL: 22 18 22 09 Microsoft FastTips: 22 02 25 70
Papua New Guinea	See Australia
Paraguay	See Argentina
Philippines (SP)	Microsoft Philippines  Phone: (632) 811-0062 Technical Support: Phone: (632) 892-2295/2495 Fax: (632) 813-2493
Poland	Microsoft Sp.z o.o. ul. Grzybowska 80/82 00-844 Warszawa Phone: (+48) (2) 6615433 Fax: (+48) (2) 6615434 Technical Support: Phone: (+48) (2) 6216793 or (+48) (71) 441357
Portugal	Microsoft Portugal MSFT, Lda.Phone: (351) 1 4409200 Fax: (351) 1 4412101 Technical Support: Standard Support (All Clusters): 351 1 4409280/1/2/3 Fax : 351 1 4411655
Republic of China	Microsoft Taiwan Corp. Phone: (886) (2) 504-3122 Fax: (886) (2) 504-3121 Technical Support: (886) (2) 508-9501
Republic of Ireland	See United Kingdom
Russia	Microsoft A/O Leningradsky Prospekt80 125178 Moscow  Fax: (+7) (502) 224 50 45
Scotland	See United Kingdom
Singapore	Microsoft Singapore Pte Ltd Phone: (65) 227-6833 Fax: (65) 227-6811 Microsoft Download Service BBS: (65) 227-6798
Slovenia	See Germany Technical Support Phone: (+386) (61) 1232354
Slovak Republic	Microsoft Panská 6/ I 11000 Praha 1 Phone (+42) (2) 2423 7089 or 2423 4325 Fax: (+42) (2) 2423 4343 Technical Support: Phone: (+42) (7) 312083
South Africa	Microsoft South Africa Phone: (27) 11 445 0000 Fax: (27)  11 445 0045 or (27) 11 445 0046 Technical Support: (Toll Free): 0 802 11 11 04 (Toll): (2) 11 445 0100 Customer Service Centre: (27) 11 445 0145
Spain	Microsoft Iberica SRL Phone: (34) (1) 807 99 99 Fax: (34) (1) 803-8310 Technical Support: 91 807 99 60 Customer Service: (34) (1) 804-0096 Fax Back telephone: (34) (1) 91 804 00 96
Sweden	Microsoft AB Phone: (46) (08) 752 09 29 Sales Support: (46) (8) 752 56 30 Microsoft FaxSvar: (46) (0)8 752 29 00 Microsoft BBS: (46) (8) 750 47 42 (Document 202020 in FaxSvar contains detailed instructions) Information on Technical Support: (46) (8) 752 09 29 Microsoft MSDL: 08-750 47 42 Microsoft FastTips: 08-752 29 00
Switzerland	Microsoft AG Phone: 01-839 61 11 Fax: 01-831 08 69 Prices, updates, etc.: 01/839 61 11  Documentation: Phone: 155 59 00 Fax: 064-224294, Microsoft Info-Service, Postfach, 8099 Zürich Technical support (French speaking): 022-738 96 88 General information about Microsoft Support in Central Europe: FAX: 0049/2622/167006
Turkey	Microsoft Turkey Phone: (90) 212 2585998 Fax: (90) 212 2585954
United Kingdom	Microsoft Limited Product Support Services Bulletin Board Service Microsoft KeyData: (01734) 270065 (up to 14.4Kbaud, n, 8, 1)  Faxback Information Service Microsoft KeyFax: (01734) 270080 Telephone Support Consumer, Desktop Apps & Personal Operating Systems: (01734) 271000 Developer Support: (01734) 271414 Advanced Systems Support: (01734) 271007 Microsoft Ltd Microsoft Connection, Pre-Sales Information: (0345) 00 2000 Microsoft Ltd fax: (01734) 270002 Microsoft Ltd phone: (01734) 270001
Uruguay	Soporte Técnico: (598) (2) 77-4934
Venezuela	Corporation MS 90 de Venezuela S.A. Other information: (582)-9936156 (582)-914739 (582)-913342 Fax: (582)-923835 Technical Support: (582)-9935249 (582)-9939256
Wales	See United Kingdom


New Raw Object

Creates a new raw object.

Warning  Contact Product Support Services before modifying information in raw mode.


General (Raw Object)

Displays General properties for a raw object.

Warning  Contact Product Support Services before modifying information in raw mode.


Text Editor

Lets you enter or change values for the selected schema attribute.

Warning  Contact Product Support Services before modifying information in raw mode.


General (Raw Schema)

Displays General properties for the raw directory schema.

Warning  Contact Product Support Services before modifying information in raw mode.


Permissions (Raw Schema)

Displays Permissions information for the raw directory schema.

Warning  Contact Product Support Services before modifying information in raw mode.


Permissions (Recipients Container)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this Recipients container. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this Recipients container. For the Recipients container, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, Send As, and User default roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for recipients container permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with a mailbox.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the job title and display name fields in a mailbox.
Delete	Delete objects.
Send As	Send messages as a mailbox.
Mailbox Owner	Log on to a mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this mailbox.
Permissions you set on the recipients container are inherited by all recipients in the container.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


General (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the General property page to record basic information, such as name and location, for the mailbox user.

  First Name

  Initials

  Last Name

  Display Name

  Alias Name

  Address Information

  Company Information

  Primary Windows NT Account


First Name

Type the mailbox user's first name (up to 32 characters).


Initials

Type the mailbox user's middle initials (up to 6 characters).


Last Name

Type the mailbox user's last name (up to 64 characters).


Alias Name

Type an alias (up to 64 characters) that can be used for this mailbox user.  The alias name can be used to generate the e-mail address for this mailbox.


Display Name

Type the name (up to 256 characters) as you want it to appear in the Administrator window and in the Address Book.


Address Information

Specify the following optional address information:

In the	Type
Address box	The user's street address.
City box	The user's city.
State box	The user's state.
Postal box	The user's postal code.
Country box	The user's country.


Company Information

Specify the following optional company information:

In the	Type
Title box	The user's title.
Company box	The user's company name.
Department box	The user's department name.
Office box	The user's office number.
Assistant box	The phone number of the user's assistant (if any).
Phone box	The user's telephone number.


Address Book Comment

Type any information (up to 256 characters) about this mailbox that you want to appear in the Address Book.


Home Server

Select the Microsoft Exchange Server computer on which this mailbox will reside. The mailbox is stored on the selected server's private information store.

Note  You can specify the home server when you first create a mailbox. This is the server that users must log on to in order to use their mailbox. Once the mailbox is created, you can move it to a different server by choosing the Move Mailbox command from the Tools menu.


Primary Windows NT Account

Select the Windows NT account that will have mailbox owner permissions on this mailbox. The user logged on with the primary Windows NT account can use this mailbox to send and receive messages. You can associate more than one Windows NT account with a particular mailbox and assign permissions to additional accounts using the Permissions property page.


Organization (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Organization property page to enter optional information in the Address Book about the mailbox owner's manager and direct reports (if any).

  Manager

  Direct Reports


Manager

Specify the mailbox owner's manager.

Modify Button

Choose Modify to open the Address Book where you can select the name of the mailbox owner's manager.

Clear Button

Choose Clear to clear the Manager box.


Direct Reports

Choose Modify to open the Address Book where you can select one or more recipients who report to the mailbox owner.


Phone/Notes (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Phone/Notes property page to enter detailed telephone number information for a mailbox and to enter an optional note.

  Phone Numbers

  Notes


Phone Numbers

Specify the following optional telephone numbers:

In the	Type
Business box	The user's alternate office phone number.
Business2 box	The user's second alternate office phone number.
Fax box	The user's fax number.
Assistant box	The phone number of the user's assistant.
Home box	The user's home phone number.
Home2 box	The user's second home phone number.
Mobile box	The user's mobile phone number.
Pager box	The user's pager number.


Notes

Type any additional information about this user.


Permissions (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this mailbox. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this mailbox. For a mailbox, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, Send As, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for mailbox permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with this mailbox.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the job title and display name fields in a mailbox.
Send As	Send messages as this mailbox. This is different from Send On Behalf Of permissions because the person receiving the message can't tell that the message has been sent by someone else. You delegate Send On Behalf Of permissions using the Delivery Options property page.
Mailbox Owner	Log on to this mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this mailbox.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Distribution Lists (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Distribution List property page to specify the distribution lists to which this mailbox user belongs. When mailbox users are members of a distribution list, they receive all messages addressed to that distribution list.

  Distribution List Membership

  Modify Button


Distribution List Membership

A list of all the distribution lists to which this recipient belongs.


Modify Button

Opens a dialog box that displays a list of existing distribution lists. Select the distribution lists to which you want to add this recipient.


Delivery Restrictions (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to specify addresses from which this mailbox will or will not accept messages. All rejected messages are returned to the originator.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Delivery Options (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Options property page to set up the following delivery options:

  Give Send On Behalf Of Permission To

  Alternate Recipient


Give Send On Behalf Of Permission To

Choose Modify to change the list of users who can send mail on behalf of this mailbox user. Whenever mail is sent using this option, the message indicates that it was sent on behalf of another mailbox user.

Note  Send on Behalf Of permission differs from Send As permission, which does not indicate the actual sender. Use the Permissions property page to give Send As permission.


Alternate Recipient

Sets an alternate recipient for the mailbox user that will receive all incoming mail for this mailbox and indicates if the mailbox owner will receive messages.

None

Choose None to have no alternate recipient for the mailbox user.

Modify

Choose Modify to select an alternate recipient.

Deliver Messages to Both Recipient and Alternate Recipient

Once an alternate recipient is chosen, you can select this check box to deliver messages to both the alternate recipient and to the mailbox owner.


Security (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Security property page to enable or disable advanced security for this mailbox, to recover a user's security key, or to view the current advanced security status.

  Valid From/To

  Current Status

  Enable Enhanced Security Button

  Recover Security Key Button

  Revoke Advanced Security Button

  Forget Remembered Password Button


Valid From/To

Displays the dates for which this user's security certificate is valid. The default time period is one year. Once the certificate expires, a new certificate is automatically generated.


Current Status

Displays this user's current security status. The following table describes the different security states.

This state	Occurs when
Undefined	Security has never been enabled for this user.
New	Security has been enabled for the first time, but the one-time token has not yet been received from the client.
Active	Security has been enabled, and the one-time token has been received from the client.
Disabled	Security has been disabled.
Key recovery in progress	Security keys are in the process of being recovered, or a previously disabled user is in the process of being re-enabled.


Enable Enhanced Security Button

Creates a special temporary security token that you must give to users so that they can become fully security enabled. Once users have this token, they must use it to configure advanced security in Microsoft Exchange Client. For more information, see Microsoft Exchange Client Help.

You can use any secure method to transmit this temporary token to the user (such as telephone or mail).


Recover Security Key Button

Recovers a user's security keys. You can recover security keys if users forget their passwords or if you previously disabled users and now want to reenable them. When the keys are recovered, Microsoft Exchange Server creates a special temporary security token that you must give to the user. Once users have this token, they must use it to configure advanced security in Microsoft Exchange Client. For more information, see Microsoft Exchange Client Help.

You can use any secure method to transmit this temporary token to the user (such as telephone or mail).


Revoke Advanced Security Button

Disables a user's ability to sign or encrypt messages.


Forget Remembered Password Button

When you first open the Security property page, you are prompted to provide the administrative password that you created during advanced security setup. You are also given the option to "remember" the password for up to five minutes. This lets you continue to configure security options for this user and other users without having to reenter the administrative password each time. If you chose to remember the administrative password, you can choose Forget Remembered Password to forget the password. This is recommended if you finish working with advanced security before the five minutes have expired.


Custom Attributes (Mailbox)

  Overview

The Custom Attributes property page contains 10 unique fields that you can use to track any information about the recipients in your site. You define custom attribute fields using the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The fields you define on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page appear on the Custom Attributes property page for all recipients in your site. For example, suppose your company uses an employee ID numbering system. You can create a custom attribute field called "Employee ID#" on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The Employee ID# field then appears on the Custom Attributes property page of every recipient.


Advanced (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to provide a simple display name, set mailbox storage and message size limits, set trust levels for directory replication and directory synchronization, and determine if the mailbox appears in the Address Book.

  Simple Display Name

  Directory Name

  Trust Level

  Message Sizes

  Home Server

  Information Store Storage Limits

  Allow Rich Text in Msgs

  Hide From Address Book

  Container Name

  Administrative Note


Simple Display Name

Type the display name that will be used by systems that cannot interpret all the characters in the normal display name.


Directory Name

Displays the name that is used for routing purposes.


Message Sizes

Sets the size limits for outgoing and incoming messages.

Outgoing

Indicate the size of a message that can be sent from this mailbox. Select No Limit to allow messages of any size to be sent from this mailbox, or select Max (K), and type a value representing the largest message that this mailbox can send.

Incoming

Indicate the size of a message that can be received in this mailbox. Select No Limit to allow messages of any size to be received in this mailbox, or select Max (K), and type a value representing the largest message that this mailbox can receive.


Information Store Storage Limits

Sets the message storage limits for the private information store.

Use Information Store Defaults

Select this check box to use the values you set for storage limits on the private information store General property page, or clear this check box to override the private information store storage limits for this mailbox and use the values in Issue Warning and Prohibit Send.

Issue Warning (K)

Type a value representing the largest amount of disk space that this mailbox can occupy on the private information store before a warning message is sent to the mailbox owner.

Prohibit Send (K)

Type a value representing the level at which the mailbox user will be prohibited from sending messages until some disk space is made available on the private information store.

Note  The mailbox can still receive mail after the Prohibit Send value is exceeded.


Allow Rich Text in Msgs

Select this check box to allow messages from this mailbox to contain rich text format.


Hide From Address Book

Select this option if you do not want this mailbox to appear in the Address Book.


Trust Level

Determines whether information about this mailbox user is replicated to other mail systems during directory synchronization. If the mailbox user's trust level exceeds the trust level that you set for the container, information about the mailbox user will not be replicated during directory synchronization.


Container Name

The name of the container in which the mailbox is stored.


General (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Mailbox Agent General property page to specify the name and location of a mailbox agent. A mailbox agent is a special purpose mailbox used for mail-enabled applications. The Schedule+ Free/Busy Gateway is an example of a mailbox agent.

  Display Name

  Alias Name

  Computer Name

  Notes


Alias Name

Type an alias (up to 64 characters) for this mailbox agent as you want it to appear in the Address Book.


Computer Name

Name of the computer on which Microsoft Exchange Server is installed.


Notes

Type any information (up to 256 characters).


Permissions (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this mailbox agent. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this mailbox agent. For a mailbox, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, Send As, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for mailbox agent permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with this mailbox agent.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with this mailbox agent.
Send As	Send messages as this mailbox agent.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this mailbox agent.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Distribution Lists (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Distribution List property page to specify the distribution lists that this mailbox agent belongs to. When mailbox agents are members of a distribution list, they receive all messages addressed to that distribution list.

  Distribution List Membership


Delivery Restrictions (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to specify addresses from which this mailbox agent will or will not accept messages. All rejected messages are returned to the originator.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Delivery Options (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Options property page to specify the Send On Behalf Of permissions or alternate recipients.

  Give Send On Behalf Of Permission To

  Alternate Recipient


Give Send On Behalf Of Permission To

Choose Modify to change the list of users who can send mail on behalf of this mailbox agent. Whenever mail is sent using this option, the messages indicate that it was sent on behalf of another mailbox user.

Note  Send on Behalf Of permission differs from Send As permission, which does not indicate the actual sender. Use the Permissions property page to give Send As permission.


Alternate Recipient

Sets an alternate recipient for the mailbox agent that will receive all incoming mail for this mailbox and indicates if the mailbox owner will receive messages.

None

Choose None to have no alternate recipient for the mailbox agent.

Modify

Choose Modify to select an alternate recipient.

Deliver Messages to Both Recipient and Alternate Recipient

Once an alternate recipient is chosen, you can select this check box to deliver messages to the alternate recipient and to the mailbox agent owner.


Security (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Security property page to enable or disable advanced security for this mailbox agent, to recover a security key, or to view the current advanced security status.

  Valid From/To

  Current Status

  Enable Enhanced Security Button

  Recover Security Key Button

  Revoke Advanced Security Button

  Forget Remembered Password Button


Custom Attributes (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

The Custom Attributes property page contains 10 unique fields that you can use to track any information about the recipients in your site. You define custom attribute fields using the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The fields you define on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page appear on the Custom Attributes property page for all recipients in your site. For example, suppose your company uses an employee ID numbering system. You can create a custom attribute field called "Employee ID#" on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The Employee ID# field then appears on the Custom Attributes property page of every recipient.


Advanced (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to provide a simple display name, set mailbox storage and message size limits, set trust levels for directory replication and directory synchronization, and determine if the mailbox appears in the Address Book.

  Simple Display Name

  Directory Name

  Trust Level

  Message Size Limits

  Home Server

  Information Store Storage Limits

  Allow Rich Text in Msgs

  Hide From Address Book

  Container Name

  Administrative Note


Message Size Limits

Sets the size limits for outgoing and incoming messages.

Outgoing

Indicate the size of a message that can be sent from this mailbox agent. Select No Limit to allow messages of any size to be sent from this mailbox agent, or select Max (K), and type a value representing the largest message that this mailbox agent can send.

Incoming

Indicate the size of a message that can be received in this mailbox agent. Select No Limit to allow messages of any size to be received in this mailbox agent, or select Max (K), and type a value representing the largest message that this mailbox agent can send.


Information Store Storage Limits

Sets the message storage limits for the private information store.

Use Information Store Defaults

Select this check box to use the values you set for storage limits on the private information store General property page, or clear this check box to override the private information store storage limits for this mailbox agent and use the values in Issue Warning and Prohibit Send.

Issue Warning (K)

Type a value representing the largest amount of disk space that this mailbox agent can occupy on the private information store before a warning message is sent to the mailbox owner.

Prohibit Send (K)

Type a value representing the level at which the mailbox agent will be prohibited from sending messages until some disk space is made available on the private information store.

Note  The mailbox agent can still receive mail after the Prohibit Send value is exceeded.


Allow Rich Text in Msgs

Select this check box to allow messages from this mailbox agent to contain rich text format.


Hide From Address Book

Select this option if you do not want this mailbox agent to appear in the Address Book.


Container Name

The name of the container in which the mailbox is stored.


General (Distribution List)

  Overview

Use the General property page to specify the distribution list name and the distribution list owner and to add and delete members.

  Display Name

  Alias Name

  Owner

  Modify Owner Button

  Clear Owner Button

  Expansion Server

  Notes

  Members

  Modify Members Button


Display Name

Type the distribution list name (up to 256 characters) as you want it to appear in the Address Book.


Alias Name

Type an alias (up to 64 characters) for this distribution list. The alias name is used to generate other e-mail addresses for this distribution list.


Owner

The owner of the distribution list. A mailbox owner can modify distribution list members in Microsoft Exchange Client. Typically, only an administrator can modify distribution list memberships using the Administrator program.


Directory Name

Type a unique name (up to 64 characters).

Note  You provide the directory name when you first create the distribution list. This is the name that Microsoft Exchange Server uses to identify the distribution for routing purposes. Once a distribution list has been created, you cannot modify this name.


Modify Owner Button

Opens the Address Book where you can select an owner for the distribution list. A mailbox owner can modify distribution list members in the Microsoft Exchange client. Typically, only an administrator can modify distribution list memberships using the Administrator program.


Clear Owner Button

Clears the Owner box.


Expansion Server

Choose the server in your site where this distribution list will always be expanded. When a user in your site sends a message to a distribution list, Microsoft Exchange Server must expand the list, resolve the names of all recipients in the list, and determine the most efficient routing for the message. For large distribution lists, expansion can be processor-intensive. You can force the distribution list to be expanded on a specific server (for example, a server with a more powerful processor, or one that handles less messaging traffic) by specifying an expansion server.


Members

Lists all recipients on this distribution list. All distribution list members, which can include mailboxes, custom recipients, and other distribution lists, receive messages sent to the distribution list.


Modify Members Button

Opens the Address Book. Use this window to add or delete distribution list members. Choose OK to confirm your selection and return to the General property page. The recipients you select appear in the Members box.


Notes

Type any information (up to 256 characters) that you want to appear in the Address Book.


Permissions (Distribution List)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this distribution list. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this distribution list. For a distribution list, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for distribution list permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with this distribution list.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with this distribution list.
Send As	Send messages as this distribution list.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this distribution list.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Distribution Lists (Distribution List)

  Overview

Use the Distribution Lists property page to specify the distribution lists that this distribution list belongs to. When a distribution list is a member of another distribution list it is called a nested distribution list. For example, if a distribution list called Corporate is a member of a distribution list called North-East Employees, all messages sent to the North-East Employees list will be sent to all members of the Corporate list.

  Distribution List Membership

  Modify Button


Delivery Restrictions (Distribution List)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to specify addresses from which this distribution list will or will not accept messages. All rejected messages are returned to the originator.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Custom Attributes (Distribution List)

  Overview

The Custom Attributes property page contains 10 unique fields that you can use to track any information about the recipients in your site. You define custom attribute fields using the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The fields you define on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page appear on the Custom Attributes property page for all recipients in your site. For example, suppose your company uses an employee ID numbering system. You can create a custom attribute field called "Employee ID#" on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The Employee ID# field then appears on the Custom Attributes property page of every recipient.


Advanced (Distribution List)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to provide a simple display name, set distribution list message transfer limits, set trust levels for directory replication and directory synchronization, and determine whether the distribution list appears in the Address Book.

  Simple Display Name

  Directory Name

  Trust Level

  Message Size

  Container Name

  Distribution List Options

  Administrative Note


Simple Display Name

Type the display name that will be used by systems that cannot interpret all the characters in the normal display name.


Directory Name

Type a unique name (up to 64 characters).

Note  You provide the directory name when you first create the distribution list. This is the name that Microsoft Exchange Server uses to identify the distribution for routing purposes. Once a distribution list has been created, you cannot modify this name.


Trust Level

Determines whether information about this distribution list is replicated to other mail systems during directory synchronization. If the distribution list's trust level exceeds the trust level you set for the container, information about the distribution list will not be replicated during directory synchronization.


Message Size

Indicate the size of messages to be sent from this distribution list. Select No Limit to allow messages of any size to be sent, or select Max (K), and type a value representing the largest message that this distribution list can send.

Large messages sent to large distribution lists can adversely impact performance.


Container Name

The name of the container in which the distribution list is stored.


Distribution list options

Select any of the following options:

Report To Distribution List Owner

Select this option to send a message to the distribution list owner when a message sent to the distribution list is beyond the message size limit.

Report To Message Originator

Select this option to send a message to the message originator when a message sent to the distribution list is beyond the message size limit.

Allow Out of Office Messages to Originator

Select this option to respond with an Out of Office message for any registered user who is a member of the distribution list.

Hide From Address Book

Select this option if you do not want this distribution list to appear in the Address Book.

Hide Membership From Address Book

Select this option if you do not want the members of the distribution list to appear in the Address Book.


General (Public Folder)

  Overview

Use the General property page to specify the folder name and Address Book display name, to set an age limit for messages contained in replicas of the public folder, to view or modify client permissions, and to enter an optional note.

  Folder Name

  Address Book Display Name

  Alias Name

  Age Limit for All Replicas

  Client Permissions

  Notes

  Folder Path


Folder Name

The name of the public folder as it appears in the public folder hierarchy. This is the name that was provided when the folder was created in Microsoft Exchange Client.


Address Book Display Name

Specify how the folder name will appear in the Address Book. Select Same As Folder Name if you want the name that appears in the Address Book to match the name in the Folder Name box. Select Use This Name and type the public folder name as you want it to appear in the Address Book.


Alias Name

Type an alias (up to 64 characters) for this public folder. The name entered here can be used in the To box when sending mail to the public folder.


Directory Name

Displays the name that is used for routing purposes. The directory name is set in Microsoft Exchange Client when the public folder is created.


Age Limit for All Replicas

Type a value (in days) to set an age limit for all replicas of this public folder that exist throughout your organization.


Client Permissions

Opens the Client Permissions dialog box, where you can view or modify permissions that were originally set in Microsoft Exchange Client. Client permissions are different from Administrative permissions, which are set in the public folder Permissions property page.


Folder Path

Displays the complete address of this public folder, which is generated when the public folder is created in Microsoft Exchange Client.


Notes

Type descriptive information about this public folder that you want to appear in the Address Book.


Replicas (Public Folder)

  Overview

Public folders can be copied (replicated) to other servers in your site. When a replica of a public folder exists on another server, the information it contains is updated with current information during public folder replication.

Use the Replicas property page to create replicas of a public folder on other servers within your site.

Note  You can also replicate public folders to servers in other sites using the public information store Instances property page.

  Servers

  Replicate Folders To

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Site

Replicating public folders to other servers in your site can be useful in balancing the load of users accessing a particular public folder at any given time. For example, suppose you have 100 users and two servers in your site. If there is a popular public folder called Classified Ads on one server, and all 100 users access that folder numerous times each day, a great deal of traffic is created on the server. By creating a replica of the Classified Ads public folder on the second server, you can effectively balance the load of users accessing the public folder at any given time. For more information about planning public folder replicas, see the Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning Guide.


Servers

A list of all servers in the selected site.


Replicate Folders To

A list of servers that contain a replica of this public folder.


Add Button

Adds the selected server to the list of servers where a replica of this public folder will be created during public folder replication.


Remove Button

Removes the selected server from the list of servers that contain a replica of this public folder. During the next round of public folder replication, the public folder replica is removed from the selected server.


Site

A list of the messaging sites in your organization. When you select a site, all servers in that site appear in the Servers list.


Folder Replication Status (Public Folder)

  Overview

Use the Folder Replication Status property page to view the replication status of all servers that a particular public folder is replicated on and to see if the replicas are updated.

  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Refresh Button

Updates the latest public folder replication information.


Columns Button

Opens the Columns dialog box where you can change the type and order of information shown on the Folder Replication Status property page. Choose OK to confirm your selection.


Replication Schedule (Public Folder)

  Overview

Use the Replication Schedule property page to indicate the times at which this individual public folder will be replicated to other replicas of the folder that exist throughout your organization.

To set the replication schedule for all public folders on a server, use the public information store Replication Schedule property page.

Note  If a schedule is set for a specific public folder, it overrides the schedule set for a server.

  Use Information Store Schedule

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Use Information Store Schedule

Select this option if you want this public folder to use the same schedule that you set on the public information store Replication Schedule property page.


Permissions (Public Folder)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this public folder. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this public folder. For a public folder, Microsoft Exchange provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

Note  The permissions you set on a public folder in the Permissions page are different from client permissions, which are set in Microsoft Exchange Client, or by choosing the Client Permissions button in the public folder General property page.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for public folder permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this public folder.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this public folder.
Send As	Send messages as this public folder.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this public folder.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Distribution Lists (Public Folder)

  Overview

Use the Distribution Lists property page to specify the distribution lists that this public folder belongs to. When a public folder is a member of a distribution list, it receives all messages addressed to that distribution list.

  Distribution List Membership

  Modify Button


Custom Attributes (Public Folder)

  Overview

The Custom Attributes property page contains 10 unique fields that you can use to track any information about the recipients in your site. You define custom attribute fields using the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The fields you define on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page appear on the Custom Attributes property page for all recipients in your site. For example, suppose your company uses an employee ID numbering system. You can create a custom attribute field called "Employee ID#" on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The Employee ID# field then appears on the Custom Attributes property page of every recipient.


Advanced (Public Folder)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to provide a simple display name, set public folder storage limits, set trust levels for directory replication and directory synchronization, and set the priority of replication messages. Replication messages contain updated information that is sent to other replicas of this public folder.

  Simple Display Name

  Use Information Store Defaults

  Issue Warning

  Directory Name

  Trust Level

  Replication Msg Importance

  Hide From Address Book

  Container Name

  Administrative Note


Simple Display Name

Type the display name that will be used by systems that cannot interpret all the characters in the normal display name.


Use Information Store Defaults

Indicate storage limits for this public folder in the public information store. Select Use Information Store Defaults to use the storage limit values that you set for storage limits in the public information store General property page, or clear the Use Information Store Default Values check box to override the public information store storage limits for this public folder.


Issue Warning

Indicate storage limits for this public folder in the public information store. Type a value representing the largest amount of space this public folder can occupy before a warning message is sent to the owner.


Directory Name

The identifying part of the public folder's distinguished name. This can be used to identify a specific public folder when there are multiple public folders with the same name in different parts of the hierarchy.


Replication Msg Importance

Select a priority for replication messages sent by this public folder. Priority determines the order in which messages are sent by Microsoft Exchange Server. Messages with High priority are delivered first.


Trust Level

Determines whether information about a public folder is replicated to other mail systems during directory synchronization. If the public folder's trust level exceeds the trust level that you set for the container, information about the public folder will not be replicated during directory synchronization.


Hide From Address Book

Select this option if you do not want this public folder to appear in the Address Book. You can still send messages to a public folder that is hidden from the Address Book if you know the full e-mail address of the public folder.


Container Name

The name of the container where the replica is stored.


General (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Use the General property page to record basic information, such as name, location, and e-mail address, for the custom recipient.

  First Name

  Initials

  Last Name

  Display Name

  Alias

  Additional Information

  E-mail Button


First Name

Type the custom recipient's first name (up to 32 characters).


Initials

Type the custom recipient's middle initials (up to 6 characters).


Last Name

Type the custom recipient's last name (up to 64 characters).


Display Name

Type the name (up to 256 characters) as you want it to appear in the Administrator window and in the Address Book.


Alias

Type an alias (up to 64 characters) that can be used for this custom recipient. The alias name can be used to generate the e-mail address for this recipient.


Additional Information

Specify the following optional address information:

In the	Type
Address box	The user's street address.
City box	The user's city.
State box	The user's state.
Postal box	The user's postal code (if any).
Country box	The user's country.
Specify the following optional company information:

In the	Type
Title box	The user's title.
Company box	The user's company name.
Department box	The user's department name.
Office box	The user's office number.
Assistant box	The phone number of the user's assistant (if any).
Phone box	The user's telephone number.


E-mail Button

Changes the custom recipient's full e-mail address. A dialog box of address options appears. This dialog box varies according to the type of address that you specified when you first created this custom recipient. When you are finished modifying the address options, choose OK to return to the General property page.


Organization (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Use the Organization property page to enter optional information about the custom recipient's manager and direct reports (if any).

  Manager

  Direct Reports


Manager

Specify the mailbox owner's manager.

Modify Button

Choose Modify to open the Address Book in which you can select the name of the mailbox owner's manager.

Clear Button

Choose Clear to clear the Manager field.


Direct Reports

Specify a list of the people who report to the mailbox owner.

Modify Button

Choose Modify to open the Address Book in which you can select one or more recipients to add to the Direct Reports list.


Phone/Notes (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Use the Phone/Notes property page to enter detailed telephone number information for a custom recipient and to enter an optional note.

  Phone numbers

  Notes


Phone numbers

Specify the following optional telephone numbers:

In the	Type
Business box	The user's alternate office phone number.
Business2 box	The user's second alternate office phone number.
Fax box	The user's fax number.
Assistant box	The phone number of the user's assistant.
Home box	The user's home phone number.
Home2 box	The user's second home phone number.
Mobile box	The user's mobile phone number.
Pager box	The user's pager number.


Notes

Type any additional information about this user.


Permissions (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this custom recipient. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this custom recipient. For a custom recipient, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for custom recipient permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with this custom recipient.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with this custom recipient.
Send As	Send messages as this custom recipient.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this mailbox.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Distribution Lists (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Use the Distribution Lists property page to specify the distribution lists that this custom recipient belongs to. When custom recipients are members of a distribution list, they receive all messages addressed to that distribution list.

  Distribution List Membership

  Modify Button


Delivery Restrictions (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to specify addresses from which this custom recipient will or will not accept messages. All rejected messages are returned to the originator.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Custom Attributes (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

The Custom Attributes property page contains 10 unique fields that you can use to track any information about the recipients in your site. You define custom attribute fields using the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The fields you define on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page appear on the Custom Attributes property page for all recipients in your site. For example, suppose your company uses an employee ID numbering system. You can create a custom attribute field called "Employee ID#" on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The Employee ID# field then appears on the Custom Attributes property page of every recipient.


Advanced (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to provide a simple display name, set custom recipient message transfer limits, set trust levels for directory replication and directory synchronization, and determine whether this custom recipient appears in the Address Book.

  Simple Display Name

  Directory Name

  Trust Level

  Message Size

  Container Name

  Allow Rich Text in Messages

  Hide From Address Book

  Administrative Note


Simple Display Name

Type the display name that will be used by systems that cannot interpret all the characters in the normal display name.


Directory Name

Type a unique name (up to 64 characters).

Note  You provide the directory name when you first create the custom recipient. This is the name that Microsoft Exchange Server uses when routing messages. Once a custom recipient has been created, you cannot modify this name.


Trust Level

Determines whether information about this custom recipient is replicated to other mail systems during directory synchronization. If the custom recipient's trust level exceeds the trust level that you set for the container, information about the custom recipient will not be replicated during directory synchronization.


Message Size Limit

Indicates the size of messages that can be sent to this custom recipient. Select No Limit to allow messages of any size. Select Max (K), and type a value representing the largest message that this custom recipient can receive.


Container Name

The name of the container in which the custom recipient is stored.


Allow Rich Text in Msgs

Select this check box to allow outbound messages from this custom recipient to use rich text characters such as bold, color, and italic. Rich text also provides the ability to position attachments.


Hide From Address Book

Select this option if you do not want this custom recipient to appear in the Address Book.


Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector Options

  Overview

Use the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector Options property page to configure Microsoft Exchange Server to exchange Microsoft Schedule+ Free/Busy information between Microsoft Exchange Server sites and MS Mail (PC) postoffices. Once you have configured the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector, you can start it by choosing the Services icon from the Control Panel.

Note  The Microsoft Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector is installed with the Microsoft Mail Connector. Only one Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector will be installed in a site.

  Administrator Mailbox

  Schedule+ Distribution List

  Update Frequency

  Send updates for this site only

  Logging Level

  Full Export


Administrator Mailbox

Displays the mailbox or distribution list used for the administrator's mailbox. Any mail addressed to this Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector that the connector can't process, such as status reports or non-delivery reports (NDRs), is forwarded to this mailbox. To specify a different recipient, choose Change. An administrator mailbox must be specified to use the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector.


Recipient Mailbox
Schedule+ Distribution List

Contains all the MS Mail (PC) and PROFS postoffices that exchange free and busy information with this site. A Schedule+ distribution list must be specified to use the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector.


Update Frequency

Specifies how often the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector sends free/busy information to the postoffices in the Schedule+ distribution list. The default is every 15 minutes.


Send updates for this site only

Configures this Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector to send free/busy information updates for this site only to the postoffices in the Schedule+ distribution list. Use this option if your organization has more than one Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector and you want to control the exchange of free/busy information between Microsoft Exchange Server and the postoffices in the distribution list.


Logging Level

Select the logging level for the connector. The logging level determines which events are written to the Windows NT application event log. When Microsoft Exchange Server generates an event less than or equal to the logging level, the event is logged.

Logging Level	Description
None	Only critical events and error events are logged, including initiations and terminations, NDRs, and shutdowns. Only events with a logging level of 0 are logged. This is the default. Change it only if you incur a problem.
Minimal	Equivalent to None.
Basic	Events with a logging level of 2 or lower are logged. This level adds to the log the numbers of messages received and the number of information messages created.
Extensive	Events with a logging level of 3 or lower are logged. This level adds to the log the number of changes made and the names of users receiving messages from the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector.
Verbose	For the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector, this level is equivalent to Extensive.
Internal	All events are logged, including debug strings, configuration changes received, unknown address notifications, and validations of accounts.


Full Export

Push this button to update the Schedule+ distribution list after new members have been added. When this button is pushed, the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector will send free/busy information for all Schedule+ users to all members of the distribution list.


General (Server)

  Overview

Use the General property page to view the Directory Name or to add an administrative note. The Directory Name is created during Microsoft Exchange Server setup. This name cannot be changed.

  Administrative Note


Permissions (Server)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this server. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this server. For a server, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, Service Account Admin, View Only Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for server permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this server.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this server.
Delete	Delete objects.
Replication	Replicate directory information with other servers.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this server.
Note  When you give users or groups permissions on a server object, they automatically inherit the same level of permissions for all subordinate objects in the directory. For example, if you give a user administrator permissions on the server object, they inherit administrator permissions on all components below the server in the directory hierarchy, such as the directory and the MTA.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Services (Server)

  Overview

Use the Services property page to specify the services on this server that are checked by a server monitor. Server monitors monitor services on a specified server and can be configured to perform a variety of actions (such as attempting to restart the service) if they detect that a service is not running. Only those services specified in the Services property page are monitored.

  Installed Services

  Monitored Services

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  None Button

  Default Button

  All Button


Installed Services

Lists all services installed on this server.


Monitored Services

Lists all services on this server that are monitored by a server monitor.


Add Button

Adds the selected service to the list of services that are monitored by other server monitors.


Remove Button

Removes the selected service from the list of services that are monitored by other server monitors.


None Button

No services are monitored by other server monitors.


Default Button

Default services are monitored by other server monitors. Default services include:

Microsoft Exchange Server directory

Microsoft Exchange Server information store

Microsoft Exchange Server MTA


All Button

All installed services are monitored by other server monitors.


Locales (Server)

  Overview

Locales determine how date, currency, and time values are displayed, and controls other international settings, such as sorting order. When a specific locale (such as French) is selected for a server, French language clients connecting to that server see information that is properly sorted and formatted for their language.

  Installed Locales

  Selected Locales

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Installed Locales

Lists all locales. You can select one or more locales used on this server.


Selected Locales

Lists all locales that you have selected for this server. Foreign language clients that use the languages listed in the Selected Locales box can connect to this server and see information that is properly sorted and formatted for their language.


Add Button

Adds the selected locale to the Selected Locales box. Foreign language clients that use the languages listed in the Selected Locales box can connect to this server and see information that is properly sorted and formatted for their language.


Remove Button

Removes the selected locale from the list of locales available to foreign language clients connecting to this server.


IS Maintenance (Server)

  Overview

Use the IS Maintenance property page to schedule online maintenance for each server, including defragmentation of the public and private information stores. Information store response times are slower while maintenance tasks are being performed.

Set the information store maintenance schedule to the least busy time of day, but make sure it runs at least once each day. Increase the frequency of maintenance if information store performance starts to decline.

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Database Paths (Server)

  Overview

Use the Database Paths property page to set the paths to the directory and the public and private information store files on this server. If your server has multiple drives, you can spread the data files across different drives to enhance performance by reducing the amount of required drive-seeking time.

The private database is one of the two linked database elements that make up the private information store.

To set the location of the private database, choose Browse, and indicate a path.

The public database is one of the two linked database elements that make up the public information store.

To set the location of the public database, choose Browse and indicate a path.

The system database is one of the two linked database elements that make up the information store.

To set the location of the system database, choose Browse, and indicate a path.

Note  The system database path is identical for both the public information store and the private information store. Changing this path in the public information store Advanced property page changes the corresponding paths in the private information store Advanced property page and vice versa.

The transaction log keeps track of all information store events and transactions. Transaction log files are used during incremental backups of the information store.

To set the location of the transaction log, choose Browse, and indicate a path.

Note  The transaction log path is identical for both the public information store and the private information store. Changing this path in the public information store Advanced property page changes the corresponding paths in the private information store Advanced property page and vice versa.

The working path points to the location where various temporary files are stored. These temporary files are created during normal operation of the information store.

To set the working path, choose Browse, and indicate a path.

Note  The working path is identical for both the public information store and the private information store. Changing this path in the public information store Advanced property page changes the corresponding paths on the private information store Advanced property page, and vice versa.

  Name and Location

  Modify button


Name and Location

Displays the database filename and location.


Modify Button

Displays the Directory Database dialog box. Use this dialog box to change the database filename and location.


Advanced (Server)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to enable circular logging for directory or information store database files and to adjust inconsistencies between the directory and information store files.

  Database Circular Logging

 DS/IS Consistency Adjustment


Database Circular Logging

Circular logging automatically writes over transaction log files after the data they contain has been committed to the database. It reduces disk storage space requirements; however, if circular logging is enabled, differential and incremental backups cannot be performed.

Select the Directory option to enable circular logging of directory files. Select the Information Store option to enable circular logging of database files in the information store.


DS/IS Consistency Adjustment

Adjusts inconsistencies between the information stores and the directory.

Every public folder and mailbox is represented in two places on your server: an entry in the directory that contains all of the properties that you set from the Administrator program, and an entry in the information store that contains mailboxes and public folders, along with their contents.

An inconsistency can occur when there is an entry for a mailbox in the information store but no corresponding entry in the directory, or vice versa. Inconsistencies can also occur after restoring the directory or the information stores from a tape backup. Running the DS/IS consistency adjustment tool resolves any discrepancies.

Note  If the DS/IS consistency adjustment tool finds an entry in an information store with no corresponding directory entry, it creates a new entry in the directory. If the DS/IS consistency adjustment tool finds an entry in the directory with no corresponding information store entry, it deletes the directory entry.

All Inconsistencies

Select All Inconsistencies, and choose Adjust to adjust all inconsistencies.

Inconsistencies More Than (Days)

Select Inconsistencies More Than, type a value in the Days box, and choose Adjust to adjust only those inconsistencies that are older than a specified period of time.


General (Directory Service)

  Overview

Microsoft Exchange Server synchronizes directory information within a site every five minutes. You can synchronize directory information manually by clicking Update Now if you have made changes to directory information on this server and don't want to wait for automatic synchronization.

  Update Now Button

  Check Now Button

  Administrative Note


Update Now

Notifies this server that it should request directory updates from all other servers within the site.

Note  Directory information within a site is updated automatically every five minutes.


Check Now

Checks for the existence of other connected servers within a site and for the existence of new sites within the organization. For example, if server A is down while server B is added to your site, server A will have no knowledge of server B. Similarly, if server A is down while a new site is added to the organization, server A will have no knowledge of the new site. You can choose  Check Knowledge Consistency to rectify both of these situations. Checking knowledge consistency also sets up the required replication links with any new servers or sites.

Note  Knowledge consistency is checked automatically once a day. If you manually check knowledge consistency and discover the existence of a new server or site, you should choose Synchronize Now in the General (Directory) property page to update your local directory. Once directory synchronization is complete, you should rebuild the routing table by choosing  Recalculate Routing in the General (MTA) property page.


Administrative Note

You can enter any information (up to 1024 characters) that pertains to this object. This information is visible only in the Administrator program.


Permissions (Directory Service)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this directory. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this directory. For the directory, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, Service Account Admin, View Only Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for directory permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this directory.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this directory.
Delete	Delete objects on this directory.
Logon Rights	Log on to the directory.
Replication	Replicate directory information with other servers.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this directory.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


General (MTA)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Local MTA Name

  Local MTA Password

  Message Size

  Recalculate Routing

  Expand Remote Distribution Lists Locally

  Convert Incoming Messages To MS Exchange Contents

  Administrative Note


Local MTA Name

Type a name of up to 32 characters. This name is used to identify the MTA to foreign systems. If no name is provided, it defaults to the name of the server where the MTA is installed.

Note  Changing an established MTA name can potentially break connections from foreign X.400 systems.


Local MTA Password

Type a password of up to 64 characters (optional). This is the password that foreign systems use when connecting to this MTA.


Message Size

Indicates the largest message size that this MTA can process. Select No Limit if you want this MTA to process messages of any size. Select Maximum (K), and type a value of up to 10 digits to set a maximum message size (in kilobytes) that this MTA can process. All messages that exceed the limit are returned to the originator.


Expand Remote Distribution Lists Locally

A remote distribution list is one that is created on a server in another site and made available to users in your site through directory replication. If you select Expand Remote Distribution Lists Locally and a user sends a message to a remote distribution list, the distribution list is expanded locally (on the server to which they are currently connected) and Microsoft Exchange Server determines the best routing for the message based on the location of recipients in the list. This method guarantees the most efficient message handling. However, processing large distribution lists can impact server performance.


Recalculate Routing

Rebuilds the routing table manually. The routing table contains all the information that the MTA needs to determine how to route messages. Typically, when you make a change that impacts routing information (such as adding a new gateway or changing a connector's configuration), you receive a message asking if you want to rebuild the routing table. Because this can take a few minutes, you can wait until you make all your changes and then manually rebuild the routing table.


Convert Incoming Messages To MS Exchange Contents

Changes all addresses and contents for incoming messages to a form compatible with MAPI and the underlying Microsoft Exchange Server system.


Permissions (MTA)

  Overview

The Permissions property page specifies user or group rights on the message transfer agent (MTA). Permissions are assigned to a user or group through roles. Roles are sets of rights that define the type of access a user or group has on the MTA. For the MTA, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table describes the rights you can use to define roles for MTA permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this MTA .
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this MTA.
Delete	Delete this MTA.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this MTA .
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Queues (MTA)

  Overview

The Queues property page displays the status of all messages that are waiting to be delivered by this MTA. Microsoft Exchange Server creates different queues for each server in a site, as well as queues for any installed gateways. Once you select a queue, you can view or change the priority of individual messages.

  Queue Name

  Message List

  Details Button

  Refresh Button

  Priority Button

  Delete Button


Queue Name

Lists all queues on this MTA. It displays the queue name and the number of items contained in the queue. Select the queue you want to view, and a list of all messages is displayed in the Message List box.


Message List

Lists all messages in the selected queue. The Message List box displays the originator of the message, the time that the message was submitted, and the size (in kilobytes) of messages.


Delete Button

Removes the selected message from the queue.


Refresh Button

Refreshes the queue with the most current information.


Priority Button

View the priority of the selected message. You can leave the message's priority as is or change it to either High, Medium, or Low. Messages with higher priority are sent first.

You cannot change the priority of messages in the Internet Mail Connector or MS Mail queues.


Details Button

View the following read-only information about the selected message.

This option	Shows
Originator	Address from which the message was sent.
MTSID	Message ID of the message.
Submit Time	Time that the message arrived in the queue.
Size	Size of the message in kilobytes.
Priority	Message priority (High, Medium, or Low).


General (Private Information Store)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set default limits on the total amount of disk space that each mailbox in the private information store can occupy and to specify the public folder server for mailboxes in this private information store.

Note  All mailboxes will default to this limit unless you override the limit on the mailbox Advanced property page.

  Issue Warning

  Prohibit Send

  Public Folder Server


Issue Warning

Sets a default storage limit for mailboxes on this private information store. Once a mailbox exceeds the allotted size, a warning message is sent to the mailbox owner.


Prohibit Send (K)

Type a value representing the level at which the mailbox user will be prohibited from sending messages until some disk space is made available on the private information store.

Note  The mailbox can still receive mail after the Prohibit Send value is exceeded.


Public Folder Server

Specify the server where all public folders created by users with mailboxes on this server's private information store are located. Setting a different public folder server effectively splits the private and public information stores, and assigns the responsibility for creating and managing public folders to another server.


Permissions (Private Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this private information store. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on the private information store. For the private information store, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for private information store permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this private information store.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this private information store.
Delete	Delete this private information store.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this private information store.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Logons (Private Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Logons property page to see information about the users who have logged on to the server's private information store.

Column heading	Description
User Name	Network user name.
Mailbox	Mailbox display name.
Windows NT Account	Windows NT account name for the user.
Logon Time	Date and time the user logged on.
Last Access Time	Date the user previously logged on.
  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Refresh Button

Updates the Logons property page display.


Columns Button

Displays the Columns dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify which columns you want to display on the Logons property page, and the order in which you want them to appear.


Mailbox Resources (Private Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Mailbox Resources property page to see resource information about mailboxes on this private information store, such as the total amount of storage space being used by a particular mailbox, the total number of items in a mailbox, and so on.

You can customize the display of information in the Mailbox Resources property page by choosing Columns and selecting the columns you want to see and the order in which they appear.

Column heading	Description
Mailbox	The display name of the mailbox.
Windows NT Account	The Windows NT account of the user who is currently logged on to this mailbox.
Total K	The total amount of disk space (in kilobytes) that this mailbox currently occupies on the private information store.
Full Mailbox Directory Name	The full e-mail address of this mailbox.
Storage Limits	The status of this mailbox with respect to any existing storage limits.
Total no. Items	The total number of items (messages and attachments) in the mailbox.
Total no. Associated Messages	The total number of views and deferred action messages in the mailbox.
Last Logon Time	The time of the last log on to this mailbox.
Last Logoff Time	The time of the last log off from this mailbox.
  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Refresh Button

Updates the display with the latest information.


Columns Button

Displays the Columns dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify which columns you want to display on the Mailbox Resources property page, and the order in which you want them to appear.


General (Public Information Store)

  Overview

You use the General property page to set the default storage limit for all new public folders created on this server. The storage limit represents the largest amount of space (in kilobytes) that a public folder and the information it contains can occupy in the public information store. Once the storage limit is reached, a warning message is sent to the public folder owner.

  Issue Warning


Issue Warning

Specify a default storage limit for public folders in this public information store. Once a public folder exceeds the allotted space, a warning message is sent to all public folder contacts.


Instances (Public Information Store)

  Overview    [image]  See Also

Use the Instances property page to create replicas of public folders that exist on other servers. A public folder replica is a duplicate of a public folder that you create on the local public information store of the server you are administering. You can create replicas of public folders from any site in your organization. Users within your site can view and access the public folder replica just as they would other public folders created within the site. During replication, changes made to the replica are sent out to all other replicas of the public folder throughout the organization.

Note  You can also replicate public folders to servers in other sites on a per-folder basis using the Public Folder Replicas property page.

  Public Folders

  Folders On This Information Store

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Site

  Folder Path


See Also

Public Folder Replicas Property Page


Public Folders

Lists the public folders available within the selected site that are not replicated to this server.


Folders On This Information Store

Lists the public folders in this public information store that are configured to replicate to this server.


Add Button

Creates a replica of the selected public folder in this public information store. The name of the public folder is displayed in the Folders On This Information Store box. All folders in this list are replicated to this public information store.


Remove Button

Removes the selected public folder replica from this public information store.


Site

Displays the sites in your organization.


Folder Path

Displays the path to the public folder.


Replication Schedule (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Replication Schedule property page to indicate the times at which public folders in this public information store are replicated to other replicas that exist throughout your organization. The times you set on this page determine when replication occurs for all replicated public folders in this information store. You can override this schedule on a per-folder basis from the Public Folder Replication Schedule property page.

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Always

Runs replication at the interval specified in the Replicate Always Interval box on the Public Information Store Advanced property page.


Permissions (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this public information store. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this public information store. For the public information store, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for public information store permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this public information store.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this public information store.
Delete	Delete this public information store.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this public information store.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Rights

  Roles


Age Limits (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Age Limits property page to set time limits for messages stored in public folders and to set a default time limit for any newly created public folders in this public information store. Time limits determine how long messages can remain in a public folder before they expire and are deleted. They are useful to ensure that public folders don't get cluttered with outdated information.

You can view information about age limits for specific folders that exist on this public information store. You can also modify age limit settings for a particular public folder by double-clicking on its entry. This opens the Modify Age Limits dialog box.

Column heading	Description
Folder	Folder display name.
This Replica (days)	Current age limit for the replica of the folder in this public information store only.
All Replicas (days)	Current age limit for all replicas of the folder that exist throughout your organization.
Removed Older Than	Messages older than the number of days displayed have been deleted.
Delete Pending	Displays "True" if messages are about to be deleted from the folder, "False" if no delete is pending.
Total K	Total size of messages in the folder.
Folder Path	Organization and domain name in which the folder is located.
  Age Limit For All Folders On This Information Store

  Modify Button

  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Columns Button

Displays the Columns dialog box. Use this dialog box to customize the display of information on the Age Limits property page by selecting the columns you want to see and the order in which they appear.


Modify Button

Displays the Modify Age Limits dialog box. Use this dialog box to modify age limit settings for public folders.


Age Limit For All Folders On This Information Store

To set a default message age limit for all new public folders created in this public information store, select the check box, and type a value (in days) in the edit box. You can override this value on a per-folder basis by double-clicking a specific folder's entry in the Folder list and changing its age limit settings.


Server Replication Status (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Shows the status of public folder replication between this server and all other servers in the organization with which it replicates public folders.

Column heading	Description
Server Name	Name of the server.
Replication Status	In Sync indicates that there have been no changes to local public folder replicas since changes were last sent out. Local Modified indicates that there have been changes made to local public folder replicas that have not yet been sent out.
Last Received Time	Last time the local server received received updates from the selected server.
Average Transmission Time	Average time it takes to send updates from the local server to the selected server.
Last Transmission Time (sec)	The amount of time of the last transmission from the local server to the selected server.
  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Columns Button

Displays the Columns dialog box. Use this dialog box to customize the display of information on the Server Replication Status property page by selecting the columns you want to see and the order in which they appear.


Folder Replication Status (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Folder Replication Status property page to view the status of public folder replication within a site. A public folder replica is a copy of the public folder created in a public information store. Users within a site can view and access the public folder replica just as they would any other public folder created within the site. During replication, changes made to the replica are sent to all other replicas of that public folder in the organization.

Column heading	Description
Folder	Public folder name.
Display Name	Name of the public folder as it appears throughout the site.
Last Received Time	Time the last update was received.
Number of Replicas	Total number of replicas of this folder throughout the site.
Replication Status	In Sync indicates that there have been no changes to this replica since it last sent out its changes. Local Modified indicates that the replica of the public folder on this server has changed and has not yet sent out its changes
  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Columns Button

Displays the Columns dialog box. Use this dialog box to customize the display of information on the Folder Replication Status property page by selecting the columns you want to see and the order in which they appear.


Logons (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Logons property page to see who is currently logged onto a public folder, and other pertinent information such as the time they logged on.

Column heading	Description
User Name	Network user name.
Code Page	The set of characters being used by the connection.
Full User Directory Name	The complete directory name of this user
Locale ID	The locale ID (country and language) of the connection.
Open Attachments	Number of attachments the user has open.
Open Folders	Number of folders the user has open.
Open Messages	Number of messages the user has open.
Windows NT Account	Windows NT account name for the user.
Logon Time	Date and time the user logged on.
Last Access Time	Date the user previously logged on.
  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Columns Button

Displays the Columns dialog box. Use this dialog box to customize the display of information on the Logons property page by selecting the columns you want to see and the order in which they appear.


Public Folder Resources (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Public Folder Resources property page to view information about public folder resource usage.

Column heading	Description
Display Name	Folder name as it appears to users.
Folder	Name of the folder where messages are stored.
Folder Path	Displays the path to the public folder.
Total no. Associated Messages	Total number of views and deferred action messages.
Total K	Total size of folder contents.
Total no. Items	Number of items contained in the folder.
Created	Date folder created.
Last Access Time	Date and time folder was last accessed.
No. of Owners	Number of people with access to the folder.
No. of Contacts	Number of times folder has been used.
  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Columns Button

Displays the Columns dialog box. Use this dialog box to customize the display of information on the Public Folder Resources property page by selecting the columns you want to see and the order in which they appear.


Advanced (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to resolve inconsistencies between the public information store and the directory on this server. You can also set the replication interval and message size limit.

  Replicate Always Interval

  Replication Message Size Limit

  Defaults Button


Replicate Always Interval

Sets the frequency at which replication of the public information store occurs when you select Always in the public information store Replication Schedule property page. Type a value (in minutes) in the Replicate Always Interval box.


Replication Message Size Limit

During replication, public folders communicate changes between replicas by sending mail messages. Type a value (in kilobytes) in the Replication Message Size Limit box to limit the size of these messages.


Defaults Button

Use the system default values for Replication Always Interval and Replication Message Size Limit.


General (System Attendant)

  Overview

Use the System Attendant General property page to view the display and alias names and to maintain the message tracking log files. The system attendant generates e-mail addresses for new recipients and maintains message tracking log information. In addition, the system attendant monitors the connection status among Microsoft Exchange Server computers.

  Message Tracking Log Files Maintenance

  Administrative Note


Message Tracking Log Files Maintenance

Message tracking log files store messages based on a variety of criteria. To maintain these files, you can specify not to remove the old log files, or you can remove old log files after a specific number of days.


Permissions (System Attendant)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this system attendant. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this system attendant. For the system attendant, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for system attendant permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this system attendant.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this system attendant.
Send As	Send messages as this system attendant.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this system attendant.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


General (Organization)

  Overview

Use the General property page to change the display name (up to 256 characters), which is the name that appears in the Address Book and in the Administrator window.

You provide the Directory Name when setting up Microsoft Exchange. This name cannot be changed.


Permissions (Organization)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the organization object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on the organization object. For the organization object, Microsoft Exchange provides Admin, Permissions Admin, Service Account Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for organization permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects below this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the members of a distribution list.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the job title and display name fields in a mailbox.
Delete	Delete an object.
Replication	Replicate directory information with other servers.
Modify Permissions	Modify permissions on existing objects. For example, without this permission, a user could grant permissions to new mailboxes but could not modify permissions on existing ones.
  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


General (Messaging Site)

  Overview

Use the General property page to change the display name (up to 256 characters), which is the name that appears in the Address Book and in the Administrator window.

You provide the Directory Name when setting up Microsoft Exchange. This name cannot be changed.


Permissions (Messaging Site)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the messaging site. Permissions you set on the messaging site are inherited by the site recipients container. For example, a user with Mailbox Owner rights at the messaging site level automatically inherits Mailbox Owner rights for all recipients in the recipients container.

You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this messaging site. For a messaging site, Microsoft Exchange provides Admin, Permissions Admin, Send As, Service Account Admin, User, and View Only Admin default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for messaging site permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create additional recipients containers within this site.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete an object.
Send As	Send messages as a mailbox. This is different from send on behalf of permissions because the person receiving the message can't tell that the message has been sent by someone else. You delegate send on behalf of permissions using the Delivery Options property page.
Mailbox Owner	Log on to a mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.
Logon Rights	Log on to any server in the site using the Administrator program.
Replication	Replicate directory information with other servers.
Modify Permissions	Modify permissions on this object. For example, without this permission, a user could grant permissions to new objects but could not modify permissions on existing ones.
  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Permissions (Configuration Container)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the Configuration container. Permissions you set on the Configuration container are inherited by all objects and containers within the Configuration container. For example, a user with Modify Permissions rights on the Configuration container can modify permissions on all subordinate containers and objects.

You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. For the Configuration container, Microsoft Exchange provides Admin, Permissions Admin, Service Account Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for Configuration container permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete an object.
Send As	Send messages as a mailbox.
Mailbox Owner	Log on to a mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.
Replication	Replicate directory information with other servers.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object.
  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Service Account Password (Configuration Container)

  Overview

Lets you change the password for the service account that is used to start Microsoft Exchange Server services. Changing the password using the Service Account Password property page updates all servers in the site with the new password information. Any errors encountered while attempting to update the service account password are logged in the Windows NT Event Log.

  Account Name

  Password

  Confirm Password


Account Name

Displays the name of the service account used to start Microsoft Exchange Server services on the servers in your site.


Password

Type the new service account password.


Confirm Password

Re-type the new service account password.


General (Site Addressing)

  Overview

Use the General property page to modify the display name (the name that appears in the Administrator window), to view the directory name, and to set the following options:

  Routing Calculation Server

  Share Address Space with Other X400 Systems


Routing Calculation Server

Designate the server that is responsible for recalculating the routing table. The routing table contains all information about the gateways and connectors that are used to route messages anywhere outside the site. Routing information changes any time you perform an action that affects routing, such as adding a new gateway or removing an existing gateway. The routing table calculation takes all these changes into consideration and produces an updated routing table that is then replicated to every other server in the site as soon as the change is detected. Routing table calculation occurs at the interval you specify in the Routing Calculation Schedule property page.

Note  The routing table is automatically recalculated every time a change is made that affects routing within a site.


Share Address Space with Other X400 Systems

Lets another non-Microsoft Exchange Server system share the same address space as the Microsoft Exchange Server site. This is particularly useful when you are transitioning from another system to Microsoft Exchange Server. For example, if Microsoft Exchange Server receives a message from an X.400 system and cannot find the recipient in Microsoft Exchange, the message can be routed to the system that is sharing the address space. This prevents the server from sending unnecessary NDRs.


Permissions (Site Addressing)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the Site Addressing object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. For the Site Addressing object, Microsoft Exchange provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for Site Addressing object permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete an object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object.
  Windows NT Accounts with Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Site Addressing (Site Addressing)

  Overview

Use the Site Addressing property page to create or edit partial e-mail addresses for this site. Partial e-mail addresses contain information specific to a site. For example, you can define an X.400 address for a site that contains only X.400-specific information, so next time you create a mailbox, this part of the address is used to generate a full X.400 e-mail address for the mailbox.

Note  You should always check these addresses after installation to be sure they are correct and consistent throughout your system.

  E-Mail Addresses

  Edit Button


E-Mail Addresses

A list of all partial e-mail addresses that exist for this site. This information is used by various proxy generators to create full e-mail addresses for Microsoft Exchange recipients.


Edit Button

Select the partial e-mail address you want to modify, and choose Edit to open a dialog box containing various addressing options. When you edit an existing partial e-mail address, you are given the opportunity to update addressing information for all Microsoft Exchange recipients with the new information.


Routing Calculation Schedule (Site Addressing)

  Overview

The routing table must be recalculated after any change is made to routing. For example, if you add or remove a gateway or connector, or change a Connected Sites or Address Space property page, you must recalculate for messages to be sent correctly. There are three ways to calculate the routing table. You can:

Use the automatic system update, which recalculates the table anytime a change is detected that affects routing.

Set up a schedule and indicate the times at which the system automatically calculates the routing table.

Manually force recalculation at any time.

The MTA automatically reads the routing table when it detects a change. There may be a delay between the time when the routing table is rebuilt and the time when the MTA starts using the new information to route messages.

Note  The routing table is automatically rebuilt every time a change is made that affects routing within the site. You can manually rebuild the routing table on any server at any time by choosing the Recalculate Routing button in the MTA General property page or the Recalculate Routing button in the Site Addressing Routing property page.

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Schedule Grid


Routing (Site Addressing)

  Overview

Routing allows you to send mail to a certain range of addresses. For example, you can specify an address space, such as X.400 or SMTP, and a value for the address space, such as the postoffice or network, and routing automatically generates the address table.

The Routing property page contains the following columns:

Column	Description
Type	Indicates the type of address space.
Value	Shows the values for the address space.
Cost	Shows the cost of sending a message to this site.
  Recalculate Routing

  Save As

  Details


Recalculate Routing

Regenerates the address table.


Save As

Opens the Microsoft Exchange Administrator Save As dialog box.


Details

Opens the Routing Details dialog box where you can view detailed routing information.


General (DS Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the General property page to define a display name (the name that appears in the Administrator window), to view the directory name, and to set the following options:

  Tombstone Lifetime

  Garbage Collection Interval


Tombstone Lifetime (Days)

Type the number of days that a tombstone will exist before expiring. Tombstones are created any time you delete an object from the directory. It is the tombstone that is replicated to other servers, effectively deleting the corresponding directory entry on the other servers. The number that you enter here should be large enough to account for the time it takes the tombstone to be replicated throughout the organization and the length of time between server backups.


Garbage Collection Interval (Hours)

Type the number of hours representing the interval at which garbage is collected. During garbage collection, expired tombstones are permanently deleted from the system, and the directory is compacted for maximum efficiency.


Permissions (DS Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the DS Site Configuration object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. For the DS Site Configuration object, Microsoft Exchange provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for DS Site Configuration object permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete an object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Offline Address Book Schedule (DS Site Configuration)

  Overview

The offline Address Book must be generated before clients can download it to their local computers. There are two ways to generate the offline Address Book. You can:

Set up a schedule and indicate the times at which the system automatically generates the offline Address Book.

Manually force offline Address Book generation at any time.

Note  If you select Always to update the offline Address Book, the update begins at the beginning of the first grid block that you select. If you choose three two-hour intervals with only one hour in between, and it takes four hours to update your Address Book, then the next regeneration starts at the beginning of the third two-hour cycle.

You can use the Offline Address Book Schedule property page to schedule the times at which a new off-line address book is automatically generated. If recipients are added, removed, or updated frequently, you can schedule offline Address Book generation more frequently to ensure that the offline Address Book is always current.

The Offline Address Book Schedule property page contains a schedule grid with rows representing days and columns representing 1-hour blocks or 15-minute blocks depending on the detail view you select. You can use the schedule grid to designate specific times or blocks of time when the offline address book is generated.

  Always

  Selected Times

  Schedule Grid


Offline Address Book (DS Site Configuration)

  Overview

You can configure an offline Address Book that remote users can use to get information about other users in the organization. Users can download the offline Address Book to their laptops or portable computers when they connect to the Microsoft Exchange Server. The offline Address Book can contain any list of recipients that you specify. This data is stored in the Offline Address Book hidden public folder.

Note  You can create one offline Address Book per site. Do not replicate the Offline Address Book hidden public folder to other sites in your organization.

  Offline Address Book Server

  Generate Offline Address Book Now Button

  Generate Data Files from the Address Book Container

  Modify Button


Off-Line Address Book Server
Offline Address Book Server

The offline Address Book server is the computer where the actual offline Address Book files are generated and stored. When users remotely download the offline Address Book to their local computers, a connection is made to a hidden offline Address Book public folder, and the files are read and copied from there.


Generate Data Files from the Address Book Container

The offline Address Book is generated based on the contents of any recipients container in your site. Typically, you should use the Global Address List container, which includes a consolidated set of all recipients from all recipients containers in replicated sites throughout your organization. Using the Global Address List container as a basis for the offline Address Book ensures that remote users can send mail to any recipient in your organization.


Generate Off-Line Address Book Now
Generate Offline Address Book Now

You can quickly generate the offline Address Book at any time. For example, if you have just added a number of new recipients to your organization and the offline Address Book schedule is configured to automatically generate the offline Address Book once a week, you can manually generate the offline Address Book to account for the newly added recipients.


Modify Button

Displays the Offline Address Book Container dialog box. Use this dialog box to select the recipients container you want to use to generate an offline address book.


Custom Attributes (DS Site Configuration)

  Overview

Custom attributes are particular characteristics associated with a recipient object. For example, property pages contain predefined attributes such as the mailbox name, address, city, state, and postal code. If you want to add more fields to a recipient, you can define up to 10 custom attributes. These attributes provide additional information about the recipient object that is specific to your organization, such as an employee identification number.

Create custom attribute fields by typing any text in the Values column adjacent to the Custom Attribute (numbered 1 through 10) that you want to modify. The text you type appears as the custom attribute field label on the Custom Attributes property page of every recipient in your site.


General (Information Store Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the General property page to modify the display name (the name that appears in the Administrator window), to view the directory name, and to set the following options:

  Public Folder Container

  Enable Message Tracking


Public Folder Container

Lets you choose the recipients container where all new public folders created in this site will appear. For example, you may want to group all public folders in a recipients container called Public Folders. Grouping public folders in this manner makes it easier to locate a specific public folder from the address book and from the Administrator window.

Note  Changing the public folder container changes the location where all new public folders are stored. This does not affect the public folders that have already been created. If no container is specified, the default is the Recipients container for the site.


Enable Message Tracking

When message tracking for the Information Store is enabled, the System Attendant creates a daily log file that contains routing information about all messages processes by the Information Store. You enable message tracking for messages processed by the MTA from the MTA Site Configuration General property page.

Daily tracking log files are stored in the EXCHSRVR\TRACKING.LOG directory and use the following file naming convention:

YYYYMMDD.log

where YYYY is year, MM is month, and DD is day. For example, the file created on June 1, 1995, is called 19950601.log.

Note  The date used to create log files is based on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)

These daily log files are used by the Message Tracking Center to determine routing information for specific messages. Message tracking is turned off by default. You must turn message tracking on if you want log files are generated. The Message Tracking Center cannot search for messages processed on days where no daily log file is present.


Permissions (Information Store Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the Information Store Site Configuration object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. For the Information Store Site Configuration object, Microsoft Exchange provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for Information Store Site Configuration object permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete an object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Top Level Folder Creation (Information Store Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the Top Level Folder Creation property page to specify which users have the right to create top-level public folders in the Microsoft Exchange Client. Top-level public folders are folders that exist at the highest tier of the public folder tree. Limiting the number of people who can create top-level public folders lets you control the public folder hierarchy. Once a top-level folder is created, the owner of that folder can set permissions that allow other users to create subordinate folders below the top-level folder. For more information, see Microsoft Exchange Client Help.

  Allowed to Create Top Level Folders

  Not Allowed To Create Top Level Folders

  Modify Button


Allowed to Create Top Level Folders

A list of all users that can create top-level public folders. Select the All option button to allow all users to create top-level public folders, or select the List option button, and then choose Modify to open the Address Book where you can specify a list of users who can create top-level folders.

If you use a distribution list, you can specify that certain people in that list cannot create top-level folders by entering their names in the Not allowed to create top level folders box.

Once you have entered a name in the Allowed to create top level folders box, all other users are automatically prevented from creating top-level folders.

Note  When both the Allowed to create top level folders and the Not allowed to create top level folders boxes are empty, then everyone in the global address list can create top-level folders.


Not Allowed To Create Top Level Folders

A list of all users that cannot create top level public folders. Select the None option button to allow anyone to create top-level public folders. Or select the List option button, and then choose Modify to open the Address Book where you can specify a list users who cannot create top-level folders.


Modify Button

Choose Modify to open the Address Book, where you can choose one or more users to add to either the Allowed To Create Top Level Folders or the Not Allowed To Create Top Level Folders boxes.


Storage Warnings (Information Store Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the Storage Warnings property page to set the times at which notification messages are sent to mailbox owners or public folder contacts who have exceeded the maximum amount of space allotted for their mailbox or public folder. You can set quota limits for mailboxes on the private information store General property page or the mailbox Advanced property page. You can set quota limits for public folders on the public information store General property page or the public folder Advanced property page.

The Storage Warnings property page contains a schedule grid with rows representing days and columns representing 1-hour blocks or 15-minute blocks (depending on the detail view you select). You can use the schedule grid to designate specific times or blocks of time when notification is to occur.

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Public Folder Affinity (Information Store Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the Public Folder Affinity property page to configure Microsoft Exchange so that clients in your site can connect to public folders in other sites. By associating a cost with each site, you can determine the order in which the client will attempt to connect to other sites. For example, if a client attempts to connect to a public folder that has multiple replicas in other sites, a connection is made to the site with the lowest cost first.

  Sites

  Public Folder Affinity

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Connected Site Cost


Sites

A list of all sites in your organization.


Public Folder Affinity

A list of all sites to which connections can potentially be established when a client attempts to connect to a public folder outside the site.


Add Button

Select a site in the Sites box, and choose Add to add it to the Public Folder Affinity box. When a client tries to connect to a public folder outside the site, Microsoft Exchange attempts to establish connections only with public folder replicas in sites that appear in the Public Folder Affinity box.


Remove Button

Select a site in the Public Folder Affinity box, and choose Remove to remove it from the Public Folder Affinity box. When a client tries to connect to a public folder outside the site, Microsoft Exchange attempts to establish connections only with public folder replicas in sites that appear in the Public Folder Affinity box.


Connected Site Cost

Connected site cost determines the preference between sites if a public folder replica is available in more than one site. Specify the routing cost of each site using the following steps:

In the Public Folder Affinity box, select a server.

In the Connected Site Cost box, specify the routing cost (0 to 100) for the selected site.

The default is 1. Public folders in sites with a cost of 0 are used first; public folders in sites with a cost of 100 are used only when all other replicas of the public folder are unavailable.

Choose Set Value.


General (MTA Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the General property page to modify the display name (the name that appears in the Administrator window), to view the directory name, and to set the following options:

  Dead Letter Recipient

  Enable Message Tracking


Dead Letter Recipient

Indicate the recipient in your organization that will receive all non-deliverable messages in this site. Choose Modify to open the organization address list where you can select a recipient to act as the dead letter recipient. You can specify anyone in your site to be the dead letter recipient, but this is usually an administrator.

Note  If you do not specify a dead letter recipient, all non-deliverable messages are deleted.


Enable Message Tracking

When message tracking for the MTA is enabled, the System Attendant creates a daily log file that contains routing information about all messages processes by the MTA. You enable message tracking for messages processed by the information store from the Information Store Site Configuration General property page.

Daily tracking log files are stored in the EXCHSRVR\TRACKING.LOG directory and use the following file naming convention:

YYYYMMDD.log

where YYYY is year, MM is month, and DD is day. For example, the file created on June 1, 1995, is called 19950601.log.

Note  The date used to create log files is based on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)

These daily log files are used by the Message Tracking Center to determine routing information for specific messages. Message tracking is turned off by default. You must turn message tracking on if you want log files are generated. The Message Tracking Center cannot search for messages processed on days where no daily log file is present.


Permissions (MTA Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the MTA Site Configuration object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. For the MTA Site Configuration object, Microsoft Exchange provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for MTA Site Configuration object permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete an object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Messaging Defaults (MTA Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the Messaging Defaults property page to set the criteria for sending messages. This includes setting values such as association parameters, time-outs for sending urgent messages, connection retry times, and checkpoint sizes. The values apply to all messages processed in your site.

  RTS Values

  Association Parameters

  Connection Retry Values

  Transfer Timeouts

  Reset Default Values


RTS Values

Request to send (RTS) values determine how often you want to verify information as it is being transferred, how long you want to wait after an error to restart the transfer, and how often you want a verification that another system has received your transfer.

Option	Description
Checkpoint size (K)	Sets amount of data to be transferred before a checkpoint is inserted. If an error occurs and the message must be retransferred, the process restarts from the most recent checkpoint. If you specify zero, no checkpoint is set. The default is 30. Checkpointing slightly reduces transmission speed. You should decrease the checkpoint size when the link is less reliable.
Recovery timeout (sec)	The amount of time after an error occurs that the MTA waits for a reconnection before deleting checkpointed information and restarting the transfer from the beginning.  The default is 60.
Window size	The number of checkpoints that can go unacknowledged before data transfer is suspended. The greater the window size, the greater the transfer rate. The window size determines the amount of resources set aside for the receiving station. Specify window size only if the checkpoint size is greater than zero. The default is 5.


Association Parameters

Associations are pathways that are opened to other systems. Each association is contained within a connection and is used to transfer messages to a system. You may have multiple associations in each connection. You can determine how long to keep an association, how long to wait for a response before disconnecting, and the number of messages you will let wait before you open another association.

Option	Description
Lifetime (sec)	The amount of time to keep an association open to a remote system after a message is sent. The default is 300.
Disconnect (sec)	The amount of time to wait for a response to a disconnect request before terminating the connection. The default is 120.
Threshold (msgs)	The maximum number of queued messages to a remote system. When this is exceeded, the MTA opens another association. The default is 50.


Connection Retry Values

Connection retry values determine how many times you want to try to open a connection and send a message, and how long you want to wait to reopen a connection or resend a message after an error.

Option	Description
Max open retries	The maximum number of times the system tries to open a connection before it sends a non-delivery report (NDR). The default is 144.
Max transfer retries	The maximum number of times the system tries to transfer a message across an open connection. The default is 2.
Open interval (sec)	The amount of time to wait before attempting to reopen a connection after an error. The default is 600.
Transfer interval (sec)	The amount of time to wait before resending a message across an open connection after a previous attempt failed. The default is 120.


Transfer Timeouts

Messages of different priorities require different levels of attention. For example, an urgent message is processed more quickly than a non-urgent message. If a transfer fails, you must determine how long to wait before sending an NDR. The Transfer Timeout is the amount to wait before sending that NDR. You can assign a different amount of time for each message priority.

Option	Description
Urgent	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for an urgent message. The default is 1000.
Normal	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for a normal message. The default is 2000.
Non-urgent	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for a non-urgent message. The default is 3000.


Reset Default Values

Resets each of the values on the Messaging Defaults property page to its default setting.


General (Encryption)

  Overview

Use the General property page to modify the display name (the name that appears in the Administrator window), and to view the directory name. The directory name is created during Key Management server Setup and cannot be modified.


Permissions (Encryption)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the Encryption object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. For the Encryption object, Microsoft Exchange provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for Encryption object permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete this object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object. For example, without this permission, a user could grant permissions to new objects but could not modify permissions on existing ones.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Security (Encryption)

  Overview

The Security property page lets you choose an encryption algorithm, which determines the way that messages are encrypted. It also shows the location of the Key Management server, which is the single server in a Microsoft Exchange organization that is in charge of generating and managing security encryption keys. The information in the Organization Name, Site Name, and Server Name fields is provided during security Setup and is read-only.

You can choose Modify Security Administrator Accounts to grant Advanced Security administration privileges to other administrators in your site, or to change your Advanced Security password.

  Preferred Encryption Algorithm

  Key Management Server Location

  Key Management Server Administrators


Preferred Encryption Algorithm

Microsoft Exchange Server can use one of three encryption algorithms to encrypt the contents of a message: CAST-64, DES, and CAST-40. The North American version of the Microsoft Exchange client supports all three algorithms. All other localized versions of the Microsoft Exchange client support the CAST-40 algorithm.

Note  You can change the North American preferred encryption algorithm from CAST-64 to DES and vice versa. However, you must recover security keys for all security-enabled users in the site where the change was made for the change to take effect. After you change the encryption algorithm, users can still read messages that were encrypted using the previous algorithm.


Key Management Server Location

Read-only information describing the organization, site, and server where the Key Management Server is located.


Key Management Server Administrators

Opens the Key Management Server Administrators dialog box where you can change your security administrative password, add advanced security administrators, and remove advanced security administrators.


Permissions (CA)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the CA object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. For the CA object, Microsoft Exchange provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for CA object permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete this object.
Modify Permissions	Modify permissions on this object. For example, without this permission, a user could grant permissions to new objects but could not modify permissions on existing ones.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


General (CA)

  Overview

Use the General property page to modify the display name (the name that appears in the Administrator window), and to view the directory name. The directory name is created during Key Management server Setup and cannot be modified.


General (Site Connector)

  Overview

Use the General property page to view the name of the site to which you are connecting, specify the connection cost, and add an administrative note.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Target Site

  Cost

  Administrative Note

  Messaging Bridgehead in the Local Site


Directory name

Type an informative and descriptive name (up to 64 alphanumeric characters). This permanent name identifies the Site Connector in the directory and is used in event log messages. You can modify this name only when creating a Site Connector. This name is not case-sensitive.


Display name

Type the name (up to 256 alphanumeric characters) that will be displayed in the Administrator window. This name is not case-sensitive.


Target Site

Displays the name of the site that contains the server that you specified when you created the Site Connector. This is a read-only field and cannot be modified.


Cost

Type a cost between 1 and 100. The lowest cost of all active connections is chosen. The default is 1.


Messaging Bridgehead in the Local Site

Select one server to be dedicated to sending messages to remote sites.

Any Server

Any server in the local site can send messages to the remote site. This is the default setting.

Specific Server

Select a specific server in the local site to send messages to the remote site.


Permissions (Site Connector)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this Site Connector. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this Site Connector. For a Site Connector, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for Site Connector permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this Site Connector.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this Site Connector.
Delete	Delete this Site Connector.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this Site Connector.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Rights

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Target Servers (Site Connector)

  Overview

A target server is a server in a remote site selected to handle message transfer for that site. Target server costs determine the preference between servers in a target site if more than one is available. All mail is sent to the server with the lower cost. If two or more servers are available with the same cost, the load placed on servers in the remote site is roughly equal.

  Site Servers

  Target Servers

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Target Server Cost


Site Servers

Lists all servers in the remote site. The server you specified when you configured the new Site Connector is automatically entered in the Target Servers box with a routing cost of 1.


Target Servers

Lists all servers in the remote site selected to handle message transfer for that site and the cost associated with that server. The server you specified when you configured the new Site Connector is automatically entered in the Target Servers box with a routing cost of 1.


Add Button

Adds the selected server to the list of target servers.


Remove Button

Stops the selected server from being used as a target server in the remote site.


Target Server Cost

Target server costs determine the preference between servers in a target site if more than one is available. Specify the routing cost of each target server using the following steps:

In the Target Servers box, select a server.

In the Target Server Cost box, specify the routing cost (0 to 100) for the selected server.

The default is 1. Servers with a cost of 0 are used first; servers with a cost of 100 are used only when all other servers are unavailable. If two or more servers are available with the same cost, the load placed on servers in the remote site is roughly equal.

Choose Set Value.


Address Space (Site Connector)

  Overview

The X.400 address of the remote site is automatically entered in the Address Space property page when the Site Connector is created. You can define the type and format of addresses used to identify messages to another site. Each entry is called an address space and contains only as much of the address as is necessary to distinguish messages that should be sent through this connector. You need to specify only the address space options that uniquely identify the route to the site.

Specify only as much of the address information as necessary to distinguish messages that should be routed to the connected site. For example, if you want to route every message with an SMTP address to the remote site, you should create a new Internet entry with an asterisk (*) in the address field. This matches all messages with a non-local SMTP address type and routes each to the remote site.

Note  An asterisk (*) can be used for a multicharacter wildcard in an address space. A question mark (?) can be used for a single character wildcard.

  Type Column

  Address Column

  Cost Column

  New General Button

  New X.400 Button

  New MS Mail Button

  New Internet Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Type Column

Displays the type of address (such as X.400 or SMTP).


Address Column

Displays the address space for which the connector is responsible.


Cost Column

Routing costs determine the preference between multiple routes to a remote site. The cost associated with each address space is used to optimize message routing to the foreign system but does not affect message reception. All mail is sent using the address with the lowest cost. If two or more routes are available with the same cost, the load placed on the routes is roughly equal. Address space costs range from 1 to 100.


New General Button

Opens the General Address dialog box to add a new general address for the remote site. Enter the address type, full address information for the site, and the routing cost.


New X.400 Button

Opens the X.400 Address dialog box to add a new X.400 address space. In the various address information boxes, type the X.400 address space. For information and guidelines on X.400 address formats, see the Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning Guide.


New MS Mail Button

In the various address information boxes, type the required Microsoft Mail address information. For information and guidelines on Microsoft Mail address formats, see the Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning Guide.


New Internet Button

Adds an SMTP address space. Enter the domain name or IP address that this connector will be responsible for.


Edit Button

Modifies addressing information for the selected address space.


Remove Button

Deletes the selected address space.


Override (Site Connector)

  Overview

Use the Override property page when the service account of the local site lacks service account permissions in the remote site. If a target server does not have a Windows NT Server trust relationship with the local site, it may be necessary to provide access permissions in order for the message transfer agents (MTAs) to send mail. To avoid any permissions-related problems, use the Microsoft Exchange Server service account for the remote site.

The Connect As options are as follows:

  Windows NT Username

  Password

  Confirm Password

  Windows NT Domain Name


Windows NT Username

Type the name used to log on to the target server.


Password

Type the user's password.


Confirm Password

Type the user's password.


Windows NT Domain Name

Type the name of the target server's Windows NT Server domain.


General (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

Use the General property page to specify connector names, server names, and message size. You can also select a transport stack and add an administrative note.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Remote Server Name

  MTA Transport Stack

  Phone Book Entry

  RAS Phone Book

  Refresh List

  Message Size

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

Type an informative and descriptive name (up to 64 alphanumeric characters). This permanent name identifies the Dynamic RAS Connector in the directory and is used in event log messages. You can modify this name only when creating a new transport stack. This name is not case-sensitive.


Display Name

Type the name (up to 256 alphanumeric characters) that will be displayed in the Administrator window. This name is not case-sensitive.


Remote Server Name

Type the name of the server to which you want to connect.


MTA Transport Stack

The MTA transport stack that will be used for the Dynamic RAS Connector.


Phone Book Entry

Type the RAS phone book name for the remote server, select a phone book from the drop-down list, or choose RAS Phone Book to add a RAS phone book entry. Choose Refresh List to update the drop-down list with your new phone book entries.


RAS Phone Book Button

Displays the Remote Access window. Use the window to add or edit a RAS Phone Book entry.


Refresh List

Updates the drop-down list with new phone book entries.


Message Size

Configures the maximum size of messages transported through the Dynamic RAS Connector. Choose No Limit to enable transfer of any message size. To limit the message size, choose Maximum (K) and specify a number between 1 and 9,999,999 KB.


Permissions (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this Dynamic RAS Connector. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this Dynamic RAS Connector. For a Dynamic RAS Connector, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for Dynamic RAS Connector permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this Dynamic RAS Connector.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this Dynamic RAS Connector.
Delete	Delete this Dynamic RAS Connector.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this Dynamic RAS Connector.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Rights

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Schedule (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

Use the Schedule property page to control when and how often this Dynamic RAS Connector becomes active. It contains a schedule grid with rows representing days and columns representing 1-hour blocks or 15-minute blocks depending on the detail view that you select. You can use the schedule grid to designate specific times or blocks of time when the Dynamic RAS Connector  will become active.

  Remote Initiated

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Remote Initiated

Select Remote Initiated to send messages queued at this MTA only when the remote MTA connects to this MTA. Both MTAs must have the two-way alternate (TWA) option selected. Only one of the two MTAs can be configured for remote initiation; otherwise, messages won't be delivered.


RAS Override (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

Use Override property page to provide authentication credentials to connect to the remote site.

The Connect As options are as follows:

  Windows NT Username

  Password

  Confirm Password

  Windows NT Domain Name

  Optional Phone Numbers


Optional Phone Numbers

MTA Callback Number

Type the number for the remote MTA to use to callback into the local MTA.

Overriding Phone Number

Type the number for connecting to the remote site, instead of the phone number listed in the RAS phone book.


MTA Override (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

Use Override property page to change the default Microsoft Exchange Server MTA attributes for the Dynamic RAS Connector. Override options should be used only when necessary to match the configuration of the remote Microsoft Exchange Server.

  RTS Values

  Connection Retry Values

  Association Parameters

  Transfer Timeouts

  Reset Default Values Button


RTS Values

Use the MTA Override property page to match the configuration of the remote Microsoft Exchange Server. This does not affect message transfer over any other connector. If you do not specify an override value, the MTA uses the default values.

Option	Definition
Checkpoint size (K)	Sets the amount of data to be transferred before a checkpoint is inserted. If an error occurs and the message must be re-transferred, the process restarts from the most recent checkpoint. If you specify zero, no checkpoint is set. The default is 30. Using a checkpoint slightly reduces transmission speed. You should decrease the checkpoint size when the connection is less reliable.
Recovery timeout (sec)	Determines the amount of time after an error occurs that the MTA waits for a reconnection before deleting checkpointed information and restarting the transfer from the beginning.   The default is 60.
Window size	The number of checkpoints that can go unacknowledged before data transfer is suspended. The greater the window size, the greater the transfer rate. The window size determines the amount of resources set aside for the receiving station. Specify window size only if the checkpoint size is greater than zero. The default is 5.


Connection Retry Values

Use the MTA Override property page to specify how many times the MTA should try to establish a connection.

Option	Description
Max Open Retries	The maximum number of times the system tries to open a connection before it sends a non-delivery report (NDR). The default is 144.
Max Transfer Retries	The maximum number of times the system tries to transfer a message across an open connection. The default is 2.
Open Interval (sec)	The amount of time to wait before attempting to reopen a connection after an error. The default is 600.
Transfer Interval (sec)	The amount of time to wait before resending a message across an open connection after a previous attempt failed. The default is 120.


Association Parameters

Use the MTA Override property page to set or modify the association parameters between MTAs.

Option	Description
Lifetime (sec)	The amount of time to keep an association open to a remote system after a message is sent. The default is 300.
Disconnect (sec)	The amount of time to wait before terminating a connection due to a previously terminated association. The default is 120.
Threshold (msgs)	The maximum number of queued messages to a remote system. When this is exceeded, the MTA opens another association. The default is 50.


Transfer Timeouts

Type the number of seconds between transfer retries for each of the following types of messages:

Option	Description
Urgent	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for an urgent message. The default is 1000.
Normal	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for a normal message. The default is 2000.
Non-urgent	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for a non-urgent message. The default is 3000.


Reset Default Values Button

Resets all current values to the defaults.


Connected Sites (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

When the Dynamic RAS Connector is used to connect to an existing Microsoft Exchange Server organization, use the Connected Sites property page to ensure directory replication can take place and that other connectors in the organization can be accessed.

Note  Connected sites should list only those sites that are directly adjacent to the connector. Knowledge of all other sites will be inherited automatically through directory replication.

  Organization Column

  Site column

  Routing address column

  Cost Column

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Routing address

Displays the e-mail routing address for the connected site. In the Properties dialog for the connected site, select the Routing Address tab and click Edit to make changes to the routing address.


Remove Button

Deletes the selected connected site.


Edit Button

Displays the Properties dialog box for the connected site. Use the General and Routing Address property pages to type changes.


New Button

Displays the Properties dialog box. Use the General and Routing Address properties pages to specify information for the new connected site.


Site Column

Displays the connected site name.


Organization Column

Displays the name of the organization associated with the connected site.


Address Space (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

The X.400 address of the remote site is automatically entered in the Address Space property page when the Dynamic RAS connector is created. You can define the type and format of addresses used to identify messages to another site. Each entry is called an address space and contains only as much of the address as is necessary to distinguish messages that should be sent through this connector. You need to specify only the necessary address space options that uniquely identify the route to the site.

The cost associated with each address space is used to optimize message routing to the foreign system but does not affect message reception. All mail is sent using the address with the lowest cost. If two or more routes are available with the same cost, the load placed on the routes is roughly equal. Address space costs range from 1 to 100.

Note  An asterisk (*) can be used for a multicharacter wildcard in an address space. A question mark (?) can be used for a single character wildcard.

  Type Column

  Address Column

  Cost Column

  New General Button

  New X.400 Button

  New MS Mail Button

  New Internet Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Delivery Restrictions (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to accept or reject messages from any sender listed in the directory. For example, if a message is addressed to a remote Microsoft Exchange Server site, it is returned to the sender if the sender's address is in the Reject messages from box.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Options (Exchange Menu)

You can specify default settings that will be used when you create Microsoft Exchange Server mailboxes using Windows NT User Manager. For example, you can specify that Microsoft Exchange Server always deletes a mailbox when its associated Windows NT account is deleted.


Properties (Exchange Menu)

Selecting Properties enables you to view or modify properties for the mailbox associated with the selected Windows NT account.


Help on Creating Mailboxes (Exchange Menu)

  See Also

You can create new mailboxes using Windows NT User Manager or the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program. The Microsoft Exchange Server extension to Windows NT User Manager allows you to automatically create new mailboxes at the same time as new Windows NT accounts. You can also set other defaults that will be used when setting up Windows NT accounts and mailboxes.

For more information about creating mailboxes, see the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator's Guide.


See Also

Creating New Mailboxes


Creating New Mailboxes

Use one of the following mailbox creation options:

Creating a Mailbox Using the Administrator Program

Creating a Mailbox Using the Windows NT User Manager

Creating a Mailbox Using a New Windows NT User Account


Creating a Mailbox Using the Administrator Program

You use the Administrator program to create a mailbox for one or more existing Windows NT user accounts, or you can use it to create a new Windows NT account as part of creating the mailbox. Whether you create a mailbox in the Administrator program or directly from Windows NT, the configuration process is the same.

1. In the Administrator window, choose Recipients.

2. From the File menu, choose New Mailbox.


Creating a Mailbox Using the Windows NT User Manager

You can use the Windows NT User Manager program to create a mailbox. When a new account is created, you can configure it for the user. The configuration specifies the user’s name, password, access to account groups, a user profile, time duration for accessibility, logon, and account information.

1. From the User menu in the Windows NT User Manager, choose New User.

2. Type the account information and then choose Add.

3. In the Connect to server dialog box, type the name of Microsoft Exchange Server where you want to create the mailbox.

Option	Description
User name	A unique name of up to 20 characters to identify the user account.
Full Name	The user’s complete name.
Description	Any text describing the user account or the user.
Password	A unique password for this user account. A password can be up to 14 characters (and a minimum of 4 characters) and is case-sensitive.
Confirm Password	Type the password again to confirm that you have entered it correctly.
User Must Change Password at Next Logon	The user must create a new password at the next logon.
User Cannot Change Password	The user cannot change the assigned password.
Password Never Expires	Does not prompt the user to change the password because the password never expires.
Account Disabled	Stops access to the account.


Creating a Mailbox Using a New Windows NT User Account

Before setting up the mailbox, determine if more than one Windows NT user will access it. If you configure a mailbox for a single user, the mailbox is associated with the Windows NT user account. If you configure a mailbox for several users, the mailbox is associated with each member’s Windows NT user account.

1. In the Windows NT Program Manager, open the Administrative Tools program group.

2. Double-click User Manager for Domains.

3. From the Exchange menu, choose Options.

4. Select an option.

Option	Description
Always create an Exchange mailbox when creating Windows NT accounts	Sets up a new mailbox recipient at the same time a new Windows NT account is created.
Always delete the Exchange mailbox when deleting Windows NT accounts	Deletes the Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox when the associated Windows NT account is deleted.
Always prompt for Microsoft Exchange server	Prompts for a server name to connect to when the mailbox is created.
Default Microsoft Exchange server	Uses the server you designate as the default server for each new mailbox created.
Default Microsoft Exchange Recipients Container	If None is selected, no default recipients container is displayed. If None is cleared, the default Microsoft Exchange Server Recipients container is displayed.


About Microsoft Exchange User Manager Extension... (Exchange Menu)

Displays information about your copy of Microsoft Exchange User Manager Extension, including the version number, and the copyright, legal, and licensing notices.


Exchange (Help Menu)

Displays the Help Finder window. The Help Finder window contains three tabbed pages that provide access to all topics in the Microsoft Exchange Server Help system.

Contents

Displays a graphical outline of Help topics.

Index

Displays an alphabetical index of Help topics.

Find

Provides access to full-text search capabilities.

Note  For more information on using the Help Finder window, open the window and press F1.


General (Options)

The General property page enables you to specify default settings that will be used when you use the Windows NT User Manager to create Windows NT accounts that are associated with Microsoft Exchange Server mailboxes.

  Always create an Exchange mailbox when creating Windows NT accounts

  Always delete the Exchange mailbox when deleting Windows NT accounts

  Always prompt for Microsoft Exchange server

  Default Microsoft Exchange Server

  Default Microsoft Exchange Recipients Container


Always create an Exchange mailbox when creating Windows NT accounts

Sets up a new mailbox recipient at the same time a new Windows NT account is created. This option is checked by default.


Always delete the Exchange mailbox when deleting Windows NT accounts

Deletes the Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox when the associated Windows NT account is deleted. This option is checked by default.


Always prompt for Microsoft Exchange server

Prompts for a server name to connect to when the mailbox is created. You can use this option to specify the mailbox's home server.


Default Microsoft Exchange Server

Uses the server you designate as the default server for each new mailbox created.


Default Microsoft Exchange Recipients Container

If None is selected, new mailboxes will be available in the Recipients container of the server to which you are currently connected. Clear None to select another Recipients container that will be used for new mailboxes.


Stack

X.400 TCP/IP Connector

X.400 TP4 Connector

X.400 X.25 Connector


General (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Remote MTA Name

  Remote MTA Password

  MTA Transport Stack

  Message Text Word-Wrap

  Remote Clients Support MAPI

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

Type an informative and descriptive name (up to 64 alphanumeric characters) for the MTA transport stack. This permanent name identifies the connector in the directory and is used in event log messages. You can modify this name only when creating a new connector. This name is not case-sensitive.


Display Name

Type the name (up to 256 alphanumeric characters) that will be displayed for the connector in the Administrator window. This name is not case-sensitive.


Remote MTA Name

Specify the name of the remote message transfer agent (MTA). Type a name of up to 32 characters. This name is not case-sensitive.


Remote MTA Password

Specify the password of the remote message transfer agent (MTA) of up to 64 characters. This password is case-sensitive.


Transport Stack

Select an X.400 message transport. The MTA transport stack is used to provide a network connection between two sites or between a site and a foreign X.400 system. You can use an MTA transport stack installed on any computer in your site running the Microsoft Exchange Server. Messages are automatically routed through the server where the MTA transport stack is installed.

If the transport stack you want to use does not appear in this list, you must install it or verify that information about an installed stack has been replicated to this server.


Message Text Word-Wrap

Indicate whether to insert a carriage return at a specific column in outgoing message text. Select Never (default) if you do not want to insert carriage returns in the text of outgoing messages. Or select At Column, and type a value representing the column number where a carriage return will be inserted.


Remote Clients Support MAPI

You can configure the X.400 Connector to send outbound messages with rich text characters such as bold, color, and italic. Rich text also provides the ability to position attachments. Rich text is a feature that should be used only when the recipient client software is MAPI compliant.

If you do not select the Remote Clients Support MAPI check box, attachments will be sent to the foreign system as separate X.400 messages. Rich text format, icons and their rendering positions, and OLE attachments and their rendering positions are discarded before message transfer. If you select this option and the foreign system does not support MAPI, the foreign system displays an extra attachment called WINMAIL.DAT.


Permissions (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this X.400 Connector. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this X.400 Connector. For an X.400 Connector, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for X.400 Connector permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this X.400 Connector.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this X.400 Connector.
Delete	Delete this X.400 Connector.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this X.400 Connector.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Schedule (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

Use the Schedule property page to control when and how often this X.400 Connector becomes active. It contains a schedule grid with rows representing days and columns representing 1-hour blocks or 15-minute blocks depending on the detail view you select. You can use the schedule grid to designate specific times or blocks of time when the X.400 Connector will become active.

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Override (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

Use the Override property page to change the default Microsoft Exchange Server MTA attributes when using a specific X.400 Connector. Override options should be used only when necessary to establish communication with a foreign system. For example, you can configure an override MTA name and/or password to be used when connecting to a foreign system if the local MTA name and/or password are longer than the foreign system can accept. This does not affect message transfer over any other connector.

You also use this property page to configure message transfer to a particular foreign system manually. This does not affect message transfer over any other connector. If you do not specify an override value, the MTA uses the default values when connecting to a foreign system.

  Local MTA Name

  Local MTA Password

  RTS Values

  Connection Retry Values

  Association Parameters

  Transfer Timeouts


Local MTA Name

The name to be used when the Microsoft Exchange Server name is too long or contains characters that the foreign system MTA cannot accept.

Note  The Local MTA Name and Local MTA Password can be used to override whatever is specified in the MTA General property page under the Servers container.


Local MTA Password

The local password that the foreign X.400 MTA uses to connect to the Microsoft Exchange Server computer.

Note  The Local MTA Name and Local MTA Password can be used to override whatever is specified in the MTA General property page under the Servers container.


RTS Values

Use RTS values to modify values for checkpoint size, recovery timeout, and window size. If you do not specify an override value, the MTA uses the default values or negotiates a configuration automatically when connecting to a foreign system.

Option	Definition
Checkpoint size (K)	Sets the amount of data to be transferred before a checkpoint is inserted. If an error occurs and the message must be re-transferred, the process restarts from the most recent checkpoint. If you specify zero, no checkpoint is set. The default is 30. Using a checkpoint slightly reduces transmission speed. You should decrease the checkpoint size when the connection is less reliable.
Recovery timeout (sec)	Determines the amount of time after an error occurs that the MTA waits for a reconnection before deleting checkpointed information and restarting the transfer from the beginning.   The default is 60.
Window size	The number of checkpoints that can go unacknowledged before data transfer is suspended. The greater the window size, the greater the transfer rate. The window size determines the amount of resources set aside for the receiving station. Specify window size only if the checkpoint size is greater than zero. The default is 5.


Connection Retry Values

Use the Override property page to specify how many times the MTA should try to establish a connection. If you do not specify an override value, the MTA uses the default values or negotiates a configuration automatically when connecting to a foreign system.

Option	Description
Max Open Retries	The maximum number of times that the system tries to open a connection before it sends a non-delivery report (NDR). The default is 144.
Max Transfer Retries	The maximum number of times that the system tries to transfer a message across an open connection. The default is 2.
Open Interval (sec)	The amount of time to wait before attempting to reopen a connection after an error. The default is 600.
Transfer Interval (sec)	The amount of time to wait before resending a message across an open connection after a previous attempt failed. The default is 120.


Association Parameters

Use the Override property page to set or modify the association parameters between MTAs. If you do not specify an override value, the MTA uses the default values or negotiates a configuration automatically when connecting to a foreign system.

Option	Description
Lifetime (sec)	The amount of time to keep an association open to a remote system after a message is sent. The default is 300.
Disconnect (sec)	The amount of time to wait before terminating a connection due to a previously terminated association. The default is 120.
Threshold (msgs)	The maximum number of queued messages to a remote system. When this is exceeded, the MTA opens another association. The default is 50. The threshold value is used to avoid messages being submitted to the Microsoft Exchange MTA queue faster than they are dispatched. When the threshold value is exceeded, the MTA opens another association to the remote system MTA.


Transfer Timeouts

Use the Override property page to set the number of times the MTA will try to transfer urgent, normal, or non-urgent messages. If you do not specify an override value, the MTA uses the default values or negotiates a configuration automatically when connecting to a foreign system.

Option	Description
Urgent	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for an urgent message. The default is 1000.
Normal	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for a normal message. The default is 2000.
Non-urgent	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for a non-urgent message. The default is 3000.


Connected Sites (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

When the X.400 Connector is used to connect to an existing Microsoft Exchange Server organization, use the Connected Sites property page to ensure that directory replication can take place, and that other connectors in the organization can be accessed.

Note  Connected sites should list only those sites that are directly adjacent to the connector. Knowledge of all other sites will be inherited automatically through directory replication.

  Organization

  Site

  Routing Address

  Cost

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Organization

The name of the organization using Microsoft Exchange Server. This is the directory name of the organization container.


Site

The name of the site with which to connect.


Routing Address

Displays the e-mail routing address for the connected site. In the Properties dialog box for the connected site, select the Routing Address tab, and click Edit to make changes to the routing address.


New Button

Displays the General and Routing Address property pages so that you can add the selected site to the list of connected sites.


Edit Button

Displays the General and Routing Address property pages so that you can edit the selected site to the list of connected sites.


Remove Button

Removes the selected connected site from the Connected Sites box.


Cost

Type a number from 1 through 100. Connected site costs determine the preference between bridgehead servers if more than one is available. If two or more servers are available with the same cost, the load placed on servers in the remote site is roughly equal. The default is 1.


Address Space (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

Use the Address Space property page to define the type and format of addresses used to identify messages to another site or foreign system. Each entry is called an address space and contains only as much of the address as is necessary to distinguish messages that should be sent through this connector. You need to configure only the necessary X.400 address space options to uniquely identify the route to the site or foreign system.

For example, if you want to use this connector to route only X.400 messages to a foreign system called Ferguson and Bardell (FAB), you type the following in the Address Space property page:

Private Management Domain Name (p) = FAB

Administrative Management Domain Name (a) = mci

Country (c) = us

The cost associated with each address space is used to optimize message routing to the foreign system but does not affect message reception. All mail is sent using the address with the lowest cost. If two or more routes are available with the same cost, the load placed on the routes is roughly equal. Routing costs range from 1 to 100.

Note  The Connected Sites property page also contains address information but is used only when connecting to other Microsoft Exchange Server sites.

  Type Column

  Address Column

  Cost Column

  New General Button

  New X.400 Button

  New MS Mail Button

  New Internet Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Type Column

Displays the type of address (such as X.400 or SMTP).


Address Column

Displays the address for which this connector is responsible.


Cost Column

The cost associated with each address space is used to optimize message routing to the foreign system but does not affect message reception. All mail is sent using the address with the lowest cost. If two or more routes are available with the same cost, the load placed on the routes is roughly equal. Routing costs range from 1 to 100.


New General Button

Opens the General Address Properties dialog box so that you can define a general address space. Enter the address type, full address information, and the routing cost.


New X.400 Button

Opens the X.400 Address Properties dialog box so that you can define an X.400 address space.

In the various address information boxes, type the X.400 address. For information and guidelines on X.400 address formats, see the Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning Guide.


New MS Mail Button

Opens the MS Properties dialog box so that you can define an MS Mail address space.


New Internet Button

Displays the SMTP Properties dialog box so that you can define an Internet address space.


Edit Button

Modifies addressing information for the selected address.


Remove Button

Deletes the selected address.


Delivery Restrictions (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to accept or reject messages from any sender listed in the directory. For example, if a message is addressed to a foreign system, it is returned to the sender if the sender's address is in the Reject Messages From box or does not appear in the Accept Messages From box.

Delivery restrictions are optional and do not affect incoming messages. The default is to accept messages from all senders and reject messages from none. These are senders that are listed in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory.

Note  If a distribution list is specified, the members of the distribution list are used for the restriction, not the distribution list itself.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Advanced (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to specify an MTA conformance mode, X.400 link options, message size limits, X.400 bodyparts, and the remote global domain identifier (GDI). The settings in this property page do not in any way restrict incoming messages to Microsoft Exchange Server.

  MTA Conformance

  Message Size

  X.400 Bodypart Used for Message Text

  Use the GDI from Site Addressing

  Use the GDI Specified Below

  X.400 Link Options

  Remote X.400 Global Domain Identifier


MTA Conformance

MTA conformance must match the conformance of the foreign system.


Message Size

Specify a maximum size for messages sent to another site or foreign system. The two values should match.

No Limit. This is the default. Select this to send messages of any size.

Set a maximum message size from 1 to 2,097,151 bytes.


Use the GDI from Site Addressing

Choose the site addressing global domain identifier (GDI) if the remote contains the same GDI (PRMD, ADMD, Country) as your Microsoft Exchange GDI. If not, choose Use the GDI specified below and complete the fields in Remote X.400 global domain identifier.


Use the GDI Specified Below

When selected, enables the X.400 Link Options. Choose this option and complete the fields in Remote X.400 global domain identifier when the relay MTA is not in the same management domain (MD) as the originating MTA.


X.400 Bodypart Used for Message Text

You can specify the bodypart type to be used for the content of an outbound message. This bodypart type must be supported by the foreign system and primarily affects outbound messages. This bodypart specification pertains to inbound IA5 messages if you select the Convert Incoming Messages to Microsoft Exchange Contents check box on the MTA object General property page. This allows inbound conversion from IA5 Swedish, Norwegian, or German on inbound messages.


X.400 Link Options

Additional parameters may be needed to operate with the other site or foreign system. These parameters affect outbound messages only.

Option	Description
Allow BP-15 (in addition to BP-14)	Select to send BP-15 attachments formatted as file transfer bodypart (FTBP). Clear to send all attachments as BP-14 attachments.
Allow MS Exchange contents	Select to send message content formatted in the Microsoft Exchange Server internal format (MDBEF) when possible. Clear to convert the message format to the standard P2/P22 X.400 format. Note  If the remote system is not a Microsoft Exchange Server computer, do not select this option.
Two way alternate	Select to specify that the two communicating MTAs take turns sending and receiving messages.


Remote X.400 Global Domain Identifier

The remote global domain identifier (GDI) is used to prevent message transfer loops. The GDI is used in a relay scenario and affects outbound messages only.

Option	Description
PRMD (p)	The private messaging domain (PRMD) name.
ADMD (a)	The administrative management domain (ADMD) name.
Any	Allow the local MTA to select any available ADMD.
Specific	Specify a particular ADMD to use.
Country (c)	Country name of the directly connected foreign X.400 system's GDI.


Stack (X.400 TCP/IP Connector)

  Overview

You use the Stack property page to specify transport address information about the server or foreign system to which you want to connect. Information displayed on the Stack property page will be based on the MTA transport stack type that you selected for the X.400 Connector.

Note  Information in the X.400 Connector Stack property page must match the transport configuration on the server or foreign system for the connection to work.

  Remote Host Name

  IP Address

  Address

  Outgoing OSI Address Information

  Incoming OSI Address Information

  Display Fields As Hex

  Display Fields As Text

  Use Expedited Data


Remote Host Name

Select to use the name of the foreign system's Windows NT Server computer if the foreign system is running Windows NT and uses Domain Name Service (DNS) or Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS), or select to use the name of the Microsoft Exchange Server computer.


IP Address

Select to use the static Internet protocol (IP) address of the remote server. Use the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where XXX is a decimal value from 0 to 255.


Address

The name or IP address of the foreign system or Microsoft Exchange Server computer.


Outgoing OSI Address Information

In the T Selector box, type up to 64 hexadecimal characters (32-character text string).

In the S Selector box, type up to 32 hexadecimal characters (16-character text string).

In the P Selector box, type up to 8 hexadecimal characters (4-character text string).


Incoming OSI Address Information

In the T Selector box, type up to 64 hexadecimal characters (32-character text string).

In the S Selector box, type up to 32 hexadecimal characters (16-character text string).

In the P Selector box, type up to 8 hexadecimal characters (4-character text string).


Display Fields as Hex

Display address information as hexadecimal values.


Display Fields as Text

Display address information in text mode.


Use Expedited Data

Select to increase the speed of communications over networks that recognize data packets identified for accelerated transfer. Some networks require the use of expedited data. For more information, see the documentation for your X.25, TCP/IP, or TP4 transport stacks.


Stack (X.400 TP4 Connector)

  Overview

You use the Stack property page to specify transport address information about the server or foreign system to which you want to connect. Information displayed on the Stack property page will be based on the MTA transport stack type that you selected for the X.400 Connector.

Note  Information in the X.400 Connector Stack property page must match the transport configuration on the server or foreign system for the connection to work.

  Address

  Outgoing OSI Address Information

  Incoming OSI Address Information

  Display Fields As Hex

  Display Fields As Text

  Use Expedited Data


Address

The network service access point (NSAP).


Outgoing OSI Address Information

In the T Selector box, type up to 64 hexadecimal characters (32-character text string).

In the S Selector box, type up to 32 hexadecimal characters (16-character text string).

In the P Selector box, type up to 8 hexadecimal characters (4-character text string).


Incoming OSI Address Information

In the T Selector box, type up to 64 hexadecimal characters (32-character text string).

In the S Selector box, type up to 32 hexadecimal characters (16-character text string).

In the P Selector box, type up to 8 hexadecimal characters (4-character text string).


Display Fields as Hex

Display address information as hexadecimal values.


Display Fields as Text

Display address information in text mode.


Use Expedited Data

Select to increase the speed of communications over networks that recognize data packets identified for accelerated transfer. Some networks require the use of expedited data. For more information, see the documentation for your X.25, TCP/IP, or TP4 transport stacks.


Stack (X.400 X.25 Connector)

  Overview

You use the Stack property page to specify transport address information about the server or foreign system to which you want to connect. Information displayed on the Stack property page will be based on the MTA transport stack type that you selected for the X.400 Connector.

Note  Information in the X.400 Connector Stack property page must match the transport configuration on the server or foreign system for the connection to work.

  Call User Data

  Facilities Data

  X.121 Address

  Outgoing OSI Address Information

  Incoming OSI Address Information

  Display Fields As Hex

  Display Fields As Text

  Use Expedited Data


Call User Data

Type the call user data information (up to 255 hexadecimal characters of user-specified information) as specified by your X.25 service provider.


Facilities Data

Type the facilities data information (up to 218 hexadecimal characters and commas) specifying additional information related to connection initiation, such as a reversal of line charges, as specified by your X.25 service provider.


X.121 Address

Type the X.121 address (up to 16 numeric characters) of the remote server.


General

RAS Transport Stack

TCP/IP Transport Stack

TP4 Transport Stack

X.25 Transport Stack


General (RAS Transport Stack)

  Overview

For communications over public telephone, X.25 packet assembly/disassembly (PAD), or Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) networks, you can install one RAS transport stack on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer. This transport stack works with the RAS network software running on a Windows NT server.

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Name

  MTA Callback Number


Name

The name for this transport stack. You can modify this name only when creating a new transport stack. The default is RAS (servername).


MTA Callback Number

The telephone number used to reach the local server over a dial-up connection when RAS callback security is enabled. Specifying this number is optional.


Permissions (RAS Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this transport stack. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this transport stack. Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for site connector permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this transport stack.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this transport stack.
Delete	Delete this transport stack.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this transport stack.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Rights

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Connectors (RAS Transport Stack)

  Overview

Each Dynamic RAS Connector that you have installed on this RAS MTA transport stack is displayed in the Connectors property page. You can view all the connectors using the MTA transport stack and make modifications if necessary.

  Connectors That Use This Stack

  Edit


Connectors That Use This Stack

A list of all the connectors using this MTA transport stack.


Edit

Allows you to edit the property pages for the connector specified.


General (TCP/IP Transport Stack)

  Overview

For communications over TCP/IP networks, you can install one TCP/IP transport stack on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer. This transport stack works with the TCP/IP network software running on the Windows NT server.

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Name

  Server Name

  OSI Address Information


Name

Type a name for this transport stack. The default is TCP/IP on (servername). You can edit this name only when creating a new transport stack.


Server Name

The name of the server where the stack will be installed. If the server name is not correct, you must cancel the task and specify the correct target server.


OSI Address Information

This section is used to further define the address in cases where other applications or services are using the same transport stack.

(Optional) In the T Selector box, type the transport service access point (TSAP) of up to 64 hexadecimal characters (32-character text string).

(Optional) In the S Selector box, type the session service access point (SSAP) of up to 32 hexadecimal characters (16-character text string).

(Optional) In the P Selector box, type the presentation service access point (PSAP) of up to 8 hexadecimal characters (4-character text string).

(Optional) Select Hex or Text to specify a format for data in the T, S, and P Selector boxes.


Permissions (TCP/IP Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this transport stack. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has to this transport stack. Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for site connector permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this transport stack.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this transport stack.
Delete	Delete this transport stack.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this transport stack.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Rights

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Connectors (TCP/IP Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Connectors property page to display a list of connectors that use this MTA transport stack. You can also select a connector and edit its property pages.

  Connectors that use this stack

  Edit Button


Connectors that use this stack

Lists the TCP/IP connectors that use this MTA transport stack.


Edit Button

Displays the property pages for the connector you select.


General (TP4 Transport Stack)

  Overview

For communications over TP4 transports, you can install one TP4 transport stack on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer. This transport stack works with the TP4 network software running on the Windows NT server.

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Name

  OSI Address Information


Name

Type a name for this transport stack. The default is TP4 on (servername). You can edit this name only when creating a new transport stack.


OSI Address Information

This section is used to further define the address in cases where other applications or services are using the same transport stack.

(Optional) In the T Selector box, type the transport service access point (TSAP) of up to 64 hexadecimal characters (32-character text string).

(Optional) In the S Selector box, type the session service access point (SSAP) of up to 32 hexadecimal characters (16-character text string).

(Optional) In the P Selector box, type the presentation service access point (PSAP) of up to 8 hexadecimal characters (4-character text string).

(Optional) Select Hex or Text to specify a format for data in the T, S, and P Selector boxes.


Permissions (TP4 Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this transport stack. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this transport stack. Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for site connector permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this transport stack.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this transport stack.
Delete	Delete this transport stack.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this transport stack.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Rights

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Connectors (TP4 Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Connectors property page to display a list of connectors that use this MTA transport stack. You can select a connector and edit its property pages from this property page.


General (X.25 Transport Stack)

  Overview

For communications over an X.25 transport, you can install single or multiple Eicon X.25 port adapters on a single Microsoft Exchange Server computer. A separate X.400 transport stack is required for each X.25 port adapter.

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Name

  Call User Data

  Facilities Data

  X.121 Address

  OSI Address Information

  I/O Port

  Async Phone Line

  Leased Line


Name

Type a name for this transport stack. The default is Eicon X.25 on (servername). You can edit this name only when creating a new transport stack


Call User Data

Type the call user data information supplied by your X.25 provider. You may use up to 256 hexadecimal characters.


Facilities Data

Type additional information (up to 218 hexadecimal characters) related to connection initiation, such as a reversal of line charges.


X.121 Address

The local X.121 address, as specified in the X.25 network service setup.


OSI Address Information

This section is used to further define the address in cases where other applications or services are using the same transport stack.

(Optional) In the T Selector box, type the transport service access point (TSAP) of up to 64 hexadecimal characters (32-character text string).

(Optional) In the S Selector box, type the session service access point (SSAP) of up to 32 hexadecimal characters (16-character text string).

(Optional) In the P Selector box, type the presentation service access point (PSAP) of up to 8 hexadecimal characters (4-character text string).

(Optional) Select Hex or Text to specify a format for data in the T, S, and P Selector boxes.


I/O Port

The I/O port where the Eicon adapter is installed.


Async Phone Line

Select this option to use an asynchronous X.25 connection.


Leased Line

Select this option to use a leased line X.25 connection.


Permissions (X.25 Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this transport stack. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this transport stack. Microsoft Exchange Server provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for site connector permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this transport stack.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this transport stack.
Delete	Delete this transport stack.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this transport stack.
  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Rights

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Connectors (X.25 Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Connectors property page to display a list of connectors that use this MTA transport stack. You can select a connector and edit its property pages from this property page.


General (Connected Site)

Use the General tab to change the organization or site name for the connector.

  Organization

  Site


Organization

The name of the organization using Microsoft Exchange Server. This is the directory name of the organization container.


Site

The name of the site within the organization to which you want to connect.


Routing Address (Connected Site)

Use the Routing Address tab to change the address type, address, or connection cost for the Internet Mail or X.400 Connector.

Internet Mail Connector Routing Address

  Type

  Cost

  Address

X.400 Connector Routing Address

 Organization (o)

  Organizational units (ou)

  Org. unit 1 (ou1) - 4 (ou4)

  Private management domain name (p)

  Administrative management domain name (a)

  Country (c)

  Cost


Organization (o)

0 through 64 characters.


Organizational units (ou)

0 through 32 characters.


Org. unit 1 (ou1) - 4 (ou4)

0 through 32 characters.


Private management domain name (a)

1 through 16 characters.


Administrative management domain name (p)

1 through 16 characters.


Country (c)

2 characters or 3 digits.


Cost

Type a routing cost for this address space entry.


Advanced (X.400 Address Properties)
Advanced (X400 Address Properties)

Use the Advanced property page to define the X.400 address of a mailbox.

  Type

  Value

  User agent numeric id (n-id)

  X 121 address (x121)

  Terminal type (t-ty)

  Terminal identifier (t-id)


Type

The custom attribute name, 0 through 8 characters.


Value

The custom attribute value, 0 through 128 characters.


User agent numeric ID (n-id)

A recipient ID from 0 through 32 digits.


X 121 address (x121)

The recipient's X.121 address, up to 16 digits.


Terminal type (t-ty)

The terminal type used to receive messages.


Terminal identifier (t-id)

The terminal ID used to receive messages.


Permissions

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on a particular object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on a particular object. For an MTA transport stack, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Administrator, Send As, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for mailbox permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this mailbox.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with a mailbox. For example, a user with this permission can modify the job title and display name fields in a mailbox.
Send As	Sends messages with the sender's return address. For example, each user has this permission on their mailbox so they can send messages with that mailbox's return address. This permission is also granted on server objects so directory service processes can send messages to each other.
Mailbox Owner	Log on to this mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this mailbox.
Note  When you give a user or group permissions on an object, they automatically inherit the same level of permissions for all subordinate objects in the directory. For example, if you give a user Administrator rights on the site object, they inherit Administrator rights on all directory objects below the site.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button